1. CHAPTER
07: THE EMERGENCE OF THE MOTHER OF ALL CROP CIRCLES
2. CHAPTER
08: RICHARD HOAGLAND AND THE MESSAGE OF CYDONIA
3. CHAPTER
09: THE CATHIE GRID
David Wilcock’s heavily revised and updated “tour de force” that
synthesizes scientific and metaphysical data into a comprehensive thesis of
planetary transformation.
Topics
include:
·
Hyperdimensional physics
·
The global grid
·
Atlantis
·
The true meaning of crop circle
formations
·
The mayan calendar
·
The great pyramid
·
Secret societies
·
Hidden planetary solar and galactic
time cycles
·
The hall of records
·
Geometric dynamic structures in the
stock market
·
12,000-year old submerged pyramids
in japan
A staggering
amount of rarely seen information is beautifully tied together in 21 chapters
to arrive at a provocative conclusion:
EARTH IS ALREADY UNDERGOING A
DIMENSIONAL SHIFT!!!
This
new addition of 10/20/02 gives us an overview of the entire three-volume series
in the Convergence material.
It's
not as hopeless as you might think; in fact, it might just be perfect.
You are about
to read an organized collection of thoughts that you may have had at various
times in your life, but perhaps could never quite fully integrate. Chances are, you will also find many things in this book that you have
never seen before, and which will utterly dazzle you.
Hence, you
can step out of the waiting room, as this next phase of your own personal
initiation has just begun. The scroll that is about to unfold before you will
resonate deep within, triggering ancient memories from before the time that you
were born, giving you the keys to regaining your own freedom in a world that is
increasingly becoming a perceptual prison of fear and anxiety.
We live in
an age where tiny snippets of information perpetually rise and fall in
everyone's life, blowing about with the futility of a rain of confetti; and
without the proper context to put them into a framework of some kind, they are
simply swept away on the winds of tomorrow.
And then, if
they are remembered, the specific references are generally sacrificed to dim,
murky hearsay, through toxic words like "They" or "that
study" or "I read," which then emerge as, "Did you hear
about that study where they found that the light speed barrier
was broken?
I
read about it a while
ago." We have been conditioned to automatically nod our heads in agreement
when the almighty "They" are invoked. "Oh wow! I didn't know
that they had done that!
Well, who is
"They?" What study? Read it where? This fast-and-loose information
game works temporarily with an open-minded person when hearing new concepts
similar to what we shall be presenting in this book series, but we must
remember that there is a far mightier "They" that has enslaved the
minds of most people -- the consensus of mainstream thought.
If you are
reading these words slowly enough, then you'll probably end up thinking about
this concept, and how it has affected you and those around you, for days. Which is good.
(Sometimes
we will still need to use the word "they" to define a certain subset
of people, such as the alternative science community, or a particular group of
non-physical beings once named, or in discussing a particular study once the
names have been given. We will capitalize the word "They"and surround
it with quotation marks when using it in the context we have just mentioned.)
Ultimately,
it appears that the subconscious gravitates towards the word "They",
as it is a soft, comfortable substitute for God; deep inside, every person
longs to be connected to the source of their being, and therefore wishes to
have a source of omniscience to draw from that he or she "knows is
right."
However, let
us recognize the paradoxical mind-split that this situation has created, once
and for all. We ultimately want to use the word "They" to invoke
God’s presence, but since the Renaissance, science has boldly attempted to
remove God from all “rational thinking” through Pierre Simon de Laplace’s
concept of “logical positivism.”
This is how
“They” of Science have come to automatically assume that God is irrelevant to
the quest for truth. Scientists believe that this quest for truth is best
accomplished by the collection and synthesis of observable data, nothing
more.
The
collection and synthesis of things that we can study and measure is the
scientific process – and there is nothing intrinsically wrong with it. However,
the opinions of mainstream Science are not objective. “Science” is not a
fair game.
Untold
numbers of data points are rejected by nothing more than an emotional
decision that the data doesn’t “feel” right, with the belief in an empty,
Godless universe as the motivating backdrop.
This is then
further bolstered by the heavy opposition of those who have strong media /
political influence and who would stand to lose all of their funding if their prized
theories turned out to be incorrect.
Thus,
planets are just “rocks in the sky” that churn about in a purposeless idiot
dance, in a Universe that is slowly dying away by the “law of entropy,”
eventually collapsing back into the nothingness from which it is believed to
have originated.
Perhaps a
wandering space rock will happen to veer into Earth’s gravity and kill us all,
since in this Godless universe there is no “Scientific” reason to assume that
we will be protected. To suggest otherwise is to suddenly discover that you
have “stormed the machine-gun nest” of those who will accuse you being a
“ridiculous religious fundamentalist crackpot” with no respect for Science.
Hence, any
invocation of the word “They” is almost entirely pointless when you’re trying
to tell another human being that almost every major aspect of conventional
scientific thought is either flawed or incomplete, from the tiniest to the most
massive levels of size, both organic and “inorganic,” and that a hidden,
grandiose model exists that can integrate everything into a fantastic spiritual
vision heretofore unimagined by most.
The
“scientific priesthood” does not want to give up its quasi-Divine claim to the
power of the word “They”, but with the rise of the Internet, many people are beginning
to open their minds and open the books that might have otherwise just sat on
the shelf.
So do try to
remember the specific names of the people who made important discoveries, as
with that knowledge comes power – the power to free
the human mind from a subtle, unspoken and persistent despair.
Normal,
clear, rational thinking is beginning to overtake the infantile desire to
blindly accept what “They” want you to think and believe about the Universe.
And generally, when the truth is presented in its purest form, it is not
difficult for a regular person to understand – they simply may never have
thought of it before.
Once we move
out of the scientific arena into what Carl Sagan patronizingly described as
“the demon-haunted world,” we enter into a completely different playing field
with new rules.
Many of
these new rules are issued on-the-fly by the continual rise and fall of those
who claim to be “channeling” information about how the concept of God
integrates with our physical reality.
A surprising
number of people will grab onto a certain set of teachings and will practically
fight you to the death if you are not willing to believe everything that their
chosen channel said.
Hence, there
is a new crop of folks in town who are embittered by the old atheists, but end
up repeating their same mistakes in the desire to harness the Hammer of the
Gods and wield the almighty power of the word “They.” Everyone seems to want to
be the Messiah these days, and claim an exclusive gateway to the truth that
only “They” can provide.
I do believe
that intuition and higher consciousness have a valuable place in the research
process, but to say that you simply “channeled” a major chunk of new, otherwise
unverifiable specific information is, to me, a distracting shortcut to doing
this research “homework.”
Specific
information is not the main purpose of channeling, as I understand it. The
spiritual sources I have studied with tell us that all research, all science is
ultimately of small importance, and eventually falls away as we move farther
and farther along on the path to true Oneness.
What
does matter the most is the general material that can help us in the evolution
of mind, body and spirit.
I have no
objections to the channels who focus on this type of
material. Every person has a unique and precious gift to give in helping all of
us evolve – and you give them a microphone and some freedom from fear, and if
they are honest enough, they can move the entire room to tears.
Too often
this only happens at funerals, if a bereaved family member decides to speak.
Perhaps for the first time they are truly feeling the gifts of God that were
reflected through that person, and are more honest about their own feelings of
separation from God than they ever normally allow themselves to be. (Most
people do not realize this as the true source of their pain.)
Actors who
can cry on demand in front of a camera and can bring this same response out of
us are seen to be dazzling. We know when they are faking or not, and often the
movies where it is clearly real will enjoy great success.
At the time
of this writing, “Spider Man” is the best-selling movie of all time – and when
his father died and you saw that scared little boy crying close-up, you either melted into it and totally identified with his
character or you had to force that clamp down on your heart once more and drive
away the pain.
The
authenticity of Tobey Maguire’s tears made that scene far more than a typical
“Hollywood death” – as suddenly it became our father down there, and we were
the ones longing for his loving presence to return.
Some
information can dry our tears, make us feel whole, and renew the sense that we
are One. Most of this philosophical information can
never be “proven” and does not involve specific “facts,” but simply appeals to
a philosophical sense of reason, wisdom and loving-kindness.
This type of
material does not require any outside references or validation – it just speaks
to the timeless self within all of us, and thus is definitely not “scientific.”
Specific information can easily draw us away from our own spiritual path if it
invokes fear or does not ultimately relate to our own evolution as conscious
beings who are One.
Even if we
could prove that we’re all going to die tomorrow, next week, next month or next
year, knowing that will do nothing to help us grow and evolve today. And
if our body drops, there it will lie. We will still be ourselves, wondering
what just happened to us as we look down at it, and where to go next.
What matters
most is love and wisdom, female and male, meshing
together into the Unity of compassionate wisdom and the sacramental nature of
all things. And ultimately, I must admit that even the concept of a dimensional
shift in our imminent future matters little, as the true work to be done is
inside of ourselves.
A strict reading of “The Law of One” would say
that most specific information is “transient,” meaning that it is of little
importance. However,
certain concepts of cosmology and physics were answered in quite exquisite and
revealing detail.
So in this
case, it appears that we are being told that it is important for us to remember
if the concepts of “reality” that are automatically believed in the mainstream
are really truthful or not:
* What do you think about when you see the world around you?
* What do you think about when you see the stars?
* What implicit assumptions have you consciously made about “physical matter”?
* Do you think this way because you automatically believe that “They” are right?
* Do you feel you must fawn at the feet of the scientific priesthood and request oblations from the TV, magazine, newspaper and Internet because you were “Bad” in math and science?
* Might you run to speculative tabloid nonsense because it doesn’t really challenge you to think?
* Can you free yourself to embrace Oneness when the rational mind constantly gets in the way with an atheistic science as its backdrop?
* Do you dare to “storm the machine gun nest” of alleged Fact, knowing that you may incur the disfavor of others in order to arrive at greater self-integration?
This is
where certain forms of specific information become important. We need some sort
of a foundation to work off of if we truly want to make progress.
It is a heck
of a lot to ask an uninitiated person to believe that this current dimensional
shift, now nearing completion, is scientifically “real.” Yet, once we find out
that the world around us is truly Divine, fully interconnected and part of an
Ultimate Being that is One, then certain specific information becomes a shuttle
that quickly allows us to merge the small “I” with the large “I AM” that we are
all ultimately a part of.
We are again
led to remember who we really are, as the secrets of the Universe become our
teacher. And once we can reflect that realization of oneness with the Creator
to others, we don’t need to tell them anything. They’ll feel it right away.
So, if
higher beings do exist, and if they respect us, then they should be able to
give us a blend of relevant information about the universe that is both
spiritual and physical, forming a bridge between these worlds.
If we are
indeed living in a Divine Cosmos, then let’s see it! If there is a higher order
to the events that we are now seeing unfold in the world, then let’s find it!
If these beings’ intelligence is truly higher than our own, then they should
already know the answers to the largest problems that perplex the scientific
community, such as the solution to the “Unified Field Theory.”
Furthermore,
in knowing the answers, they should then be able to see what we are missing and
give us a road map to follow for our scientific research so we can fill in the
missing pieces.
Figuring out
how we prove these concepts is the truly marvelous game of the scientific
researcher on the endless quest for Truth – and the three “P’s” of Patience,
Persistence and Psychic Insight are all very helpful, though frequently
lacking.
So, as you
may be aware, the predominant goal of this entire series of books is to rebuild
a complete, Unified model of a Divine Cosmos that will prove to the rational
mind that the Shift of the Ages is already underway, and will reach Convergence
in the near future.
However,
this is far from a situation where we are all magically transformed on the
striking of the clock. There is work to do, and some of it is occurring
collectively and some of it is occurring individually. By the time you have
finished the series, you will understand exactly what I am about to write:
Energetic
conditions are now being created in our Solar System that accelerate
both physical and conscious processes at the same time. The physical
processes, such as the “Earth changes” that are actually occurring
throughout the entire Solar System, aren’t hard to see.
They can
easily be measured with our instruments and studied scientifically. We can and
will nail down the cycles of time that drive these events, and how they work.
The
conscious processes that occur in the collective body of human thought can also
be measured with the blunt movements of financial markets between the extremes
of joy and fear, buying and selling – which will prove to be remarkably in tune
with outside astrophysical factors.
We will also
see historical events that repeat themselves in remarkably similar fashions
over certain cycles of time, such as 2160 years. In addition, certain cycles
perfectly connect physical and conscious processes together – such as finding
an outside energetic cause that simultaneously creates:
* massive earthquakes,
* explosions of nearby stars,
* collapsing of bloated empires,
* formation of new societies from the ashes,
* relatively exact increases in the size of the world’s population by a simple mathematical function,
* the development of new calendar systems for measuring time and the arrival of great spiritual teachers for humanity.
This can be
thought of as a spiraling energetic structure of time that is imploding into a
point of “singularity” in our near future – a point of final spiritual
transformation, if you will, the shedding of the old
ways and the adaptation of the New Heaven and New Earth. Better yet, this cycle
was found in a very ancient source, more than three thousand years before the
birth of Jesus.
The
conscious processes in our own lives are much more subtle, and that is where we
firmly enter the arena of choice. We can either choose to move through the
often-shattering experiences of love and trust, or shut them down in fear and
hate to avoid any further (apparent) damage.
We have
every right to continue to be blind to the suffering of others, and focus only
on our own needs, attempting to manipulate and control others for our own gain.
However, if we make this choice, the energetic conditions that surround us at
this time will make our lives harder and harder and harder.
We get to
learn by experience that we will keep getting smacked around until we surrender
to love for others and for ourselves. Elaborate plans for an imperial “New
World Order” will crumble into dust, the funding for these initiatives
completely evaporated as a byproduct of these changes, as have all previous
empires collapsed as each notch of this “imploding spiral of time” is reached.
At the time
of this writing, the next two notches will hit at 2003 and 2008, as we
increasingly implode towards a moment of singularity.
The most
difficult aspect of this personal / global growth process is to be willing to
accept what you will “lose” along the way, and not get upset about it. It feels
like a form of spiritually-invoked abuse at first, but it is the simple
byproduct of the law of cause and effect, once properly understood – and all is
happening for a Divine purpose.
As these
energetic conditions continue to increase, they will indeed reach a final
“point of no return,” a moment of spontaneous quantum evolution.
As I said,
this point ultimately does not matter, even though we do have a “smoking gun”
that can nail it down to within about a two-year window. We have been told by
sources such as The Law of One that if we have not done the work on
ourselves that these current energetic conditions can produce, we will simply
be transported to a new and different Earth to pick up where we left off once
the “shift” happens.
If we do
choose to shift, and cry, and grow, and love, we shall live to see the day when
every tear that we have shed is an investment in the new being that we shall
metamorphosize into, as the Earth completes its own conscious evolution.
There are
definite dividends to these investments, as what we will have is a world that
will apparently be 100 times more harmonious than what we are living in now,
with the abilities of the greatest masters at our fingertips.
There will
still be plenty of work to do, but we will have crossed a major hurdle and will
actually live in this “dream world.” For now, we can choose today to
make shifts in ourselves that bring Heaven to Earth, and allow us to live in
the glory, grace and trust that has been prepared for us since time immemorial,
on the inevitable spiraling path back into Oneness.
This series
could not have been possible without the diligent work of many thousands
of highly intelligent visionary thinkers. They may not be aware of it, but
their waking and dreaming lives are usually being guided by Divine beings who are completely willing to forego any credit for their subtle
efforts.
Hence, these
researchers ultimately do speak as the Creator. For years they have worked in
isolation, never able to share the same stage with others like themselves and
come together with a common vision.
They are
often genius-level people. Others often steal their ideas without credit. They
are often poor. They may have worked for years on one particular problem,
feeling that the final answer will surely shake the Universe, only to solve it
– and then find out that no one seems to care.
Doors have
slammed in their faces. They have continued their quest for the ultimate truth
of our Being despite formidable odds, lack of proper funding and scorn from
their peers, and thus are unable to get published in “accepted” journals.
They may
actually decide to give up eventually if they continue to be unappreciated, and
focus on more profitable endeavors. A great many of them do have Ph.D. degrees
– but the scientific priesthood simply banishes them as “lost souls” and more
heads nod unquestioningly as “They” issue forth the official decree.
Some of
these visionaries live in foreign countries, such as Russia, and their results
are thus immediately discarded as being “unverifiable,” even if they have been
duplicated in the West.
These
avant-garde thinkers have discovered many pieces of data that are quite
mind-blowing, but which almost never get discussed, even in the “New Age”
movement, usually due to the difficulty of fully understanding the work.
They often
do not make the time to read each other’s material, as they tend to be totally
focused on their own projects. They will talk to you for hours, hardly pausing
to breathe, and go way over your head if you let them, as they are so desperate
to have their voices heard.
You might
see the simultaneous pain and joy in their eyes when they finally get the
chance to speak – a look that says, “Please don’t walk away.” They may
have hair loss from many sleepless nights of furious concentration.
They may
have enormous social ineptitudes and awkward, nervous, eccentric behaviors,
being much more comfortable with work than with people. They may have bad
breath from being so in their minds that they fail to drink enough water to
support the physical body. Their clothes may have been out of style for years.
They often develop
elaborate personal systems of jargon in order to explain the breakthrough
concepts that they have discovered, which can be very
confusing to a newcomer. You may often need to read through their papers
knowing that you can only expect to understand 60 percent of it, at best, while
digging for the “meat” of their findings.
I love and
respect these people, and have been blessed to meet many of them in person,
triggering waves of scientific and spiritual ecstasy in their minds as I
demonstrate how their prized concepts fit into a wider overall model of a
Divine Cosmos, and thus removing their feelings of aloneness. Everyone who has
inspired a concept gets full credit in this series.
With a few
exceptions, such as this book series, no one seems to have been willing enough
to try to unify their concepts into a single overall model. It can be a huge
burden to go through stacks and stacks of books and website printouts.
Most
channelers don’t bother to read these materials, as they may tell you that they
were “never any good at math or science.” Some people have thrown this book
down – right in front of me – as soon as they see pictures of geometric objects
inside, for that very reason. Anything that looks like “work” is often avoided.
Furthermore,
I believe that many people have never even imagined that these types of
concepts could actually be explored with the scientific process. Nevertheless,
consider the following quote from the most well-documented
“channeler” of all time, Edgar Cayce:
When there is the same interest or study given to things or phases of mental and spiritual phenomena as has been and is given to the materialized or material phenomena, then it will become just as practical, as measurable, as meter-able as any other phase of human experience. [2012-1, yr. 1939]
That’s it
right there. It is interesting that this reading was the first to be performed
for client number 2012, as many people are already aware that the year 2012 is
one of special importance in this dimensional shift process that is now
underway, since it represents the ending date of a unique system for counting
time devised by the ancient Mayans of Mesoamerica and the Yucatan.
The Mayas
equate the ending of their own time system with the arrival of a Golden Age for
humanity, a time of dramatic spiritual renewal.
So, there is
a subtle suggestion in the above Cayce reading that if we make a scientific
study of the information surrounding the “phase of spiritual phenomena”
that is the alleged dimensional shift in 2012, we very
well may be able to establish a good case.
I receive
two or three emails a month from people who tell me that they would have
written this book series themselves, but they didn’t have enough of the
specific data to do it.
However,
specific data is exactly what we need if we really want to enact social changes
by convincing the rational mind that this is a genuine phenomenon that is
occurring.
Furthermore,
we also run into the problem that the first “entrance requirement” of this text
is simply having a large enough imagination to take in the concepts
intellectually, emotionally and spiritually, whether or not you actually even
agree with them.
Some people
physically cannot make “room” for this data in their minds to even decide
whether they agree with it or not. Thus, I am often told that the books are
‘hard to read.’
There is
nothing in these books that is intrinsically difficult to understand for a
person with a basic education, but if the person has a closed mind, the
skeptical rationalizations and head-in-the-sand ostrich behavior might get so
vast and labyrinthine that the book must be tossed aside to again regain the
comfort of the status quo, so “They” can grab you by the skin on the back of
your neck and “rescue” you once you have dared to wander from the box.
So, I am one
who likes to gather up this rain of information “confetti” with big bags, and
then lovingly examine each square over years and years of time, memorizing and
documenting all the specific references, seeing how they fit together into a
beautiful mosaic and knowing that eventually the information will be
assimilated into coherent, digestible new thoughts.
Thanks to
the Internet, the walls are finally coming down, with an
infinity of available research to be conducted – but only a finite
number of relevant topics, with a finite number of linked pages that can be
printed, bound, studied and underlined.
Since I
became completely self-employed as an intuitive counselor in 1998, I have made
it my full-time job to literally search “the ends of the earth” and turn over
as many of these stones as I possibly can. [I stopped taking clients as of
August 2005 due to 'demand inundation.']
The stack of
Internet-printed research books that have gone into the Convergence series is
now about four or five feet tall – and you will not have to repeat these steps
yourself, as herein you will find the distilled end-product of these labors, an
entirely new view of the Cosmos that may well “hurt your brain” as you try to
assimilate all the new – and deeply truthful – concepts.
However, if
you can just take your time the second time through (most blast through it
the first time like weary, makeup-clad trick-or-treaters with a big bag of
Halloween candy,) you should be able to fundamentally reconstruct a whole
new vision of reality for yourself that is in harmony with “true reality,” not
the illusion of the mainstream consensus.
I hope you
like the way that I have sculpted these facts together for you. The “they” I
work with seem to think I’ve done a good job. So do I.
And when “They” becomes “I”, then outside opinions no longer matter, do they?
How are you?
Look
around. Look at the people in your life. Look at the changes in yourself. It is
not the same world as it was just a few years, few months, even a few weeks
ago? Everything seems to be going so fast that it is hard to keep up with it.
Something
is definitely going on in the world, something mysterious and inexplicable. You
might even be scared to death about it. You see the weather disasters,
ecological destruction, the violence in society, the
ridiculousness of the media.
You
also are aware of more than a few convincing prophets who have spelled certain
doom for this period, and continue to do so. If not the y2k,
then it was May 5, 2000. And when the huge catastrophes don't come to pass in
one sudden moment, they simply push them further ahead.
The
more lip service you pay to them, the more hopeless you feel, since there is no
pot of gold at the end of their "rainbow."
So,
in order to maintain your sanity, you naturally discredit and ignore what is
being said, continuing to plan for the future as if nothing is going to happen.
It's really the only way to function in daily life.
So
here we are at the dawn of the new millennium. Big deal.
The y2k "computer crash" came and went, with
a "whole lot of nothing" to show for it. Why all the attention, we
ask? Did we all fall for it? Yep, we did, at least on some level.
We
all know that the Earth has now revolved around the Sun more than 2000 times
since the year that we declared as the birth of Christ. Prior to the y2k rollover itself, we couldn't help but think that the
world might very well have taken a crash course in a technology and
electricity-free, pioneering lifestyle, for an unknown length of time.
It
was a HUGE heads-up for humanity, a wake-up call that forced us to ask some
very serious questions. We all had to look directly at the possible future
ahead of us, and think about what life would be like without all the creature
comforts that society has afforded us.
We
also realized that our ecosystem is very delicate, and without some serious
changes, there will be further problems to contend with. We cannot go on
destroying ourselves and our planet forever.
So
was it all doom and gloom? Do we still believe every computer guru, stock
trader, metaphysician or prophet who comes along and tells us, "Well, this
is it?" And now that y2k is history, do we simply
relax and think that "business as usual" will now continue on
indefinitely? Or could there be another side to the story as well?
All
of us need to be very honest with ourselves about what is already happening
right now. The UFO sightings are now on an all-time high level of intensity,
never before seen in recorded history.
All
over the world, economies are collapsing from within, with the US barely
holding its ground as the last bastion of "economic growth and
well-being." At the time of this rewrite, April 2000, the stock market has
been showing unbelievable instability with the breakup of Microsoft in the
works.
On
April 4, 2000, the NASDAQ index lost 11 percent of its entire worth in a single
morning, only to be bought back by the Federal Reserve, ostensibly, to keep the
economy from collapsing. Then, the next day the London markets shut down
completely, theoretically due to a computer glitch but more realistically in an
outrageous attempt to check further losses.
And
on the weekend when this book was finished, the market as of April 15 had
experienced its single greatest crash since 1987.
These
types of economic contortions have been serious enough that even the major
brokerage houses have been closing down due to the extreme volatility of the
markets and their complete inability to make sense out of it.
And
in a relatively similar fashion, the weather is behaving in extremely erratic
ways that obey the prophecies while stumping any rational explanations.
At
the time of this rewrite, the two volcanoes in Edgar Cayce's well known
earth-change formula, Etna and Montserrat, right near Vesuvius, are erupting.
As of early April 2000, Antarctica lost two more icebergs of simply colossal
size, threatening shipping in that area.
All
over the world, the environment is collapsing at a very real and very
horrifying rate, and you don't have to be a "tree-hugger" to see it.
There is an endless stream of information every week in the world media that
points towards the reality of these circumstances.
Indeed,
if we are able to step away from our own denial and look at things from the
perspective of clean, unfiltered truth, it isn't hard to see that we are on the
verge of permanently destroying ourselves and our planet.
Everyone
knows this on some level, some more consciously than others. The y2k period made humanity much more aware of this, because
even if we didn't believe anything would happen, the idea of a social collapse
was still being discussed on a worldwide level.
The
truth of the degree of problems that exist is much too hard for most of us to
accept, because of the feeling of utter futility that it naturally creates.
Species are going extinct at a rate that is faster than we can measure.
The
oceans are heating so rapidly that huge pieces of Antarctica are continuing to
drop off into the ocean. The ozone layer is being destroyed, the oil is being
pumped out of Mother Earth until none remains, and it doesn't seem as though
any one person or group of people could do anything to stop these things from
occurring.
Our
society has grown essentially out of control, tearing down trees for development
all over the world at a rate that is much faster than they can be replaced.
And
therefore, once stripped of all barriers and boundaries of denial and
ignorance, our collective Ego mind must conclude that it is faced with the
scientific fact of its own imminent destruction; if not in our generation, then
certainly in future generations, unless something very drastic is done to stop
it.
Whether
any of these systems would change from within, regardless of external threats,
is certainly a question of serious debate. And even if we did collapse the
industrial economy as it now stands, could we really change the weather
patterns that are already in place?
But what about our collective subconscious? Even though you will never see this in the mainstream
media, it is not difficult to observe that a massive movement is occurring
within the populace at large; a movement towards the "basic Christ
principles" of love and acceptance for self and for others.
Faced
with the impossible task of changing the world, we must turn within and seek to
find the ways we can change ourselves. Massive metaphors play themselves out in
the public consciousness that lead to our own personal realizations of
wrongdoing.
The
impeachment trials of President Clinton in 1998, for example, served as a
metaphor for each individual, leading them to a profound inner question:
What if that was me up there in the Presidency? How would my own life look if every possible secret and embarrassing detail of my life was revealed, literally, to the entire world? Would I also be deemed unfit to be President and threatened with impeachment?
The
questions that all of us are asking ourselves these days are very deep, very
profound and very meaningful. Without a full awareness of what we are heading
into, we might not realize how important these questions really are. That is
where this book, and the information contained within it, comes into play.
At
first glance, this book appears to simply contain a scientific thesis,
describing a new and comprehensive, harmonic
model of the Big Universe Out There. But the question it proposes is very
spiritual, very real, very important.
Are
we all "getting the message?" Are we all trying to align with what we
understand the nebulous term of "spirituality" to mean? Or, are we
continuing to protect and preserve our own self-interests at the expense of
others?
When
we really look at the problems that we are encountering as a human entity, is
it not difficult to see the truth? Can we not see that the entire gamut of problems we now face are inherently caused by our
own self-serving actions?
Our
companies continue to measure their success solely on the basis of how much
profit they produce. If the company makes money, then the company is a success.
If the company goes broke, the company is no good. The more money the company
makes, the more of a success it is.
This
can apply equally well to our own self-conceptions. The materialism of our
society, "programmed" into us day after day from a dancing colored
box, teaches us to think the same way.
Any
of us with this "programming," when we rise to levels where we can
actually have access to such wealth, must fight a very natural predisposition
to hoard it, to treasure it, to want it all for ourselves and to never, never,
never be happy unless we have more, more, more. And even once we have more, we
still feel empty.
Something,
somewhere, somehow is still missing -- even if we have the white picket fence,
two point-five children, beautiful spouse and great job. Many of our lives just
seem to be empty, and the former definitions of success in our society no
longer seem to hold weight.
Along
these same lines, our spiritual institutions are changing dramatically. Rigid
dogmas have given way to a new set of questions, where many of us no longer
feel that we have a clear or organized idea of what, or who, God really is.
Much
to the chagrin of avid church supporters and Fundamentalists, Christianity is
like a withering fruit, clinging to the dying vine of its past and fearing the
inevitable plummet to the Earth.
This
collapse of religion is being openly acknowledged moreso in England than in
America, where the organized churches are at such desperate points that they
are telling their remaining congregations that they will either have to raise a
certain amount of money or start firing vicars, closing churches and even
consolidating different denominations together in order to survive!
As
numerous surveys report that well over 50 percent of all Americans are actively
involved in New Age studies, including chakras, crystals, colors and
channeling, it is not hard to see that religion is no longer answering our own
"big questions."
And
now, with the presence of extraterrestrials as an increasingly real
proposition, we can no longer be content with the old answers. Something real
is going on, and those who refuse to acknowledge that fact are looking more and
more ridiculous with each new television special, movie, filmstrip, photograph,
mass sighting and ex-government "whistle-blower" that comes forward.
So most of us can now safely say that "we are not
alone," since it is virtually impossible that every single report and
sighting is a figment of the imagination. But where does God fit in to all of this?
Most
professional UFOlogists are disgusted by the slightest mention of a spiritual
meaning to the UFO phenomenon, and anyone trying to assert such a connection is
shunned. When asked why 'they' are here, all too often we hear fear-based
statements about how some form of looming invasion could be in the works, or
that they are simply studying us to see what we are going to do in these
troubled times, or even more nefarious hypotheses about how they are simply
using us for "parts."
Few
UFOlogists want to humble themselves enough to admit that 'they' just might be
here to help us. God might very well have a lot of help, and once help has
arrived, do we choose to accept it or continue to ignore its essential mission
and purpose?
And
so, regardless of where we look for it, if we have not made a place for God and
/ or God's helpers in our lives, then indeed there must not appear to be any
hope for getting through the future unscathed.
As
the corporations continue to rake in the dough, the Earth inexorably moves
towards death and sterility. Without the notion and presence of God's forces as
a tangible, real thing, there literally could seem to be no hope.
No
one can honestly accept that our social structures will change quick enough to
avert catastrophe on their own, after reading a healthy dose of articles describing
the incredible acceleration of Earth Changes that we are witnessing.
We
have made our bed, and now we have to lie in it. To many of us, a fat wallet
provides a high that leads to myopic blindness, and we will simply refuse to
change until it is already far, far too late.
But
getting back to our discussion involving the extraterrestrials, what if
everything that we are discussing is going exactly the way that it is supposed
to happen?
Should
we have the audacity to be fearful when such miraculous visitations are showing
up all around us?
Can
we honestly think that we understand the Universe when everything we see is
telling us that the dreams
might be even more real than the reality?
Will
we also one day have anti-gravity propulsion, limitless free energy sources,
super-light-speed travel and cooperation with a whole galaxy worth of
intelligent beings?
With
the technology that our visitors display and the messages that they seem to be
giving us in greater and greater numbers, in our dreams and through dedicated
channels including the author of this book, can we deny that 'they' are here on
a spiritual mission, supervising an imminent renaissance and rebirth of the
human spirit?
Could
we just possibly be on
time, going through a process already well scripted and rehearsed
throughout the entire universe?
And
is time truly nothing more than a straight-line path, or are we indeed subject
to other, more mysterious cycles of human civilization, based upon a hidden
harmonic structure in the Universe?
Our
media seems to have a complete blindness to the amazing spiritual events that
are occurring in many of our lives, as well as the unbelievably bizarre
collapses and physical / emotional catastrophes that are occurring in the lives
of individuals all around us.
If
we sit down and think about it from an expansive spiritual perspective, it
would seem that the "law of Karma" is indeed real. Our thoughts
create our experiences, and we attract exactly what we have asked for.
If
we live in fear, then fearful events happen to us. If we live in trust, then
somehow everything always works out. And now more than ever, anything in our
lives that holds us back from making positive and loving choices is being
burned off.
We
can look at those around us who seem to be the most deeply lost in self and see
the personal apocalypse already occurring. The events on the planet seem to be
no different.
As
we unquestionably move closer and closer to some sort of event of major
proportions, or what the Ancients referred to as the Shift of the Ages, do we
really know what we are moving towards?
Indeed,
why is it that the entire "outside world" of extraterrestrial
intelligence seems to be doing everything within their power to alert us of
their presence now?
Have
we ever before had so much convincing evidence that there were previous
advanced civilizations on Earth, and that they may well have been in contact
with these same extraterrestrials before?
Why
is it that almost every person knows deep down inside that our own military /
corporate / government / media hierarchy is practically bashing us over the
head with the reality of extraterrestrial life, just so that they don't have to
"officially" declare it?
Why
do we all keep waiting for "them" to release the secrets, when we
already know the truth but just don't want to make that dizzying step of really, really believing it?
And
with incredibly accurate psychics in history such as Edgar Cayce, can we really
deny that precise telepathic communication with this higher intelligence is
possible?
Why
do so many of us feel that something wonderful is about to happen? Are we
expecting the truth of open contact with these extraterrestrials, of becoming a
member of an interplanetary conclave of intelligent life?
Are
we paying attention to the fact that the more we try to "do good," the more our lives seem to flow in unpredictable
and beautiful ways, answering all of our prayers?
Do
we notice the presence of synchronicity in our lives, how so many strange
things seem to be happening that suggest that a higher spiritual force is at
work, that we just happen to be at the right place at the right time?
Why
are there increasing numbers of people out there, such as the author of this
book, who are clearly able to contact these higher
intelligences, and repeatedly produce results including accurate future
prophecies that would be otherwise impossible to attain?
Why
are our dreams so filled with wonder that we awaken with awe and reverence,
longing to return to wherever we had just been? Why, indeed, do we "just
trust" that even in the midst of all the seemingly depressing and
terrifying collapse occurring all around us that there is also new life, new
wonder, new beauty and love?
Why
do we somehow know that we are, indeed, about to experience something so
fantastic as to be the Single
Greatest Moment of All Time?
In
our minds, in our hearts and in our souls, often beneath our direct conscious
awareness, we know:
we remember:
we understand.
We are all aware, in some inconceivably vast way, that a fantastic event is about
to occur on Earth.
The
Christians would have it as the Second Coming. The UFO buffs would have it as
either the "big government disclosure," the "landing on the
White House lawn" or both, as one may well trigger the other.
The
doomsayers might choose to see that we are about to be vomited off the surface
of the earth by volcanoes, hurricanes and tidal waves in an epic pole shift,
asteroid collision or coronal mass ejection from the Sun, and insist that
"it's all over."
Others
of us are much less certain about what it is, and therefore we can continue to
keep it at arm's length and try to go on like nothing is going to happen.
Indeed,
we might never truly understand this event, or even believe that something is
really going to change, until it already has. And at that point, whenever
"it" happens, everything that happened before that moment will seem
to be nothing more than a faded chapter of life in dull monochrome.
Our
new lives will burst with color in a way that we could never have possibly
understood. It is quite hard to imagine, for example, the day when every TV
station, every newspaper and magazine headline, every government leader and
every thinking person on the entire planet finally says in unison: "We are
not alone."
Or
even better yet: the day of world peace, when every person, every nation and
every race looks at each other, at the earth and at all other forms of
intelligent life in the universe and says:
"I love you and I respect you for who and what you are, as I love and respect myself for who and what I am. I am sorry for anything that I have ever done to hurt you and I hope you can forgive me.
Let's work together to create a new world - a world without hurt, a world without pain, a world without crying children rotting away in festering starvation, a world where we are truly One with each other, with our earth and with the One Creator. So be it."
Our
collective feminine Lunar self, symbolized by the number 1080 in ancient
teachings, must overthrow the stranglehold that the masculine Solar self known as 666 now has over the planet. (And yes,
it is this dominance of the masculine archetype on Earth that is behind the
metaphorical Biblical prophecies for this period.)
Both
ourselves and our society must again embrace the
Universal Feminine in love, thus giving us unity, as the ancient number 1746
represents. Our numerous creative works prepare us for this 'fusion' event on
the subconscious level.
In
the 1998 movie Pleasantville,
a world of black-and-white turns to color as people learn to leave behind their
outmoded, 1950's-style beliefs and achieve true personal, emotional and
intellectual freedom.
In
The Truman Show,
a man symbolizing the collective mind of humanity comes to the stunning
realization that the entire world around him is constructed as a giant
illusion, where he is the star that millions of people in the outside world watch on
their television screens.
In
Close Encounters of the
Third Kind, the lead character is driven by an arresting series of
visions to finally board a gigantic extraterrestrial spacecraft, forever
leaving behind his Earth life for the promise of something far greater.
In
the JRR Tolkien Lord of
the Rings series, the entire world is preparing to undergo an
incredible, multidimensional shift never before known in history. In 2001, a Monolith is
found that seems to alert an extraterrestrial presence of our own "coming
of age."
Guided
by this force, spaceship commander David Bowman eventually enters into a vortex
of spiraling light that first ages him and then returns him to a fetal state,
indicating new life in a mysterious higher realm.
In
2010, the
metaphor expands even more: Bowman returns as a multi-dimensional entity,
telling us of an imminent, unbelievable transformation. "What is going to
happen?" they ask him. "Something wonderful," he whispers,
shaking his head gently from side to side with reverent, loving awe.
jupiter eventually explodes and becomes a star, creating an
entire new solar system for us to use within our own. On every television
screen on Earth, the spiritual forces write, "All these worlds are
yours... Use them together... Use them in peace."
In
James Cameron's movie The
Abyss, a fantastic and unspeakably beautiful extraterrestrial world
is found in our own oceans, and after we achieve contact with it, it rises to
the surface of the sea of our consciousness.
In
Ghost, our
lead character is a spiritual being that says goodbye to the pottery-throwing
woman symbolizing Mother Earth to enter into a vortex of pure light. In Cocoon,
the old folks go off with the luminous extraterrestrials to a place where they
"won't get sick, won't get any older and won't ever die."
In
E.T., a
fallen alien being, representing ourselves, finally gets to return home after
nearly dying from living on Earth with "the children."
In
the Star Wars
trilogy, Darth Vader, as the symbol of the crushing weight of male-driven
corporate America, is overthrown by the heroic power of love, and we realize
that he is our own father, our own family, and he is welcomed back, newly
transformed.
In
Titanic, as
the ship representing our modern world sinks, throngs of people surround a
minister who boldly and solemnly reads the scripture, saying, "And there will be a new heaven, and a new earth...And there shall be no more death,
for we will have everlasting life... "
People
go to bed and peacefully prepare for what is going to come. Then, people from
"the future"
come with exotic space-age undersea equipment to try to reconstruct the past
events that had happened there, and these people include one of the original
participants.
In
Contact, we
achieve communication with an extraterrestrial race, and this leads us to build
a machine that enables us to journey to their own
level. It is an exhilarating journey of light, sound and color, rocketing
through unspeakably vast wormholes to a realm of pure, luminescent peace and
beauty, where the angelic entities present themselves as members of our own
family.
In
Mission to Mars,
the beings responsible for building the "Face" reveal to us that
"They are us: we are them," and one of the best "Ascension"
finales on film occurs in the last two minutes.
And
in The Matrix,
lead character Neo finally believes
in himself enough that he gains complete control over the illusion
of the physical world itself, defeating the negative forces that were trying to
destroy him and acquiring Christlike abilities.
Time
after time, as we see these beautiful movies, tears stream down our faces as a
part of us, somehow, some way, knows
and believes that something as fantastic as this is going to happen to
us in our own lifetimes. But it seems to be so far away, so far away, beyond
our grasp or comprehension.
The
ultimate conclusion of this book is that the event commonly known as "The
Shift of the Ages" or "Ascension" is indeed going to occur, and
it is indeed unspeakably fantastic.
The
chances are that we will never truly understand exactly what this means or how
we will personally experience it until we are actually going through it. The
truth of its imminent arrival is practically exploding out at us from all
directions, both positively and negatively.
Perhaps
this is why it is so amazing that almost
no one in the prominent UFO/metaphysics field is talking about it at all.
Everyone
seems to gather information that will get quite close to describing it, without
ever actually identifying The Big Picture as it really is. Nor can we simply
ascribe this transformation to a tired old Christian prophecy, as it was indeed
forecasted long before Christianity ever came onto the scene.
But
what exactly is this event going to be, you say? Sure, we all have an idea, but
each idea can be different from the others.
Some
people familiar with these ideas feel that it simply represents a shift in
consciousness that will occur here on the planet, with everyone making sudden
strides in their awareness and the dawning of a new day, a new consciousness.
Some
people feel that it has to do with the moment when we achieve open contact with
the "visitors" and become a member of a group of planetary societies
with technology far vaster than ours, which could certainly create the previous
scenario as well.
Some
others, such as James Redfield in The
Celestine Prophecy, take the opinion that the body itself will
actually disappear from view in a flash of light, or that some sort of
spontaneous, holographic mutation of our DNA is going to happen at this moment.
The
author of this book wondered about these questions just like everyone else.
Before he ever started doing psychic readings, he had been fastidiously
recording his dreams for over five years.
It
was through this medium that he was first exposed to the notion of Ascension,
and of what it might actually involve - or at least a healthy, inspiring
metaphor for it, in order to make the subconscious understand its impact.
What
follows is a transcript of the Aug. 1, 1996 dream that first gave him a direct
metaphor to convey the wonder of what this experience might feel like when it
actually comes.
I was standing in a clearing where I could see a large image of the moon against a bluish sky. During this time, I noticed that there was a round circle of glowing light on the surface.
I got excited as I realized that others reported seeing this same thing before, and that it was basically supposed to be a reflection from an extraterrestrial "base" on the Moon.
As I watched it, it expanded into a fireball that was 1/3 of the width of the Moon in the middle. Then, it shrank back down to a point and expanded several more times, in a fluid expansion-contraction mode.
It eventually overtook the whole moon and shone brilliantly in white, with a bluish tinge. Energy seemed to be coming in from the sides, and I was privy to the most fantastic special effects ever seen - reminiscent of what happened to Jupiter in Arthur C. Clarke's 2010, but even more incredible.
The energy assembled itself into the form of a blue-white torus, like an inner tube. There was black in it as well. It seemed to roll off of the Moon while spinning around its internal center, moving closer towards me on Earth.
I noticed about five thin circular bands of energy that were spinning around the torus faster than it was spinning itself. They had these sparkling "stars" that seemed to be of a luminescent, shimmering black orbit in the circle.
The stars were black, the rest of the circle much lighter colored. It was all spinning and spiraling as it headed down towards me. All of the differing motions made for quite an impressive spectacle. It threatened to draw in everything that it contacted like some giant, living black hole.
By this time, I was utterly and completely awestruck like never before. I felt like this was the most fantastic thing that had ever happened to me in my entire life. I began to fly up into the vortex, noticing that there was a blue ray on about a 45-degree angle that was connecting me back to the Earth somehow.
It was at this time that I had realized that this had to be it - the big moment - the Ascension. I was so excited that I could hardly even believe it.
As I flew up into it, it became a gigantic, 300-foot wide tunnel of swirling, blue-white light. It was very bright, but cool and not unpleasant.
It appeared as though I were wrapped in the middle of an endless tunnel composed of galactic arms, spinning and turning. I seemed to be hardly more than a speck compared to the epic size and vastness of the vortex I was traveling through.
Part of what made it so incredible was that there was absolutely no sound, except for the incredible shouts of ecstasy in my own mind.
I could tell that I was rapidly moving closer towards a sparkling wall of this luminescent blue light at the end of the swirling cylinder. Once I passed through it, I would never be the same again.
As all of this was happening, I felt an emotion not unlike fear. I thought to myself, "Now? What will happen? A higher dimension? I can't believe it!"
I had a dim idea of what to expect there, but I felt that thought as just a remote patch in a corner of my mind. It was too indistinct. I really didn't know what to expect, but I didn't resist it. I basically was welcoming the experience.
As my hands plunged into the blue light, it dissipated around them like water and vanished; I was on solid ground again...
THE TEACHINGS OF RA
After
an experience of this magnitude, he obviously yearned to know more. He had
already become familiar with the idea of Ascension as a possibility, but it was
the sheer epic quality of this dream that made him ask even deeper questions.
This
dream directly led to a renewed interest in studying a series of books called
the Ra Material and/or the
Law of One, which were allegedly extraterrestrial communications.
In these books, a Ph.D. physicist, university professor and airline pilot by
the name of Don Elkins found the apex of his lifetime of research into the UFO
phenomenon through telepathic contact with extraterrestrial intelligence.
For
twenty years he had been working with various gifted individuals who would go
into trance and speak on behalf of these higher intelligences. And time after
time, Dr. Elkins would ask them the most difficult, challenging questions
coming from the forefront of his research into advanced physics, and he would
get the answers.
These
answers were repeatedly coming from those who had no knowledge of these things
while awake.
It
was at the end of this twenty-year period that Elkins' work with Carla
Rueckert, a very successful channel, broke through to a much more substantial
level.
This
breakthrough was directly precipitated by the arrival of Jim Mc Carty, who
thought that he was coming to help Don and Carla catalog, categorize and
organize the volumes of material that they had already produced. Instead,
something totally unexpected happened.
They
attracted a true heavy-hitter of the higher realms, perhaps the main group
responsible for our care: a huge spiritual group of entities that had
apparently fused themselves into one single mind that called itself Ra, and
said that they were from the sixth dimension, millions of years more advanced
than modern humanity.
The
words and concepts were highly sophisticated and precise, unlike any other type
of channeled material ever seen, and were referred to by one professor as
"akin to a Ph.D. dissertation on epistemology."
As
soon as Ra began speaking, they made it clear that this was the first time that
they had been able to get through an undistorted series of messages in
thousands of years of human history.
Carla
was brought to the complete unconscious state and taken out of her body for the
Ra contact to occur, and had no knowledge whatsoever of what had occurred while
she was away.
This
contact occurred in 1981, well before the field of channeling had reached such
a huge surge of rather repetitive, simplistic and contradictory information
that is often seen on the Internet and in certain magazines and books today.
For
whatever reason, the work has never become very well-known, but this certainly
is no fault of the material itself. The quality and gravity of the information
that Ra presents is unlike any other that this author has ever seen.
As
David continued reading this material, he came to a greater and greater
realization that what Ra was truly trying to convey to Dr. Elkins was a completely new view of physics as
we now know it.
In
this new view, there are multiple dimensions, each one capable of sustaining
intelligent lifeforms in time and space. Each dimensional level is higher or
closer to Oneness than the one before it.
Ra
explained that those on Earth were on the third dimension, and that there were
a full four dimensions of higher experience that we would go through before
returning to the One Creator. At the point that this total reunion is
accomplished, there would be no consciousness of any separation, only a
consciousness of unity and Oneness.
Ra
also explained that each dimension gave different levels of teaching along the
path to this Oneness, and that our own level was called "The Choice."
According
to Ra, all that we have to do is choose whether we are going to be of service to
self or service to others.
The
realization of the importance of serving others is our first step towards
re-aligning with the Oneness that they so often spoke of.
If
we only think of ourselves as separate beings and do not choose to love and to
help others, then we are forgetting that we are truly only One Being, and that
therefore serving others is serving our own True Self. What this Oneness wants
for us, says Ra, is to simply love and get along with
each other, to spread harmony and truth.
Obviously,
this is an identical message to that which is spoken by most channelers now in
the New Millennium. However, there were some very large differences between
what Ra was saying and what the average channeler usually speaks in more recent
times.
We
must remember that Ra was being interviewed by a very gifted physicist, and Dr.
Elkins was often completely befuddled in his attempts to understand Ra's words.
In
the five books of the Law of One series, Ra lays out a comprehensive cosmology
that is extremely internally consistent. David tried over and over again to
find even one time when Ra contradicted themselves or appeared to falter, but
could not.
Even
more importantly, this cosmology was not simply all in the realm of lofty
speculation -- for all intents and purposes, Ra was systematically teaching Dr.
Elkins about a whole new form of physics, a new form of understanding the way
that the Universe functions, rooted in compassion, harmony and wisdom.
Ra
was pleased that Dr. Elkins was familiar with the work of physicist Dewey
Larson, who proposed that space and time were in a reciprocal relationship --
meaning that for every dimension of space, there was a corresponding dimension
of time.
They
also mentioned that there was a lot more to understand than what Larson had
come up with, but that it was a good start.
And
as their words in the five books continued, they gave many very precise
statements that indicated exactly what this system of physics was, and its
impressive spiritual implications.
As
David read through the Law of One books and studied them in greater and greater
detail, he realized that the systems that Ra were discussing were already
becoming more and more visible in the scientific literature just since 1981,
when the book was first published.
The
more he read, the more shocked he was to realize that apparently no one else
had ever seen how many connections there really were, or that they even existed
in the first place.
Having
already read and digested some 300 metaphysical titles by this point, David realized
that the wisdom of Ra had now become a vast umbrella of truth that tied
together many, many separate areas of study, providing answers where many other
researchers had to work it out on their own.
As
time has progressed into the present, while this book is being rewritten, David
has continued to find more and more scientific evidence to back up Ra's
assertions.
Earlier
versions of this book were made available on the Internet as early as spring of
1998, but the amount of new information has significantly been enhanced since
the book's inception.
The
version that you now hold in your hands is specifically designed to upgrade the
existing body of information before launching into a three-book series that
will retain the original name Convergence and will be investigating these same
topics with even more depth than before.
The
crowning achievement of truly being able to decode the physics systems that Ra
has described is the knowledge that the
Earth is going to undergo a dimensional shift.
Ra
explains that there is a natural structure to the galaxy that we are all
passing through at this time, a structure where certain portions of the galaxy
have a higher concentration of "energy" than others.
As
we naturally pass into these areas of higher frequency, there are changes
visible in our Sun as well as in the Earth itself. And even more importantly,
there are changes in each one of us as well.
Although
we cannot know for sure how or when this event will actually occur in our own
personal experience, we know that Ra tells us that at the conclusion of this
shift, life on Earth will be fully 100
times more harmonious than it is now.
All
of the abilities that were demonstrated by Jesus and much more will be readily
available to everyone.
This
is apparently not a gradual transition by any means, but an epic change that
occurs in a very brief period of time, when the critical threshold in
consciousness is finally reached.
Quite
significantly, our latest research has revealed that Ra was right about there
being an underlying energy to the Universe that has fluidlike properties of
vibration.
Modern
scientists call this "zero-point energy" or the "virtual
particle flux." We now know that there are 'virtual' counterparts to all
the basic components of the atom, (such as protons, neutrons and electrons,)
which appear to be exactly the same except that they continually
"wink" in and out of existence.
The
discussions of zero-point energy have captivated the world of quantum mechanics
as well as many other aspects of physics, as we now must conclude that all of
reality that we see is fundamentally built up from an energy that remains
hidden to us.
And
for many, this is not a very comfortable concept, as we like to "get our
hands" on the world around us, not be confronted with a mysterious energy
that we cannot directly measure.
And
yet, experiments and prototypes such as the Casimir effect, sonoluminescence,
and anti-gravity / free energy devices have already proven that this energy
must exist.
In
the future editions of this body of research, now in progress, we will cover
the study of zero-point energy in far more detail.
Modern
researchers have brought back the forgotten term "aether" for this
energy, as up until the beginning of the 20th century,
scientists believed that it was there.
As
just indicated, those who now work with the concepts of the 'aether' have
discovered that it can indeed be harnessed to produce all of the basic effects
seen in the UFO, including anti-gravity, limitless generation of energy from
"empty space" as well as the possible travel through
higher-dimensional spaces.
Clearly,
our understandings about reality are changing very quickly, and David has
continued to be impressed as each new finding only helps him to greater
understand what Ra had already been saying all along in the Law of One series.
Most
of this book is dedicated to giving us a good, general overview for how this
system of "aether" energy works, and how it is related to the
dimensional shift that we are now approaching. We will see that the principles
of vibration
are the most fundamental in understanding the behavior of the aether, or what
we might simply want to call spiritual energy.
Part
One of this book, The
Harmonic, Multidimensional Universe, explains in the next chapter
that the master organization of this energy is in an Octave of dimensions.
Ra
referred to the different levels as "densities," as what we actually
have is one unified energy that simply exists in
different levels of concentration.
It
is the relative speed of
vibration that determines each level of concentration, and we will
show that there are three levels to this vibration that must be considered
equally: light, sound and geometry.
When
we look at the aether itself, we see that it is comprised of a vast sea of
energy "units" that we will refer to as Consciousness Units. Due to
the basic laws of harmony and vibration, these units will always maintain a
spherical field, but the characteristic vibrations of each "density"
or dimension will give them a different "color", "sound"
and geometric structure.
We
will take a look at the exact numbers that are involved in these harmonics, and
see how much they reveal when studied more closely. More importantly, we will
see that these consciousness units are not bound by space or time as we know
it- they can be tinier than the tiniest subatomic particle or as large as the
entire Universe itself.
In
Chapter Three we explain how the Ancients knew of this system of
three-dimensional geometric vibrations, and built structures such as the pyramids
to harness these forces. We will also look into the idea that very similar
structures known as the Martian Monuments fit this pattern as well.
We
also will take a look at the amazing structure and complexity of the Great
Pyramid itself, especially at the time that it was first built, and with our
understandings of this universal energy source it becomes quite easy to see
that it truly is an artifact of a higher level of technology than we now
possess.
In
Chapter Four we explain how modern physics is beginning to catch up to this
ancient knowledge through such things as "Superstring Theory."
Then,
we bring in a quote from the well-known entity Seth, channeled by Jane Roberts
in the late 60's and for years afterwards, which reveals that almost identical
information to this advanced theoretical physics concept had been given well
before Superstring Theory or the Ra books ever came about.
In
Chapter Five we begin looking at the true father of all current
multi-dimensional physics models, an Indian mathematician known as Srinivasa
Ramanujan. We will clearly see that Ramanujan's information was acquired
through a mystic process that bears remarkable similarity to channeling.
Furthermore,
we will see that the key number of dimensions in Ramanujan's models was always
eight, thus lending further support to Ra's model of an Octave.
In
Chapter Six we devote a great deal of space to an exploration of a passage
dictated by Seth in 1971, which gives us a much greater understanding of how
the sphere-based "consciousness units" of aether energy function in
our Universe.
Then,
in Chapter Seven we will see that the extraterrestrial forces are continuing to
try to teach us this information through the "crop circle"
phenomenon. In these pictograms which emerge overnight in various crops, often
accompanied by anomalous sightings and inexplicable heating and bending of the
crops themselves, we find all the blueprints for this model of harmonic aether
geometry in place.
We
specifically zero in on a formation known as Barbury Castle 1991, and show how
precisely it displays this complex three-dimensional information, both
literally and symbolically as well.
We
also investigate the work of Gerald Hawkins, who proved that the most common
formations that were seen in the crops were directly related to musical
proportions, in a perfect harmonic relationship.
With
this knowledge in place we open up Part Two of the book, Planetary Grids and Ancient
Knowledge. In this section, we explore how these geometries
directly affect the fundamentals of the Earth itself.
Science
is now catching up with Ra in revealing that these aetheric energies or
"consciousness units" are constantly streaming in and out of all
physical objects in the Universe, continually forming them moment by moment. We
remember that size does not affect these units, and that the sphere of the
planet itself can resonate as one massive "unit" in its own right.
Once
we know that such behavior is expected of the Earth in the new physics, all we
have to do is start looking for it. We then begin Chapter Nine by discussing
the work of Bruce Cathie in this regard.
Cathie
gave clear evidence that extraterrestrial beings were navigating the earth
using a geometric "grid" that consists of the simple cube and
octahedron geometries, crisscrossing over the Earth's surface.
Cathie
made incredible strides in decoding the harmonic structures of these energies,
all of which ties in very neatly with the models that Ra espoused in the Law of
One series. Furthermore, Cathie's model does indeed provide a harmonic basis
for the Unified Field Theory of physics, which may well prove to be his most
lasting accomplishment. We also include some of Ra's quotes in this chapter to
help the reader see the connections that are involved.
In
Chapter 10, we discuss the Philadelphia Experiment as one of a number of
examples that help to show us that a simple magnetic field, when used to create
the proper harmonic and geometric vibrational frequencies, can actually
concentrate aetheric energy in a local area and cause a dimensional shift to
occur.
This
well-known experiment supposedly was the result of a Navy experiment in radar
invisibility that went awry. In the future, it may well be a usable
"teleport" technology.
We
also remind ourselves that the far greater aspect to this energetic change is
occurring in our Solar System as a whole, relative to our placement to the
center of the galaxy and aided by the harmonic cycles that we will find in the
Sun.
Then,
in Chapter 11 we continue our exploration of the Global Grid with this
knowledge of the energies involved as being very real, and quite possibly
engineerable.
The
work of Richard Hoagland and the Enterprise Mission is cited as a means of
showing us how the geometry of the "aether" emerges in planets.
Through an analysis of the Martian Monuments, Hoagland's team discovered that
an encoded message was set forth which gave precise information for future
visitors to decode the basics of the aetheric physics discussed by Ra.
This
fundamentally comes about through the observation of a tetrahedron inside a
sphere, which we will have already seen in Chapter Seven. Hoagland's team went
on to show this tetrahedron as an underlying energy structure in almost every
planet in our Solar System, responsible for cloud bands, giant volcanoes,
sunspots and giant swirling vortices such as Jupiter's Great Red Spot.
Then,
after establishing the placement of the tetrahedron with the cube and
octahedron that we had already been investigating from Bruce Cathie, we begin investigating
the work of Carl Munck, who showed us how these energetic forces on Earth were
precisely harnessed by the Ancients.
Through
Munck's work, known as "The Code," we see that almost every single
pyramid, sacred site and earthwork from ancient times on the planet is part of
a vast, planet-wide matrix of coordinates, centered at the Great Pyramid of
Gizeh.
We
bring in an excerpt from the Wilcock Readings as he struggled to understand how
to unify the work of Munck with Bruce Cathie, Richard Hoagland and other
"Grid" researchers we will meet in the next chapter.
In
Chapter 12 we complete our geometric mapping of the higher dimensions on Earth
through the investigation of the work of Ivan P. Sanderson, then Goncharov,
Morozov and Makarov and culminating with professors William Becker and Bethe
Hagens.
The
only two of the five basic "Platonic" geometries left undiscovered at
this point were the icosahedron and dodecahedron, as Cathie showed us the cube
and octahedron and Hoagland showed us the tetrahedron.
We
see that Sanderson discovered the presence of the icosahedron through a careful
study of worldwide "trouble spots" for marine and air travel such as
the Bermuda Triangle. His exhaustive efforts came up with twelve fundamental
"Devil's Graveyards," all of which were spaced in perfect harmonic
proportions from each other.
When
these spots are connected together, an icosahedron is formed. The Russian
scientists Goncharov, Morozov and Makarov expanded on this idea by including
the dodecahedron in the Grid model as well.
They
suddenly realized that the combined icosahedron / dodecahedron grid appeared to
be directly responsible for the positioning of continents, mountain ranges and
undersea ridges, as well as weather and population centers, animal migration
patterns and anomalous distortions in space and time as first cataloged by
Sanderson.
Furthermore,
they realized that almost every sacred site or monument on Earth was
fundamentally connected to this Grid.
When
the work of Becker and Hagens is then added in, we find that they provide a
Grid model of 120 interconnecting triangles that unifies all five of the
Platonic Solids as one, and also reveals even more detailed results about how
these energies are operating on the Earth.
We
also introduce our own independent research, which shows that various island
chains on the Earth's surface form precise "grid circles" that are
clearly related to the structure of the Becker/Hagens grid itself.
We
also investigate a series of reports regarding the mysterious disappearances
and time-warping effects seen at various points on this Grid. Then, in chapter
13, we introduce information from Dr. Lefors Clark regarding the behavior of
magnetism, and how it can form "diamagnetic vortices" as it travels.
These
vortices help explain exactly what we are seeing in the Grid Circles, and how
the natural aetheric forces in the Grid brought them about. We then give a much
closer look to the five Platonic Solids themselves, in order to see more
clearly how they are directly related to the interconnecting system of
harmonics that we have been discussing.
Then,
we again bring in the work of Carl Munck, who revealed a very fundamental
connection between the Speed of Light and the harmonic numbers of sound which
suggest that they are
actually functions of the same unified energy source.
Although
Bruce Cathie revealed the same thing in his own harmonic system, the connection
discovered by Munck is arrived at in a totally different way, but with the same
conclusions.
Then,
in Chapter 14 we suggest that those who built this Grid never really faded out
of view, they simply went into secrecy.
We
show the clear connections between modern "secret societies" such as
the Freemasons and these ancient truths, including photographs of the mural
that was erected in the UN, which clearly show us that its builders were well
aware of sacred geometry and "consciousness units" in some form, and
hence a working knowledge of the entire system of harmonic physics in general.
We
also see similar coded information emerging in the Great Seal of the United
States.
We
then discuss the idea that a "Hall of Records" preserved from
Atlantean times exists under the Giza plateau in Egypt.
Then,
having completed our investigation of the Global Grid, we move into Part Three
and expand the window of understanding this system of physics to larger-scale
harmonic events occurring in time.
The
main time cycle that we will be investigating is that of our Sun, hence the
title for Part Three: The
Great Solar Cycle. In Chapter 15, we again return to the words of
Ra to discuss this cycle, what it is and how it functions.
We
introduce the idea of the Earth's precession, a long-term wobble that takes
25,920 years to complete and is precisely mirrored in Ra's discussion of the
Solar Cycle.
We
also correlate this with the well-known trance writings of Edgar Cayce, as few
realize that he also spoke of a Solar Cycle as well. Excerpts from Ra explain
exactly what we can look forward to as we approach this event, which they refer
to as "harvest."
In
Chapter 16, we bring in the work of Maurice Cotterell, who has made discoveries
that completely bolster the findings in the Ra books, but were not even begun
until years after the contact had ended.
Through
long-term mapping of the Sun's counter-opposing speeds of rotation, he came out
with a series of graphs that predicted very long-term cycles in its activity --
cycles far longer than modern science would want to accept.
We
then see that identical numbers as seen in Cotterell's work were actually known and recorded by the Maya
thousands of years ago. Part of this study involves the Mayan Calendar, a
complex instrument for measuring the passage of time in roughly 5,125-year
increments.
In
Chapter 17 we discuss the work of ex-NASA astrophysicist Maurice Chatelain, who
further enhanced humanity's understanding of the Mayan Calendar. Although
Chatelain's ultimate hypothesis about the dating of the Calendar can be proven
incorrect, his insights regarding the importance of Jupiter-Saturn conjunctions
are crucial in understanding how this system of physics operates in our Solar
System.
We
continue our discussion of Chatelain's work in Chapter 18, where we bring in
his discoveries of even longer-term cycles in our Solar System through the
Constant of Nineveh. This constant is an harmonic
expression of all the orbits of our Solar System down to the second, and every
time that it completes a cycle we could think of it as being a time when all
the planets would be in a perfectly straight line.
We
will also show that this
number was charted by the Sumerians thousands of years ago. Even
more importantly, the entire number can be built up by multiplying 70 seven
times by 60, thus giving us a valuable clue to the ultimate harmonic simplicity
of the cycles that are at work.
This
is followed by Chapter 19, which starts off with the work of Bradley Cowan, who
has shown clear evidence of geometric structures in time that directly affect
human behavior in stock trading, thus giving us a clearer picture of the
underlying nature of all the cycles we have been looking at.
We
then detail Wilcock's own discoveries that neatly expand the Nineveh Constant
out to a galactic level, revealing it to be a precise harmonic of the time that it
takes the galaxy to complete one rotation.
This
discovery lends even more credibility to Ra's ideas about there being different
areas of harmonic energy concentration in the galaxy, areas that we may well be
moving into at this time.
Our
own Earth's precession is also very fundamentally related to this Constant
through simple harmonic proportions as well, thus showing us the true Galactic
scope of the Solar Cycle.
We
then go further to reveal that Cotterell's work reveals that three Earth
precessional cycles must be included in order to make a perfect fit with the
cycles that are seen in the Sun, and again this information is precisely
mirrored in the statements from the Ra Material.
Viewing
all of this information together, and reviewing all the changes that are occurring
around us now, we can certainly see how far the validity of Ra's statements
really goes.
In
Chapter 20 we conclude our mission by looking at the work of "cyclology,: which shows historic events repeating in harmonic time
intervals.
We
return to the Great Pyramid to reveal that the crown jewel of its hidden
message is a timeline that relates to our present point in history very
directly.
Clear
evidence of this elaborate system is presented, along with a powerful
suggestion -- that the conclusion of the timeline
itself is now, and is associated with a passage to the stars and / or those
from the stars coming to us.
As
this event in the Timeline occurs in our near future, we are again convinced
that our Atlantean / extraterrestrial brothers were very well aware of what we
would be going through at this point in our history, and were intent on giving
us a valuable means of predicting it in advance.
Once
we see the reality of this massive "prophecy in stone," it becomes
quite difficult to deny the message. We then follow with our conclusion in
Chapter 21, where we will review all of the material and reveal a few more
surprises as well.
And
so, let us begin. Even if we choose not to believe that every portion of the
research is valid, we will clearly be able to see the connections, and this
will greatly assist us in trusting that we are indeed going through a process
that is for our highest and best good.
It
is a process that might just have a fantastic "surprise ending" that
none of us could have ever expected until it actually happens.
If
Ra's statements are accurate, no one person could ever possibly fathom the
incredible joy and bliss that awaits us as we transfer into this higher realm
of being, where a Utopian world of science fantasy and pure love becomes the
reality of each and every "day."
CHAPTER 02: HARMONIC DIMENSIONS: THE
ARCHITECTURE OF THE ONE
This chapter begins
your initiation into the hidden history of planet Earth, which is our first
major key in unlocking the secrets of the Universe.
Keep in mind that certain concepts
that some find difficult to make “room” for in their minds need to be installed
early along, and that there is a big payoff to having this information in mind
later on.
As always, if a certain part stumps
you, just continue reading along, as what matters is the overall vision, not
the specifics.
The discussions in this book will
increasingly lead the reader to the understanding that the ancient world knew a
lot more about the real way that things work than we do right now in the
mainstream.
If we want to understand how the
physical Universe really “works,” including the spiritual connections, some of
our best pieces of evidence will be found in the written and physical relics of
the distant past.
Indeed, we can no longer deny that a
very advanced civilization existed at least 12,500 years ago,
and possibly much farther into the mists of remote antiquity than that as well.
For those who are interested in
pursuing this knowledge and research further, the following contemporary books
are a brief sampling of some of those that have demonstrated themselves as
being quite academic, reputable and enlightening:
The Mysteries of Atlantis Revisited
by Edgar Evans Cayce
Fingerprints
of the Gods by Graham Hancock
When
the Sky Fell by Rand and Rose Flem-Ath
The
Orion Mystery by Robert Bauval and Adrian Gilbert
Message
of the Sphinx by Graham Hancock and Robert Bauval
From
Atlantis to the Sphinx by Colin Wilson
SPHINX WATER WEATHERING
The most common argument of “proof”
that one will encounter when reading the above books and others like them has
now been dubbed as the “smoking gun” of the case for Atlantis.
We are hereby referring to the
observable fact that the Great Sphinx of Egypt, situated directly next to the
three main pyramids on the Gizeh plateau, shows unmistakable signs of having
been weathered by water.
There certainly isn’t any water in
the Egyptian desert at the present time, nor was there any in the times
typically cited for the construction of the pyramids. This is easy enough to
prove through direct geological studies of the surrounding lands.
This intriguing pattern of
weathering on the Sphinx was originally observed by R.A. Schwaller de Lubicz, a
brilliant scholar and thorough researcher who completely redefined humanity's
understandings of ancient Egypt and Atlantis through the mid-1900's.
Contemporary author John Anthony
West re-discovered this anomalous weathering pattern, which was rather casually
mentioned in de Lubicz's book The Temple of Man, and realized that it
was clearly something that was testable and provable that had been almost
miraculously overlooked in the past.
And after many, many failed attempts
to gain the support of myriad geologists, West was able to find cooperation
with Robert Schoch, a young but well-respected expert in the field, having
already written four published books on archeology by his late 20's.
Schoch was reluctant to investigate
West’s hypothesis until he was certain that he had secured tenure at his
academic organization, but by the beginning of the 1990's he was ready to
proceed. West and Schoch then finally traveled to Egypt and realized that the
case was even more powerful than they had previously thought; there were
overwhelmingly redundant signs of water weathering everywhere they
looked, both on the Sphinx and nearby temples made of huge stone blocks as
well.
The Sphinx was carved out of
limestone, which is a conglomerate of sandy particles that have fused together
into a solid. Wind erosion produces stratified, horizontally ribbed surfaces in
limestone that look like the pages on the side of an old book, as certain
layers of the conglomerate rock will be thinner and weaker and certain layers
thicker and stronger.
The thicker areas of limestone will
resist the power of the wind more strongly and thus erode less, whereas the
thinner layers will disappear more quickly, thus producing an uneven surface
that most of us have probably seen in desert photographs, or perhaps even in
person.
On the other hand, water erosion
produces smooth, sensuous curves that cut directly down into the rock
regardless of its thickness, forming rounded corners, snakelike rivulets and
crevices.
The signs of this erosion are so
obvious that when West disguised the Sphinx out of the pictures with tape, all
geologists who he showed the images to could agree that it was a picture of a
rock outcrop with water erosion.
However, once West removed the tape
and showed them where the picture was from, they immediately grew agitated and
did not want to discuss it any further, for the simple fear of losing their
reputation. Dr. Schoch was the first geologist to face the facts and stake his
own reputation on the obvious.
And since we all know that Egypt is
now a desert, the Sphinx simply must have been built at a time when a lush,
green jungle climate with abundant rainfall was in existence.
And even the most outrageously
conservative geological estimates for there to be enough water in Egypt to
create such formations date back to at least 7,000 BC, and most would agree
that 9,000 BC is a far more realistic figure; and that is simply the most
recent time that there was any rainfall at all. You must then also
factor in exactly how long it would take for such advanced water weathering to
occur – certainly not a few hundred years but potentially many thousands.
And so, even if one was to throw
away the multitudes of other solid evidence that exists in support of an
advanced ancient civilization, we can still come back to the Sphinx. Once we
know what we are looking for, we will realize that this is only one of the more
obvious means of proving that the historical "Atlantean" culture –
i.e. an ancient advanced civilization – had a precedent in fact.
ROBERT BAUVAL AND THE "GIZA
ALIGNMENT"
The next popular academic argument
for “Atlantis” came from Robert Bauval in “The Orion Mystery,” from the
early 1990s, though Dr. J.J. Hurtak originally mentioned the same concept in The
Keys of Enoch in the 1970s.
The three main Pyramids of Egypt at
Giza are arranged in close proximity to each other, and Bauval was curious
about the apparent lack of symmetry or geometry in their layout. He knew that
there had to be some reason for why they were aligned in the way that is now
seen overhead.
Inspiration finally struck as he
looked up at the constellation of Orion, which has three main stars that form
the middle section, referred to as the "belt." He realized that the Pyramids
of Giza were configured in precisely the same manner as the "belt" of
Orion, and he quickly proved his point by overlaying the site maps of the
Pyramids and the star maps of Orion's belt on top of each other.
Not only was each Pyramid in the
proper position, but even the relative sizes and colors of the Pyramids were directly
proportional to the magnitudes and colors of the stars in Orion's belt.
(The Cheops and Khefren pyramids
were both originally covered in white limestone and are approximately the same
size, like the two main stars in Orion’s belt, whereas the Menkaure pyramid is
significantly smaller and was originally encased in red granite, just like the
dimmer and redder third star.)
As Bauval continued to investigate
the matter, he realized that the architects of Giza had created a perfect
duplication of the starry heavens on Earth – an idea that fit in perfectly with
their concept of the connection between the physical world and the Duat,
or spiritual world.
Furthermore, the position of the
Nile River relative to the Pyramids was identical to the position of the
Milky Way relative to Orion's belt in the starry night sky. Further Pyramids
near Giza seemed to suggest that several other significant stars of Orion and
the nearby Hyades constellation were immortalized in stone on the Earth as
well.
|
Figure
2.1 – Robert Bauval's Comparison of Orion/Milky Way with Giza/Nile |
Though this alignment is intriguing,
it does not appear to give us any new information about the time that the
pyramids were built. However, by using a program known as Skyglobe,
Bauval realized that the only "recent" time that the Milky Way would
be perfectly aligned with the Nile River was roughly 12,500 years ago.
At that time, and only at that time,
(unless you were willing to travel back more than 30,000 years ago,) one could
stand on Earth and observe the Pyramids and Nile River at a distance, and watch
the Nile align directly with the Milky Way, while the stars of Orion's belt
would perfectly align with the positions of the terrestrial pyramids.
This is caused by the phenomenon of
the Earth’s precession, a long-term wobble in its rotational path that we will
discuss later.
As a simple, preliminary explanation
of precession, you would normally expect that when you get to the same time
each year, where the Earth is at a specific angle to the Sun, such as the
equinox or solstice, then all the stars should be in the same positions from
year to year on that date.
Nevertheless, the stars in the night
sky will drift from those visible positions by one degree every 72 years,
tracing a full circular path through an area of the night sky about every
25,920 years.
If you build a temple to align with
a star at the solstice time, then within a relatively short time your
descendants would realize that something was causing these star positions to
shift out of their previous alignment.
So, it was clear that Bauval had
found a time capsule, an encoded archeological matrix of information designed
to show the exact time that the entire complex was first designed and
planned. Clearly, the ancient architects were very clever to design such a
system.
Another layer of “proof” is the fact
that during this same time frame, and only during this time frame, the Sphinx
directly faces the constellation of Leo the Lion, due to its position in the
Earth’s precession.
This whole body of findings is so obvious
and compelling that it has completely bypassed the prejudiced “peer review” of
mainstream archeology and gone directly into the public consciousness through
documentaries on Discovery Channel and the like.
SUPER-ADVANCED DRILLING
Another recent breakthrough in the
argument for a lost civilization with high technology comes from Christopher
Dunn, whose main expertise is in drilling.
Dunn has definitively proven that
certain artifacts, including the empty coffin or "Granite Coffer"
that is featured in the King's Chamber of the Great Pyramid, show signs of
super-advanced drilling techniques that surpass anything now in our possession.
Dunn analyzed the Granite Coffer and
found unmistakable evidence that indicated that it had been hollowed out with
some form of tube-shaped drill that would core out a piece at a time.
The spiraling patterns that were
left behind in the granite showed that this drill was capable of boring through
1/10th of an inch of rock per second.
However, granite is such a hard
stone that even our most modern diamond-tipped drilling systems can do no
better than 1/100th of an inch per second, meaning that the ancient
technology used works ten times better than any method now at our
disposal.
In books such as Fingerprints of
the Gods, Graham Hancock points out another intriguing aspect of Dunn’s
work. In various ancient Egyptian tombs we see carved vases and statues of diorite,
which is a dark-colored material that is considered to be one of the hardest
forms of stone on earth.
These vases have very long and thin
necks, and are carved out from one single piece of diorite. The openings
on some vases are not even large enough for a child's finger to fit inside, and
yet their inner contents were hollowed out perfectly.
So now we must not only visualize a
drill that puts our current designs to shame, but a drill that must have flexibility
as well, in order to produce a tiny hole and then move around inside.
Dunn's conclusion is that the
Ancients must have been in possession of a drilling technique that far
outstrips anything that we now possess.
He goes on further to suggest that
these ancient drills might have utilized ultrasonic sound somehow, thus working
in a similar fashion to how the repetitive vibration of a jackhammer carves up
concrete streets and sidewalks.
But even then, he is at a loss to
explain how they could have carved the diorite vases. While these findings do
not give an exact date for when such work would be produced, they certainly do
not appear to be consonant with any technological developments in known
Egyptian history.
They appear to be much more in tune
with a society that had technical capabilities equal to or exceeding our own.
ANCIENT AIRCRAFT
Frontier scientist Richard
Hoagland's research team The Enterprise Mission, at www.enterprisemission.com/tombsweb3.html,
pointed out another relatively new and interesting development in the proof for
a lost technological society.
Among other points, Hoagland et al.
discuss the recent findings of German scientists Dr. Algund Eeboom and Mr.
Peter Belting.
Several small gold trinkets have
been recovered from tombs of the Incas, dating back thousands of years. These
trinkets clearly depict structures that undeniably appear to be workable flying
airplanes, complete with what appear to be gun turrets on some of the wings.
See for yourself:
|
Figure
2.2 – Eeboom and Belting’s discovery of ancient gold trinkets of working
aircraft. |
In order to prove that these tiny
models represented real airplanes, Eeboom and Belting collaborated together to
design perfect schematic diagrams of the tiny objects. They then expanded the
proportions of these blueprints large enough to build workable scale models.
And to their amazement, they found
that by simply putting a propeller at the front and stabilizers on the wings,
the planes not only flew but were capable of performing complex aeronautical
maneuvers via remote control.
See the above link for more details
and photographs of their prototype in action.
Hoagland et al. also point out the
far more well-known fact that working bird-shaped gliders have been found
within tombs in Egypt.
Since these gliders also possess
remarkable similarity to working airplanes and are capable of long flights when
thrown, we must assume that the ancient Egyptians were also well aware of this
technology.
With the evidence now seen from the
Incan tombs above, we may suppose that the bird gliders were simply children's
toy models of systems that were in much more common use at one time.
And so, if we are seeing workable
airplane models being built as small gold statuettes and wooden models in two
different ancient cultures separated by the Atlantic, we certainly can assume
that a large-scale technological society with full-sized, working aircraft may
have been in existence at one time as well.
It is frustrating that we have not
found any full-sized models. However, after a hypothesized 12,500 years of time
passing, we should expect that any such structures made of wood or metal would
have long since deteriorated.
The Atlantean lore from the Edgar
Cayce readings states that almost the entire concentration of that society was
on an island in the Atlantic that included present-day Cuba and outlying areas
as well, and which subsided under ocean waters, known as “Poseidia.”
And if the modern toys of our
society were suddenly subjected to a vast cataclysm and promptly left
unattended for 12,500 years, the savage action of tidal waves, land subsidence,
rust, tornadoes, hurricanes, rising sea levels, glaciers, natural disasters and
all other forms of growth and decay would most likely completely wipe out all
remnants of things such as wooden houses, hollow buildings and skyscrapers of
glass, and metallic automobiles, trains or airplanes.
So therefore, despite their toy-like
appearance, which may indeed have been the playthings of children at one time,
these tiny gold statuettes could well have been considered very sacred objects
– some of the sole remaining fragments of a culture of “Gods” destroyed in the
seas of Time.
These precious models were held onto
and possibly copied over and reduplicated for thousands of years by the
survived "Atlantean" cultures of the Incas and Egyptians before being
buried in their tombs. They may well have been the direct symbols of a lost
"time of the Gods" when humankind had conquered the skies and could
fly around at will, with the gifts of advanced technology.
SUBMERGED CITIES
If one still is not convinced by
working ancient airplanes, special time-encoded alignments, super-advanced drilling
and water weathering on the Sphinx, an even more impressive “smoking gun” is
now available in the mainstream.
As of late 2001, Paul Weinzweig and
Paulina Zelitsky of Advanced Digital Communications, a company dedicated to
using advanced undersea scanning technology to salvage shipwrecks, discovered a
massive city of “pyramids, roads and buildings” some 2000 feet down under the
sea on the western edge of Cuba.
Right as we were putting this final
revised chapter together, this story broke for the first time into the
mainstream media, through an article by Kevin Sullivan for the Washington Post
newspaper, page A25, on Thursday, October 10, 2002. Read for yourself:
HAVANA – The images appear slowly on the video screen,
like ghosts from the ocean floor. The videotape, made by an unmanned submarine,
shows massive stones in oddly symmetrical square and
pyramid shapes in the deep-sea darkness.
Sonar
images taken from a research ship 2,000 feet above are even more puzzling. They
show that the smooth, white stones are laid out in a geometric pattern.
The images look like fragments of a city, in a place where nothing man-made
should exist, spanning nearly eight square miles of a deep-ocean plain
off Cuba's western tip…
The
discovery immediately sparked speculation about Atlantis,
the fabled lost city first described by Plato in 360 B.C..
Weinzweig and Zelitsky were careful not to use the A word and said that much
more study was needed before such a conclusion could be reached.
But
that has not stopped a boomlet of speculation, most of it on the Internet.
Atlantis-hunters have long argued their competing theories that the lost city
was off Cuba, off the Greek island of Crete, off Gibraltar or elsewhere.
Several Web sites have touted the ADC images as a possible first sighting.
Among
those who suspect the site may be Atlantis is George Erikson, a California
anthropologist who co-authored a book in which he predicted that the lost city
would be found offshore in the tropical Americas.
"I
have always disagreed with all the archaeologists who dismiss myth," said
Erikson, who said he had been shunned by many scientists since publishing his
book about Atlantis. He said the story has too many historical roots to be
dismissed as sheer fantasy and that if the Cuban site proves to be Atlantis, he
hopes "to be the first to say, 'I told you so.' "
Manuel
Iturralde, one of Cuba's leading geologists, said it was too soon to know what
the images prove. He has examined the evidence and concluded that, "It's
strange, it's weird; we've never seen something like this before, and we don't
have an explanation for it."
Iturralde
said volcanic rocks recovered at the site strongly suggest that the undersea
plain was once above water, despite its extreme depth. He said the existence
of those rocks was difficult to explain, especially because there are no
volcanoes in Cuba.
He
also said that if the symmetrical stones are determined to be the ruins of
buildings, it could have taken 50,000 years or more for tectonic shifting to
carry them so deep into the ocean.
The
ancient Great Pyramid of Giza in Egypt is only about 5,000 years old, which
means the Cuba site "wouldn't fit with what we know about human
architectural evolution," he said. [emphasis
added]
If we read this article with a clear
and open mind, it isn’t hard to see that the “disclosure timeline” that so many
in the metaphysical community believe to exist is now being pushed forward.
The skepticism borders on the
ridiculous, especially once we learn that the pyramids are indeed perfect
replicas of those still visible in Mesoamerica, that the “geometric pattern”
of the “smooth, white stones” is in some cases exactly the same design
as Stonehenge, and that obviously manmade inscriptions
such as crosses have been observed and filmed on the stones.
Furthermore, Zelitsky leaked to
Enterprise Mission’s chief investigator Richard Hoagland that they have also
found giant Sphinx statues as well. Let us not forget the priests who
refused to look through Galileo’s telescope, because they literally did not
want to see the proof that they were wrong. So, regardless of what you choose
to name it, the ancient civilization did exist. Period.
And the Edgar Cayce readings said
that before the final parts of Atlantis sank, the island continent of Poseidia
was the center of population, and was located where Cuba and the Yucatan are
now.
Thankfully, National Geographic is
planning a full-blown manned submarine mission to the site in summer 2003.
Originally it was promised for summer of 2002, but “funding problems”
interrupted the process. Perhaps “someone” didn’t think the world was ready
yet… and we’ll explain why that is later in this chapter.
[11/26/07: As we said in the
Prologue, this disclosure never happened. The 'cover-up' goes on.]
ATLANTEAN LITERATURE
Contrary to what many might believe,
even those who have been studying the subject for a long time, there do appear
to be certain sources of literature that have survived from the time of
Atlantis.
The most informative material to
provide an explanation for the airplane models that we discussed above comes
from the Vedic scriptures of India. According to David Hatcher Childress in the
book Vimana Aircraft of Ancient India and Atlantis,
The India of 15,000 years ago is sometimes known as
the Rama Empire, a land that was contemporary with Atlantis. A
huge wealth of texts still extant in India testify to the extremely
advanced civilization that is said by these texts to go back over 26,000 years.
Terrible
wars and subsequent earth changes destroyed these civilizations, leaving only
isolated pockets of civilization.
The
devastating wars of the (Hindu scripture known as the) Ramayana and
particularly of the Mahabrata are said to have been the culmination of the
terrible wars of the last Kali Yuga, (or cosmic cycle of time.)
The
dating process is difficult, in that there is no exact way to date the yugas
because there are cycles within cycles and yugas within yugas. A greater yuga cycle is said to last 6000 years while a smaller yuga
cycle is only 360 years in the theory expounded by Dr. Kunwarlal Jain Vyas.
His
papers said that Rama belongs to the twenty-fourth small yuga
cycle and that there is an interval of 71 cycles between Manu and Mahabrata
period, which comes out to be 26,000 years.
Clearly, if the smaller Hindu cycle
of time is 360 years and the authors of their scriptures have diligently
counted at least 71 of them, we are dealing with a civilization that is far
older than we are currently willing to acknowledge.
More importantly, within the
voluminous Vedic scriptures are repeated references to vimanas, or flying
craft, as well as the usage of what appear to be devastating nuclear weapons.
Indeed, some of the Vedic descriptions of the vimana so perfectly match our
modern concept of an airplane that scholars invariably use this word when
translating them into English.
To elaborate a bit further on this
point, we will cite a quotation from Dr. Richard L. Thompson's book Alien
Identities. Thompson is a Cornell graduate whose Ph.D. is in mathematics, and
who also has a deep interest in Vedic studies and UFOlogy.
His book actually stands fast as one
of the few genuine breakthrough texts in UFOlogy today, where an author made
significant new discoveries instead of simply rehashing second-hand accounts of
events such as the purported crash at Roswell.
And so, from
Chapter 7, pgs. 260-261, we read the following,
with underlines and comments that we inserted:
[The ancient author] Bhoja's [text, called] Samarangana-sutradhara,
states that the main material of a flying machine [or vimana's] body is light
wood, or laghu-daru. The craft has the shape of a large bird with a wing on
each side.
The
motive force is provided by a fire-chamber with mercury placed over a flame.
The power generated by the heated mercury, helped by the flapping of the wings
by a rider inside, causes the machine to fly through the air.
Since
the craft was equipped with an engine, we can speculate that the flapping of
the wings was intended to control the direction of flight rather than provide
the motive power...
[Note:
The idea of the "flapping of the wings" could simply be an error in
translation by successive Vedic authors, initially referring to the pilot's
utilization of the ailerons and stabilizers to steer the plane as it flew.]
I
would suggest that the vimanas described by Bhoja are much more similar to
conventional airplanes than to UFOs. Thus they are made of ordinary materials
like wood, they have wings, and they fly like birds…
However
these vimanas were actually powered, it seems likely that they relied on some
conventional mechanical method that extracted energy from burning fuel and used
it to produce a flow of air over wings.
We
can contrast this with the flight characteristics of UFOs which don't have
wings, jets or propellers, and seem to fly in a manner that contradicts known
physical principles.
The Vedic description of a possible
nuclear blast, culled directly from page 677 of the transcription of the
ancient Drona Parva text itself, is enough to give us chills even now.
Despite its horrific contents, we have inserted it here to remind ourselves of
what we have done to each other in our own past:
The valiant Adwatthaman, then staying resolutely on
his (vimana) touched water and invoked the Agneya weapon, incapable of being
resisted by the very Gods.
Aiming
at all his visible and invisible foes, the preceptor's son, that Slayer of
hostile heroes, inspired with mantras a blazing shaft of the effulgence of a
smokeless fire and let it off on all sides, filled with rage.
Dense
showers of arrows then issued from it in the welkin. Endued with fiery flames
those arrows encompassed Parthie on all sides. Meteors flashed down from the
firmament.
A
thick gloom suddenly shrouded the (Pandava) host. All points of the compass
also were enveloped by that darkness… Inauspicious winds began to blow. The Sun
himself no longer gave any heat… The very elements seemed to be perturbed…
The
Universe scorched with heats seemed to be in a fever. The elephants and other
creatures of the land scorched by the energy of that weapon, ran in fright,
breathing heavily and desirous of protection against that terrible force.
The
very water being heated, the creatures residing in that element, O Bharata,
became exceedingly uneasy and seemed to burn…
Huge
elephants burnt by that weapon, fell down on the Earth all around, uttering
fierce cries loud as those of the clouds.
Other
huge elephants, scorched by that fire, ran hither and thither, roared aloud in
fear, as if in the midst of a forest conflagration.
The
steeds, O King, and the cars also burnt by that weapon looked, O Sire, like the
tops of trees burnt in a forest fire.
Indeed, if this is not a terrifying
description of the usage of a nuclear device in anger, then how do we explain
all the connections that are so easily seen?
Is it for this reason that Robert
Oppenheimer, one of the fathers of the nuclear bomb, was quoted as saying upon
the first test of a modern prototype, loosely paraphrased, “This is not the
first time that mankind has exploded a nuclear device?”
VISITORS FROM SPACE
So, throughout the course of
researching this subject, we will see that there is overwhelming tangible
evidence, including written texts and an eight-mile square city of pyramids,
roads and buildings on the sea floor of western Cuba, supporting the existence
of a lost advanced civilization.
It is important for us to remember
that the descriptions of this civilization are only tangentially similar
to our own - and most of the similarities have to do with technology. According
to many, many different sources, including the Vedic scriptures, the Atlantean
culture was far more spiritually centered than our current culture could
ever possibly be.
They simply shared an entirely
different perspective on reality, one wherein some important fundamental truths
of the Universe were far more understood, and explained in ways that are
unfamiliar to most of us upon first glance.
Schwaller de Lubicz's works go into
extensive detail about this completely separate paradigm espoused by the Ancients
- and as we progress further, we will have quotes from a scholar named Manly
Palmer Hall who will help us to understand that symbolism is a very
significant portion of this spiritual paradigm.
Furthermore, as we already stated
there are ample historical texts and data from all over the world that support
the idea that the Atlantean civilization was routinely visited by and in
cooperation with extraterrestrial intelligence. Joseph Campbell, writing
under the pen name “Ernest Scott,” i.e. the “Earnest Scotsman,” referred
to this intelligence as the “Hidden Directorate” in his book The
People of the Secret.
Past civilizations such as Atlantis
apparently established an advanced rapport with these visitors. The scholarly
work entitled Gods and Spacemen of the Ancient East by W. Raymond Drake
provides a truly worldwide cultural perspective on cooperative human-extraterrestrial
interaction in ancient history.
The historical accounts that Drake
invokes come from such diverse civilizations as India, Sumer, Tibet, China,
Japan, Egypt, Israel and Babylon – and the book significantly repairs the
damage done by the likes of Erich Von Daniken, who apparently falsified a great
deal of data to come up with his conclusions regarding such interactions in
books like the 1970’s best-seller Chariots of the Gods.
To help us support our continuing
argument for an advanced civilization that cooperated with extraterrestrials /
higher dimensional beings in the remote past, we again bring in evidence from
India cited in Dr. Thompson's book, page 216-217.
Here, he discusses the various
"powers" known as siddhis that cosmic or extraterrestrial beings
visiting earth at the time, [which he calls "Vedic humanoids,"]
frequently discussed in the Vedas, had readily available to them. These siddhis
were also said to be available to certain illuminated human masters as well:
*
Mental communication and thought-reading. These are standard among Vedic
humanoids, but normal speech through sound is also generally used.
*
Being able to see or hear at a great distance.
*
Laghima-siddhi: levitation or antigravity. There is also a power of creating
tremendous weight.
* Anima- and mahima-siddhis: the power to change the size of objects or living
bodies without disrupting their structure.
* Prapti-siddhi: the power to move objects from one place to another,
apparently without crossing the intervening space. This power is connected with
the ability to travel into parallel, higher-dimensional realms.
*
The ability to move objects directly through the ether, without being impeded
by gross physical obstacles. This type of travel is called vihayasa. There is
also a type of travel called mano-java, in which the body is directly
transferred to a distant point by the action of the mind.
*
Vasita-siddhi: the power of long-distance hypnotic control. Vedic accounts
point out that this power can be used to control people's thoughts from a
distance.
*
Antardhana, or invisibility.
*
The ability to assume different forms or to generate illusory body forms.
*
The power of entering within another person's body and controlling it. This is
done using the subtle body (defined below.)
*
[Author's Note: The definition of the subtle body is referred to in common
parapsychological literature as the astral body or soul body, and apparently
these ancient societies had a much firmer recognition of its existence and of
the ability to transfer one's normal waking consciousness fully into it.
Modern-day
explorers of this art refer to it as having an OBE, or out-of-body
experience. The literature on NDE's, or Near-Death Experiences, seems to
have a close parallel as well.]
Although many "academics"
would automatically throw out these ideas as being far too mind-bending to be
real, there are repeated examples of many of these "siddhis"
appearing in ordinary people in our modern age.
Michael Talbot's incredible book The
Holographic Universe covers these types of phenomena in great detail, and
such data will also be discussed in volumes II and III of this series.
In Dr. Thompson's book, a
far-reaching series of correlations are made between these phenomena as
expressed in the Vedas and the many various UFO reports that have come about in
this wide-ranging field.
Simply put, we can see that a
society that could command abilities like those listed above would be truly
extraordinary, and would obviously be viewing life from a much different
perspective than that which we now have.
Returning to our immediate
discussion regarding extraterrestrials, Dr. Thompson reveals the Vedic
perspective on the nature and abundance of extraterrestrial life on the page
before the above list is given:
The Puranas speak of 400,000 humanlike races of
beings living on various planets and of 8,000,000 other life forms, including
plants and lower animals.
Out
of the 400,000 humanlike forms, human beings as we know them are said to be
among the least powerful. This, of course, ties in with the picture that
emerges from accounts of UFO encounters. [emphasis
added]
Clearly, our current society does
not have open contact with our alleged visitors. In a society that did have
such contact, their view of the Universe would indeed be very different than
ours – especially with the knowledge that humankind was "among the least
powerful" of the other races of beings that it was aware of.
There was a time, apparently, where
we knew how plentiful life was in the galaxy and had contact with it, but that
time has been lost. And even though they were still in the
kindergarten version of universal evolution, at that time the Rama / Atlantean
civilization possessed inner qualities and outer technology that are only just
now becoming tangible for us once again.
It is important that we note that
although some vimana appear to have been airplanes, there were other designs in
use that apparently go far beyond any technology that we now openly possess.
The most important Vedic text on the
vimana, says Childress in Vimana Aircraft of Ancient India and Atlantis,
is the Vaimanika Sastra, first reported to have been found in 1918 in the
Baroda Royal Sanskrit Library.
Previous references were made to
this text by other authors, but it was not rediscovered until 1918 -- a flutter
of time after 1901, when the Wright Brothers made the entire question of the
existence of vimana aircraft much more plausible to modern humanity.
(Remember that right up until the
day the Wright Brothers flew, notable skeptics such as Sir William Thomson
boldly declared that “heavier-than-air flight” was impossible.)
Although some have questioned the
authenticity of the Vaimanika Sastra, Childress details the many qualities of
the text that lend serious credibility to it.
As we read the following, remember
that a translator's job is to take these ancient words and to then match them
up with their closest approximation in our own modern language:
Says the Vaimanika Sastra about itself: In this book
are described 8 pregnant and captivating chapters, the arts of manufacturing
various types of aeroplanes of smooth and comfortable travel in the sky, as a
unifying force for the Universe, contributive to the well-being of mankind.
That
which can go by its own force, like a bird, on earth, or water, or air, is
called Vimana.
That
which can travel in the sky, from place to place, land to land, or globe to
globe, is called Vimana by scientists in Aeronautics. The ancient manuscript
claims to give:
- The secrets of constructing aeroplanes, which
will not break, which cannot be cut, will not catch fire, and cannot be
destroyed.
- The secret of making planes motionless.
- The secret of making planes invisible.
- The secret of hearing conversations and other
sounds in enemy places.
- The secret of retrieving photographs of the
interior of enemy planes
- The secret of ascertaining the direction of enemy
planes approach.
- The secret of making persons in enemy planes lose
consciousness.
- The secret of destroying enemy planes.
Unfortunately, due to size
constraints we cannot give Dr. Thompson, David Hatcher Childress, Raymond Drake
and others' material anywhere near the degree of coverage that it really needs
in order to completely prove the point – but the evidence is out there.
The reason for why Thompson's Alien
Identities is considered such a breakthrough book is that it presents
exhaustive, groundbreaking documentation from both the Vedic scriptures as well
as modern UFO literature, and shows a highly significant number of coincidences
between the two bodies of data, both on material and spiritual levels.
While the vimanas referred to
in the Vedic scriptures are clearly some form of airplane, there are repetitive
examples of flying craft and humanoid beings that are definitely far, far more
advanced and unlike those of contemporary or ancient humans, and sources such
as Dr. Thompson's book cover this in great detail.
SUMERIAN KNOWLEDGE: ANOTHER MISSING
LINK
The encyclopedic work of Zecharia
Sitchin, including Genesis Revisited and especially in his series
entitled The Earth Chronicles, also focuses on this cooperation between
humankind and extraterrestrial life that once existed.
Dr. Sitchin claims to be one of only
about 200 people in the world who can fully read and translate the ancient
Sumerian cuneiform tablets. By simply accepting that the information and historical
accounts may well be true, documented facts, without falling back on the
standard belief that they are simply myths, Sitchin has made some very
surprising discoveries.
His work is so solid that no
skeptics have ever made any serious attempts to disassemble it. Therefore,
Sitchin is simply ignored, as his scholarship is so complex, integrated and
far-reaching that no one has been willing to try to mount a full attack.
Once again, in Sitchin's books we
see written evidence of super-advanced flying technology (as well as more
mundane forms such as rockets,) extraterrestrial humanoids, lasers and
weaponry, as well as a veritable cornucopia of advanced knowledge, including
rigorously accurate and detailed descriptions of our Solar System.
Within these ancient texts are
diagrams and properties of all the planets that we have currently discovered as
well as a large "twelfth planet" named Nibiru.
The existence of that very planet is
just now being formally (and quietly) acknowledged by the mainstream scientific
community as of October 1999. The modern case for a distant planet that recent
NASA scientists have presented comes from the mysterious, visible perturbations
in the orbits of distant comets originating from the far recesses of our solar
system, which suggest that there must be a potentially Jupiter-sized planet
beyond the orbit of Pluto whose gravity is affecting them.
Nevertheless, there is no real
evidence that this planet is going to pass by the Earth in May 2003, as many
still believe at the time of this updated edition in October 2002.
Based on the intensely technical
descriptions that come to us from the Sumerian cuneiform tablets, some of which
we will explore in mathematical detail in future chapters, we must wonder if
they were at least partially derived from verbally-preserved Atlantean records.
This could explain the basis behind
the epic "Saga of Gilgamesh," which details the story of a small
group of people led by a man named Gilgamesh who survived an ancient flood -
i.e. the demise of Atlantis.
In The Earth Chronicles,
Sitchin makes a solid case for the Biblical story of Noah and the Ark being a
condensed and simplified version of this tale, where the character Gilgamesh
was renamed Noah and many other important details were omitted.
OANNES: FIRST CONTACT
The existence of Atlantean
flood-survivors such as Gilgamesh also helps to reveal the identity of the
illustrious "men from the sea" such as the Sumerian / Babylonian
sea-king Oannes who were described in many ancient cultures worldwide as coming
and civilizing various peoples so quickly.
The most prevalent idea behind the
Oannes story is that he was simply the first of these Atlantean survivors who
appeared before the public and dressed up in, believe it or not, fish suits
to add a mythical, magical presence to their identity for the then-uncivilized,
superstitious masses.
Were the air and sea-worthy vimana
still in partial existence at this time, Oannes could have simply parked their
craft under the sea, venturing out of it by day and back to it at night.
Here we cite a quote from Alexander
Polyhistor in Raymond Drake's book about this. ("Berossus" was a
Sumerian / Chaldean author responsible for recording the original account of
this information.)
Berossus describes an animal endowed with reason, who
was called Oannes; the whole body of the animal was like that of a fish, and
had under a fish's head another (regular human) head, and also feet below,
similar to those of a man, subjoined to the fish's tail.
His
voice too and language was articulate and human, and a representation of him is
preserved even to this day.
This
Being in the day-time used to converse with Man, but took no food at that
season; and he gave them an insight into letters and sciences and every kind of
art. He taught them to construct houses, to found temples, to compile laws, and
explained to them the principles of geometrical knowledge.
He
made them distinguish the seeds of the earth and showed them how to collect
fruits; in short, he instructed them in everything which could tend to soften
manners and humanize mankind.
From
that time so universal were his instructions, nothing has been added material
by way of improvement.
When
the sun set, it was the custom of this Being to plunge
again into the sea and abide all night in the deep, for he was amphibious.
After this there appeared other animals like Oannes. [emphasis
added]
As we can see, the single most
remarkable aspect of the story of the Sumerian culture is how beings like
Oannes led them so incredibly quickly from nomadic hunting and gathering"
to an advanced society with running water, schools, codified law, government,
domestication of animals and cultivation of crops for food and herbal healing
remedies, as well as mathematics and geometry, house building and the like.
Obviously those of a higher
civilization could come into a primitive culture and effect changes very
quickly, just as we in the West have done throughout our entire world.
THE MYSTERIES
According to many, many sources from
diversified fields, the survivors of Atlantis preserved their corpus of
knowledge, albeit in a scattered form, as most of them left the sinking
continent in great haste and with little to spare – hence the ancient story of
Noah’s Ark.
The only historical account of
Atlantis that ever made its way into the public was from the Greek philosopher
Plato, and modern researchers still draw off of his writings when investigating
the subject.
It is often written that Plato
caused a serious upset in the Egyptian priesthood by publishing this data, as
it was intended to remain strictly concealed from the public. According to
Plato's account, Atlantis disappeared in a sudden cataclysm that caused it to
sink beneath the sea.
There were a precious few who became
aware that this was going to happen before it actually did, and they were able
to evacuate the island continent before the event itself occurred. They
migrated to different areas throughout Europe, Africa and Asia as well as the
Americas, most notably within the Mesoamerican region of the Yucatan.
According to the legends as
preserved by Plato and others in secret, the majority of the entire world was
not civilized during the time of Atlantis, but existed in a primitive / tribal
state.
The secluded island of Atlantis
itself, surrounded by the Atlantic Ocean on all sides, was far more advanced
than many of the indigenous cultures that were already in existence in other
parts of the world.
At that time, not everyone was at
the same level of development by any means, and the legends say that Atlantis
had just begun a large-scale colonization / civilization program for the
outside world when they collapsed.
The Atlantean cataclysm completely
submerged all the remnants of their once great island, and in many cases the survivors
of this disaster found themselves thrust into situations with primitive peoples
who could barely even begin to fathom the civilization that they had come from.
And in some of these cases, if they
were to begin openly speaking about their knowledge, they would have been
killed very quickly out of fear. Therefore, it appears that the majority of
survivors from Atlantis had to pass down their traditional knowledge in
conditions of the utmost secrecy, knowing that their conflicting
religious and scientific beliefs could quickly turn them into dinner for a
tribe of wandering cannibals if they weren't careful.
The overarching term that was given
for the secret knowledge from the lost civilization of Atlantis, (other than
“The Tradition,”) was “The Mysteries.”
In most cases, the secrecy of the
Mysteries was kept so tightly that rigorous initiations were demanded of anyone
who either chose or was invited to participate.
And furthermore, to insure their own
survival the inheritors of the Atlantean legacy would often punish those who
betrayed the secrets with death. In order to be entrusted with the secrets,
you had to swear an oath that you gave permission to be killed if you ever
revealed the knowledge to those who were “uninitiated.”
They believed that it was better to
sacrifice one traitor than to lose everyone in an ambush soon afterwards – and
this was a very real possibility at that time.
One can certainly imagine that many
bands of survivors who did not either keep strict secrecy or were not as
careful or dramatic as the Babylonian Oannes or the Mesoamerican Viracocha were
simply wiped out, and that perhaps this common link among recognized historical
figures of the Mysteries was the very thing that had preserved their knowledge
through time.
According to numerous sources of
evidence, especially “Secret Teachings of All Ages” by Manly Palmer
Hall,” the knowledge of the Mysteries was almost totally wiped out more than
once due to these oppressive conditions in uncivilized lands.
Yet, the underlying power of the
information was so strong that great men would always come along and completely
reintegrate all of the fragmented pieces. This happened in Greece with Thales,
Pythagoras and Plato touring the African / Eurasian continents and compiling lost
ancient data.
Much more recently it was done again
by Francis Bacon, a highly-educated royal contemporary of the Elizabethan era
who had access to ancient records in the Vatican and elsewhere. Bacon's efforts
to resuscitate the Mysteries were what directly fathered the modern-day Masonic
Order, and he and Pythagoras are said by Manly Hall (discussed below) to be the
single two most important figures in Masonry today.
The Masonic Order is often lambasted
by modern ‘conspiracy theorists’ as an easy target due to its vows of secrecy
and demonstrable worldwide power in our modern civilization.
There is strong first-hand evidence
from “cult survivors” that a negatively oriented group known as the
“Illuminati” has penetrated through certain aspects of the Masonic Order,
though this does not necessarily impugn most average Masons. This will be
discussed in more detail towards the end of this volume.
As just one of hundreds of examples,
almost every person who signed the Declaration of Independence was a Mason, as well
as a high number of astronauts and US Presidents. (Haven’t you ever wondered
why there is a pyramid on the back of the dollar bill with the “All-Seeing Eye”
on the top? Or why the Washington Monument is a perfect Egyptian obelisk?)
Many authors have gone far out of
their way to demonstrate that the majority of high-level corporate executives,
military officials and top government politicians all have connections to
Masonry, and updated lists of these people (which may or may not be entirely
accurate) are easily found through searching the Internet.
Only those who had penetrated
through the highest “degrees” of Freemasonry had any idea about what the
Mysteries really were. The lower degrees, especially the first three “Blue
Degrees,” were designed to foster a large body of loyal and unified members for
the group, thus enhancing Masonic power and influence without compromising any
real knowledge or secrets.
Those who would receive the deepest
knowledge could be carefully observed over a long period of time, and
handpicked slowly and carefully through higher degrees in a very controlled
fashion.
Any sign of lack of integrity, doubt
or distrust on behalf of the initiate would permanently freeze his progress,
insuring that he would never advance any further. (And yes, only men can join
the Freemasons. The corresponding, much less popular women's group is called
Eastern Star.)
And so, even if certain “Illuminati”
elements that have penetrated the top levels of the modern Masonic Order have
become quite confused and power-hungry, the original secret information from
Atlantis is very important to us.
It does not appear that the ancient
information was biased towards the negative side of spirituality, though the
“Illuminati” may have now co-opted it as such. Many researchers agree that the
books of Manly Palmer Hall, a 33rd-degree Masonic initiate, (the highest
publicly acknowledged degree,) are the ultimate source available for learning
about the real secrets that are preserved by these modern inheritors of
the Mysteries.
The book, The Secret Teachings of
All Ages, is inarguably Hall's finest accomplishment – written as a literal
encyclopedia of all the great truths that he or any other members of these
societies were willing to openly reveal.
And within that subset, Hall has
quite a lot to say. Once all the other pieces are in place, we will see that
Hall's information is far more than adequate for recombining the true picture
of the Atlantean Mysteries.
Hall's book begins, paradoxically
enough, with an enormous and perhaps even boring discussion of philosophers,
from Greek to Roman right up through the present, going into great detail about
their widely contradictory ideas.
In this discussion, we can clearly
see how the unified knowledge of the Mysteries had already become widely
dispersed, and everyone had their own theories based on what little they knew –
and yet underneath it all, a common thread could be perceived.
Certain philosophers such as
Pythagoras actively sought to eliminate this problem by traveling far and wide
to collect this scattered secret information from other areas.
By the end of that chapter, the
reader is practically exhausted with the huge body of philosophical information
that was presented, and at this point Hall comes clean with the hidden Masonic
knowledge that he is in contact with, regarding the true secret origin of all
philosophy.
In this excerpt, he also touches
upon the all-important concept of symbolism being used to convey information
and hide truth from the uninitiated:
The magnificent institutions of Hindu, Chaldean
(Sumerian), and Egyptian learning must be recognized as the actual source of
Greek wisdom.
The
last was patterned after the shadow cast by the sanctuaries of Ellora, Ur, and
Memphis upon the thought substance of a primitive people. Thales, Pythagoras,
and Plato in their philosophic wanderings contacted many distant cults and
brought back the lore of Egypt and the inscrutable Orient.
From
indisputable facts such as these it is evident that philosophy emerged from the
religious Mysteries of antiquity, not being separated from religion until after
the decay of the Mysteries.
He
who would fathom the depths of philosophic thought must familiarize himself
with the teachings of those initiated priests designated as the first custodians
of divine revelation.
The
Mysteries claimed to be the guardians of a transcendental knowledge so profound
as to be incomprehensible save to the most exalted intellect and so potent as to
be revealed with safety only to those in whom personal ambition was dead and
who had consecrated their lives to the unselfish service of humanity.
Both
the dignity of these sacred institutions and the validity of their claim to possession
of Universal Wisdom are attested by the most illustrious philosophers of
antiquity, who were themselves initiated into the profundities of the secret
doctrine and who bore witness to its efficacy.
The
question may legitimately be propounded: If these ancient mystical institutions
were of such "great pith and moment," why is so little information
now available concerning them and the arcana they claimed to possess? The
answer is simple enough: The Mysteries were secret societies, binding their initiates
to inviolable secrecy, and avenging with death the betrayal of their sacred
trusts.
Although
these schools were the true inspiration of the various doctrines promulgated by
the ancient philosophers, the fountainhead of those doctrines was never revealed
to the profane.
Furthermore,
in the lapse of time the teachings came so inextricably linked with the names
of disseminators that the actual but recondite source -- the Mysteries -- came
to be wholly ignored. [emphasis added]
And as we continue further along in
Hall's book, we come upon the chapter "Atlantis and the Gods of
Antiquity," where the core idea of humanity's hidden Atlantean past is
expounded upon further:
"The history of Atlantis," writes Ignatius Donnelly, "is the key of the Greek mythology. There can
be no question that these gods of Greece were human beings. The tendency to
attach divine attributes to great earthly rulers is one deeply implanted in
human nature. (See Atlantis.)
…The
Garden of Eden from which humanity was driven by a flaming sword is perhaps an
allusion to the earthly paradise supposedly located west of the Pillars of
Hercules and destroyed by volcanic cataclysms. The Deluge legend may be traced
also to the Atlantean inundation, during which a "world" was destroyed
by water.
Was
the religious, philosophic, and scientific knowledge possessed by the
priestcrafts of antiquity secured from Atlantis, whose submergence obliterated
every vestige of its part in the drama of world progress?
Atlantean
sun worship has been perpetuated in the ritualism and ceremonialism of both
Christianity and pagandom. Both the cross and the serpent were Atlantean
emblems of divine wisdom…
The
mythologies of many nations contain accounts of gods who "came out of the
sea." Certain shamans among the American Indians tell of holy men dressed
in birds' feathers and wampum who rose out of the blue
waters and instructed them in the arts and crafts.
Among
the legends of the Chaledans (Sumerians) is that of Oannes, a partly amphibious
creature who came out of the sea and taught the savage peoples along the shore
to read and write, till the soil, cultivate herbs for healing, study the stars,
establish rational forms of government, and become conversant with the sacred
Mysteries.
Among
the Mayas, Quetzalcoatl, the Savior-God (whom some Christians believe to have
been St. Thomas), issued from the waters and, after instructing the people in
the essentials of civilization, rode out to sea on a magic raft of serpents to
escape the wrath of the fierce god of the Fiery Mirror, Tezcatlipoca.
[Note:
Again, with references to a "magic raft" and a "Fiery
Mirror" we can see a clear connection to the more magnificent versions of
the vimana that we had discussed above.]
May
it not have been that these demigods of a fabulous age who, Esdras-like, came
out of the sea were Atlantean priests? All that primitive man remembered of the
Atlanteans was the glory of their golden ornaments, the transcendency of their
wisdom, and the sanctity of their symbols -- the cross and the serpent.
That
they came in ships was soon forgotten, for untutored minds considered even
boats as supernatural. Wherever the Atlanteans proselyted they
erected pyramids and temples patterned after the great sanctuary in the
[Atlantean] City of the Golden Gates. Such is the origin of the pyramids of
Egypt, Mexico, and Central America.
The
mounds in Normandy and Britain, as well as those of the American Indians, are
remnants of a similar culture. In the midst of the Atlantean program of world
colonization and conversion, the cataclysms which sank Atlantis began.
The
Initiate-Priests of the Sacred Feather who promised to come back to their
missionary settlements never returned; and after the lapse of centuries
tradition preserved only a fantastic account of gods who came from a place
where the sea now is…
From
the Atlanteans the world has received not only the heritage of arts and crafts,
philosophies and sciences, ethics and religions, but also the heritage of hate,
strife, and perversion.
The
Atlanteans instigated the first war; and it has been said that all subsequent
wars were fought in a fruitless effort to justify the first one and right the
wrong which it caused.
Before
Atlantis sank, its spiritually illumined Initiates, who realized that their
land was doomed because it had departed from the Path of Light, withdrew from
the ill-fated continent.
Carrying
with them the sacred and secret doctrine, these Atlanteans established
themselves in Egypt, where they became its first "divine" rulers.
Nearly
all the great cosmologic myths forming the foundation of the various sacred
books of the world are based upon the Atlantean Mystery rituals.
Without going into further long
quotations here, Hall later makes the important point that the language of symbolism
was used to hide the Atlantean knowledge, both scientific and spiritual. In
this way, there could be a physical structure, such as a pyramid or building,
which was built according to certain “sacred” proportions.
Once someone had a basic understanding
of the physics that we will be discussing in this book, these symbolically
encoded mysteries can again be revealed. Mythological teachings, repeated
generation after generation, were also used to hide very advanced information;
and we will have more to say about this as we progress.
Certain sculptures or illustrations
were also used, with their true meanings hidden in myth. Hindu dances and
mandalas incorporated “sacred geometry” into their patterns as well.
The Yin-Yang symbol of the ancient Orient
is also of particular significance, as is the staff
with two coiled serpents surrounding it, now used as the symbol for medicine.
THE TEACHINGS OF ‘RA’
So, if the above information is
accurate, we are dealing with an ancient advanced civilization that cooperated
with far more evolved extraterrestrial and / or interdimensional beings, and
which passed down their traditions in secret after the bulk of their
civilization had collapsed, as well as “hiding them out in the open” through
cloaked symbolic meanings, in many cases written right into the structure of
buildings and sacred temples.
We should remember that at this time
in the world, most of the other cultures had not attained the sophistication of
Atlantis, and thus had no clear historical record of their existence as they
had been left alone. Thus, it was easy for Atlantis to be forgotten.
Throughout this series, we will see
incontrovertible evidence of highly advanced ancient scientific knowledge,
which suggests that the Atlanteans had a full awareness of the system of
cosmology and physics that we will be discussing.
It is interesting to point out that
the Law of One series, which we consider to be perhaps the most reputable
channeled material available, paints the exact same picture. “Ra” claims to
have been in contact with the ancient Atlanteans and shared knowledge quite
directly with them, including the gift of technical assistance in rendering the
magnificent architectural marvels of the Great Pyramid.
We do know that the Egyptian
inheritors of the Atlantean legacy worshipped a “god” known as Ra, and this
account appears to be a time-distorted record of what started as a genuine
contact, not simply another feeble-minded myth.
The timelines that Ra gave for their
contact with the Atlanteans (from approximately 18,000 to 11,000 years ago) fit
very nicely with the time of the alignment that Bauval discovered at the Giza
complex, (11,500 years ago,) and also fit with the timeline given by the Edgar
Cayce Readings for the construction of the Great Pyramid (11,500 to 11,450
years ago.)
This convergence of dates is but one
of many layers of validation. Carla Rueckert, MLS, who brought through the
information, has said that she was unaware of this convergence of Ra’s data
with the Cayce Readings until she was informed at the end of 2001.
For thousands of years after the
fall of Atlantis, many efforts have been made to re-integrate the lost sacred
teachings, but it still doesn’t appear that there has ever been a truly
complete model of the actual physics they were using available to the public…
until now.
As Manly P. Hall asserts, most of
this knowledge was hidden in symbolic forms, which can be open to multiple
interpretations.
Therefore, the story gets more
interesting once we realize that the original source of all the Atlanteans’
technical information was able to share their knowledge with humanity again in
the early 1980s, without the use of symbolic, encrypted language, and
completely outside of the mysterious cloaks of government conspiracy and secret
societies.
A tremendous amount of this
information was later validated with ensuing scientific discoveries that were
completely unknown at the time, so the “burden of proof” is extremely well
satisfied, as we shall see. No other channeled source we have ever found has
gone quite so far, with so much scientific validation, as the Law of One, so it
is in a category all its own.
Indeed, we freely admit that the Law
of One material ultimately inspired this entire series, as Ra gave many
specific pieces of information that could subsequently be verified with
scientific findings that would come out in ensuing years.
Without starting with the answers,
we probably would not have known what questions to look for, and thereby
discover the underlying proof.
You don’t really need to accept the
channeling if it simply leads you to an understanding of the hard science, but
for those who are interested we will cover some of Ra’s non-provable spiritual
philosophies as well.
We have been able to continue to
work and communicate with Ra to fill in the remaining pieces of their
scientific model, predominantly through dream research that augments extensive
physical research.
The personal side of this is largely
outside the scope of this series, but rest assured that we have had many, many
cases of accurate future prophecies and other methods of direct validation,
including as we said the physical appearance of Ra before others, including
counseling clients and the author’s own brother.
So in short, there are two ways to
go about writing this book. One way would be to painstakingly attempt to
reconstruct the science of the Ancients solely from the scattered bits and
pieces of the past, cloaked in symbolism, such those pieces found as in Manly
Palmer Hall’s book, which come from knowledge bases that Ra says were “quickly
distorted” by the priesthoods of the day.
Another way to write the book is to
simply present the reader with some of Ra’s basic assertions about the
Universe, summarized with our scientific conclusions that will be established
throughout the series, and then leave it to each person as to whether they will
accept or reject the material.
This second choice is what we have
decided to go with in this final version of the book, since it is good to have
documentation of Ra’s basic model of the Cosmos somewhere in the series.
THE ‘AETHER’
So, the most important aspect of
Atlantean knowledge that we need to start with is the idea that the Universe is
composed of energy.
The Greeks referred to this energy
as “aether,” which is their word for “shine,” indicating that it has
qualities similar to light. In the ancient model, this energy is both within
physical matter and outside of it at the same time.
Our current science has discarded this
idea as a ridiculous, archaic relic of the past, but it was a very active part
of all Greek philosophy.
And if Hall’s assertions are
correct, then the reason why the Greeks have preserved knowledge of this
“aether” is because they inherited it from the Atlantean civilization, which
appears to have originally acquired it from the Ra group.
Our conceptions of the aether, and
of how it interacts with physical matter, have grown by leaps and bounds since
the time that this first volume was originally written – and thus much of the
information that we originally presented in this chapter is now no longer
needed.
Later volumes will go into the
technical detail that will satisfy those who would like to have it. Suffice it
to say that in Volume III, Divine Cosmos, we will show that almost all of our
information about quantum physics – that which builds up all that we see in the
Universe on the smallest level – is flawed, including the idea that there are
any real “particles” in the atom.
Among other things, we will show
certain cases where atoms are forming into substances where they lose any sense
of an individual “particle” identity, but rather fuse into a single
conglomerate form. Such substances include microclusters and quasi-crystals,
both of which have extremely obvious geometric qualities, and Bose-Einstein
condensates.
To summarize the model as simply as
possible, we can list some of the initial basic characteristics of this newly
rediscovered energy field, which we will most consistently refer to as “aether,”
and how it structures the Cosmos.
You’ll definitely not want to blaze
through this list, but spend a little time meditating on each point if you want
to understand everything else as the series goes on. We admit that this list
might “hurt your brain” at first as you try to reorganize your mind to fit the
new information in.
As we go, all of these points will
be nicely rounded out, so don’t feel obligated to completely understand all of
this now – just be aware of it. Also know that our assertion is that everything
you are about to read was well-known in the time of Atlantis:
* What we have is a fluidlike energy source, which is
technically known as an energy medium or substrate, (remember the
word “medium,”) and which exists everywhere throughout the known universe. This
energy medium is normally unseen to us just as we do not see the air that we
breathe, and could be thought of as the “body” of the One Infinite Creator.
*
It exists at an extremely high pressure, much more than that of the surface air
pressure on Earth. Yet, we move through it quite easily, since we are also made
of the same “stuff.”
*
At the tiniest level, the energy is created by what Dr. Vladimir Ginzburg (vol.
III) calls “field bubbles” – tiny spheres of energy that roll and flow around
each other, thus imparting a liquid-like behavior to the medium.
*Mainstream
scientists have quietly rediscovered this energy medium, and it is variously
called the Virtual Particle Flux, the Zero-Point Energy Field, the Quantum
Physical Vacuum, the Quantum Foam, “Superstrings,” “Dark Matter” and “Dark
Energy,” among other things. They are becoming aware that it must be
responsible for the creation of matter.
*
For all practical purposes, the energy itself is conscious, and therefore
unifies all the Universe as one conscious lifeform –
an Ultimate Being. Any time the energy gathers together in an organized
pattern, you have some form of intelligent life. This includes stars, planets
and galaxies, as well as cells, microclusters, molecules and atoms.
*
Many, many alternative science researchers have observed this energy in the
laboratory, including its at-times bizarre properties of consciousness, and
given it their own unique name, such as Dr. Wilhelm Reich’s “Orgone energy.” (A
predominant amount of this research was done in secret throughout the former
Soviet Union, and has only recently been declassified and posted in English on
the Internet since the “fall of the Iron Curtain” in 1990-91. We appear to have
performed the most complete compilation of this material within a single book
(Volume III) in the Western world.)
*
Various spiritual teachers have called it “spiritual energy,” “loving energy,”
“healing energy,” “the Holy Spirit,” et cetera. All are discussing the same
energy field. They are often very aware of how consciousness directs this
energy, especially when love is the major motivating factor. Miraculous
healings have resulted from this ability.
*
The human being does have an egg-shaped “energy body” that is composed of this
medium, which many trained seers can both see and heal, and disease conditions
will appear in this body first before they become physical. This is one of the
deeper secrets that are well known in the Atlantean Mysteries.
*
You can expose a person to higher doses of this energy by certain technological
means, and they will experience many signs of spiritual, mental and physical
enhancement. As documented in Volume III, many top-level Russian researchers
have dramatically proven this – and we have replicated their experiments with a
safe, special machine called an “axion field generator” and / or “dynamic
torsion generator” known as the Comfort 7-L model, produced by Dr.
Alexander Shpilman. You can get similar but weaker effects by building a
pyramid, or a “passive torsion generator,” as we will discuss in the
next chapter and more thoroughly in Volume III.
*
Plants will have dramatic, robust growth enhancements in the presence of these
energy fields, which also destroy viruses, bacteria, cancer cells and related
organisms that are dangerous to higher forms of life, dramatically increasing
the chances of survival in a diseased organism. Since the energy is
intelligent, it will automatically “do” what needs to be done for body/mind/spirit
healing when a person is exposed to it, even though such a marvelous notion is
vastly disagreeable to most medical / scientific thinkers.
*
The ancient traditions mentioned this energy secretly and symbolically by
calling it “water,” or “the water of life,” among other things.
*
There are two major kinds of waves in the aether – electro/magnetic fields
and gravitational / torsion fields. We will describe their differences in
Volume III, with emphasis on the torsion fields, as they are largely unknown to
Western science.
*
This energy can be directly harnessed to produce technologies such as limitless
free energy, anti-gravity and even teleportation, as we will cover in volumes
II and III.
*
All moving (propagating / dynamic) waves in this energy medium travel in
spirals of various sizes, from very tiny to very large (and we will explain
why.) Many ancient teachings used the symbol of the spiraling serpent to
represent “universal wisdom” – another symbolic encoding of this scientific
knowledge – hence the man Jesus once said, “Be ye wise as serpents and
gentle as doves.”
*
Light is simply one major type of movement of this energy – hence the aether
can be thought of as “liquid light,” or as the author of Genesis said, “In
the beginning… the spirit of God moved upon the face of the waters. And God
said “Let there be light,” and there was light…” [Gen. 1:1-3]
*
There are seven major “densities” or thickness levels of this fluidlike energy
medium throughout the Universe, often referred to in esoteric traditions as the
“seven heavens.” These different densities are formed solely by the amount
of vibration that is occurring within the aether in a certain area.
*
As one similar analogy to help you visualize these energy densities, we know
that if water molecules vibrate really fast, they become gas, and if they
vibrate really slowly, they turn into solid ice. Vibration is solely
what causes these phase changes, nothing else. The aether behaves in a nearly
identical fashion to this, though it is not a “physical” substance in the
normal sense.
*
We cannot visually see any of the density levels in the Universe above the one
that we are now at – thus the Universe appears to be entirely “3D physical” to
us in our telescopes. However, there are ways to detect these different aether density
levels in the Cosmos with direct observation of their unique signatures in the
microwave spectrum, as will be discussed in Volume III with the work of Arp,
Tifft and Aspden.
*
In mystical states of consciousness the higher density levels can be directly
perceived visually, and learning to “see” is a very
basic aspect of ancient esoteric training.
*
Within the seven main energy density levels are seven sub-levels, and
there are seven sub-sub-levels within each sub-level, and so on to
infinity – much like a hologram or fractal, as we will later discover. (This is
similar to how you could have a swamp where you could measure infinitely
different grades of thickness throughout it with fine enough instruments,
but which you could resolve into seven main categories ranging from
swamp gas to fully “wet” super-free-flowing liquid to fully solid mass – like
peat moss.)
*
Even though there are many fine gradations of energy levels, all resolve into
seven major densities, which Ra calls the “true color” densities. This follows
the same basic “harmonic” rules that form the structures of music.
*
Vibration of the fluidlike energy source forms these densities. The same
basic rules of vibration are also responsible for the 7-fold color spectrum of
visible light and the 7-tone octave of the mathematically pure “Diatonic”
scale, which we can hear with the white keys of the piano. (More
on this below.) Thus, in sound and color, nature reveals its secrets for
“those who have eyes to see,” while to the “profane” the secrets remain
“inscrutable.” Ancient mystery school teachings delve excessively into studies
of sound and color, and this has been used in the formation of cathedrals with
colorful stained glass windows and Gregorian Chant
music by the Knight Templars, one group that inherited the Mysteries and helped
design and build the cathedrals.
*
Wherever you are in the Universe, all energy densities exist there to some degree.
Nevertheless, most regions will have one density level of energy that
predominates over the others. Planets also progress as intelligent beings from
density to density, and thus will reside at particular density levels depending
on their state of development.
*
Size does matter in the Universe. Planets are far more advanced beings than
individual lifeforms living on the planets, yet are nevertheless very receptive
to their people. Stars are far more advanced than planets, having full
consciousness of all the densities. Galaxies are far more advanced than stars,
programming the basic conditions for spiritual, mental and even physical
evolution throughout all star systems. And the visible Universe is far more
advanced than any galaxy, setting up the basic laws and templates that all
shall follow, as it is the embodiment of the One Infinite Creator.
*
Galaxies, as conscious beings, use the natural laws of vibration to create
discretely layered “zones” of energy density / consciousness throughout themselves.
From a top-down view, the galaxy is separated into zones or sectors of density,
which looks like a pinwheel or a cake cut into many moon-shaped curving pieces,
which bloom out from the center like a flower. These zones essentially remain
stationary in space while the star systems pass through them.
*
As a star system moves through successive zones, the overall density of the
aether is seen to steadily rise or fall, depending on the position. These zones
have already been detected and measured scientifically – and Dr. Aleskey
Dmitriev refers to them as “magnetic strips and striations.” Precise cycles of
time, based again on the mathematics of music and vibration, govern how long a
planetary system will move through a particular zone. This first volume will
cover these cycles extensively, as the Ancients preserved a fantastic degree of
knowledge about them, such as in the Sumerian clay tablets.
*
The purpose of planetary systems moving through these differing energy density
levels is to promote spiritual evolution at a fixed pace. Beings like humans
have free will as to when they will choose to proceed, with the cycle
end-points from one density to another offering an opportunity to escape the
cycles of reincarnation and progress to a higher realm of being – whereas for
stars and planets the timelines for progress are relatively fixed.
*
The boundary from one zone of density to another in the galactic “pinwheel”
formation can be visualized in much the same way that a straight line forms
when oil sits on top of water, as this is a perfect analogy of what happens
when two different densities of fluid are in contact with each other.
*
The solar system is now moving into the next higher level of density in the
Galaxy, which is causing the zone around the Earth to go from the third-density
that we now inhabit into the fourth-density – essentially creating what could
be thought of as a “dimensional shift.”
*
We “cross the waterline” from one density into the other somewhere
between 2010-2013, corresponding to the end-date of the Mayan Calendar on Dec.
21, 2012. This creates irreversible changes in the basic quality of
matter and energy that surrounds us, including the traveling speed of visible
light, which sizably increases in our own local area. Remember that right now,
we are observing all stars through the lens of the speed that light travels in
the third density, and nothing higher. Thus the whole
Universe shifts in its appearance to us as we move into a higher level.
*
The entire Solar System is showing massive signs of an increasing energetic
charge as we move closer and closer to this final moment, as more and more of
the higher vibrations and pressures of this energy are “bleeding off” into our
own solar system. Every month there are new findings coming out from the
scientific community that are unknowingly adding further validation to this
model – most recently through the September-October 2002 discovery that Pluto
is experiencing “global warming” and large increases in atmospheric pressure, even
though it is now moving farther away from the Sun. The scientific priesthood
says this is “unrelated” to global warming on Earth, even though other recent
articles reported “global warming” on Mars and Venus as well, with other
anomalies occurring on the other planets such as increasing brightness,
increasing magnetic strength, huge atmospheric changes and even pole shifts on
Uranus and Neptune. Pluto was the only planet left that we didn’t already have
good, solid evidence for… so now the model is complete.
*
On a separate but relevant note, the DNA structure changes as we move from
one density to another, and we now have a scientific model to explain why.
The spiraling “torsion” (i.e. “twisting”) energy waves in the aether
have the pattern of DNA written into them at the smallest level, as programmed
by the intelligence of the Galaxy. These spiraling waves exert subtle but
measurable currents of force on physical matter, as we will show in Volume III.
As loose elements bounce around, they are increasingly caught up into the
currents of these spiraling waves and will automatically arrange together like
a jigsaw puzzle, first into amino acids, then eventually into DNA.
*
When a given planet passes into a zone of higher energy density, the underlying
spiral waves become more complex, and the DNA structures thereby become more
highly evolved. One of the discoverers of the DNA molecule has published a
remarkable study that suggests that most of the visible dust in the galaxy
has all the same qualities that we would expect from bacteria, showing this
energetic DNA formation in effect throughout the Galaxy.
*
Dangerously high amounts of this energy, far more than what is used for healing
work, can be sent through one organism and transfer the DNA qualities of that
creature to another organism, causing a physical transformation / mutation.
Dr. Yu. V. Tszyan Kanchzen was able to use this process to cause a hen to begin
mutating into a duck, which included the appearance of webbing between the
hen’s normally naked toes.
*
Dr. Kanchzen’s discovery provides effective proof that the spiraling torsion
waves are the true hidden architects of the DNA molecule, and that these
templates can be energetically altered within a single lifetime. Despite
ethical objections, these experiments could be repeated relatively easily, if
desired.
*
Species evolution, both physically and in terms of consciousness,
automatically results when we pass from one level of aetheric density to
another. We already have a great historical record that shows when and how this
has happened before, where in a remarkably short time the indigenous creatures
of Earth disappear and more highly-evolved forms take their place – and that
was only what happened as we went through various sub-levels of density;
now we’re breaking through to another major “true color” level.
*
As we read in the last chapter, we already are far along in the process of a
mass extinction on a level not seen since the time of the dinosaurs, so there
is no need to fear some unseen doom – we’re already most of the way through
this process now. We have assumed that these events are strictly “manmade”
causes, but the model suggests otherwise. Every time this has occurred in the
past, new and more highly evolved species have emerged very suddenly upon the
world stage – and this time will be no different.
Now that we’ve delved into our new
model of evolution, let’s return to some of the behaviors of the aether as they
relate to universal consciousness and the formation of ‘physical matter’.
We will also show some further
evidence of how this technical information was hidden in symbolism by those who
survived the Atlantean cataclysm.
We will also show how neatly the
energy fields at different levels of size are organized throughout the Cosmos,
according to simple properties of vibration:
* At the highest levels of density this energy medium
acts more like a solid – just as water can be frozen into solid ice. In these
levels, energy travels much, much faster than the speed of light –
theoretically at an instantaneous speed, thus insuring instantaneous
consciousness throughout the Universe, i.e. Oneness – and in Volume III we show
how Dr. Nikolai Kozyrev discovered this. Thus, the physics provides for
there to be instantaneous consciousness in this “mind of God” that is our
Universe, which we naturally expect would have to be present for “God” to exist.
*
Again, spiraling “vortex” movements like eddying currents in a flowing stream form
all physical matter from within this non-physical fluidlike medium. (Not all
vortexes are strong enough to create stable matter. “Virtual Particles” have
now been discovered, which appear just like normal atomic “particles” but
appear and disappear from view constantly.)
*
Hence, everything that we see in the universe is formed by complex movements of
nothing more than pressure and counterpressure, push and pull, within a
single medium.
*
To visualize these basic matter-creating vortexes, we must visualize a sphere
with two trumpet / tornado-shaped whirlpools, one pointing down into the center
of the sphere from the north pole and another coming up into the center from
the south pole, with their hollow tube funnels joining to form a clean, narrow hole
through the center of the sphere. The entire sphere flows and curls around
itself like a ball of string or a smoke ring. This shape, essentially just a
sphere with a “donut hole” pinched through the middle, is technically called a spherical
torus.
*
Ancient shamans and mystics traveled out-of-body and saw this domed spherical
structure surrounding the Solar System, with a translucent bluish-white
appearance against the blackness of space, and with the funnel-shaped ‘tube’
passing directly through the Sun at the center. From the Earth’s orbital
perspective along the midplane of the sphere, looking towards the Sun’s north
pole, this energy field looks like a towering pillar coming up from the Sun and
branching out into a spherical canopy – with a similar “root” going down below
the south pole – hence it was called the “World Tree.” This is actually
the same energy structure that forms the body of a tree on Earth. It was
another way in which the ancient Atlanteans hid their technical knowledge
through symbolism, and will be covered in detail in Volume II. Later seers who
visually perceived it simply believed the myth that it was a ‘tree’ and did not
understand the science behind it.
*
Another symbolic / technical metaphor of this energy field from the Atlanteans
is the “Orphic Egg” and / or the “Omphalos stone,” the “navel of the world.”
This is pictured as an egg with a serpent coiling around it – and is another
very accurate symbol of what these swirling spherical fields actually look
like, with the serpent representing twisting “torsion” fields and the egg
showing the basic spherical structure.
*
Every atom in our current reality, especially those formed in undisturbed
natural circumstances, has some degree of existence in the different densities,
but tends to be “focused” at the level we now perceive.
*
Since this energy is conscious, a highly-trained person can actually form
physical matter by conscious intention alone.
*
The same energy fields structure all levels of size in the Universe, (and
all are alive in some form,) from the atom to the cell to the fruit to the
vital organs to the human body to the tree to the moon, planet, star, galaxy,
galactic cluster, and visible Universe. At every level you will see the same
basic underlying energy forms at work, such as the human aura or a planetary
magnetic field, once you repair the damage that now exists in scientific
thought.
*
A clean, even musical ratio of 34560 separates these different levels of size, as
discovered by Ray Tomes, which will be more fully covered in Volume III. The
Universe is extremely well organized according to the laws of vibration.
*
Thus, within even the smallest “subatomic particle” is the image of the entire
Creation, much like a hologram. There is a universe within each of your cells –
formed with the same basic patterns as the One Infinite Creator. Hence, “God
made Man in Its own image.”
*
Each density is populated with increasingly intelligent life, moving ever
closer to complete Oneness – and we are only on the third out of seven levels.
Hence we have a lot of help now, as one could say that we are “screwing up” on
the planetary scale, causing a great deal of damage and existing in a
relatively blinded state, spiritually speaking.
As these nuggets of thought grow in
your mind, they will be unrolled and revealed in their true splendor throughout
the series, with plenty of proof to back them up, along with many other
surprises that we have not yet revealed.
CONSCIOUSNESS EVOLUTION:
FIRST DENSITY
One part of Ra’s model needs to be
made clear: we can visually perceive all forms on Earth and elsewhere
that have first, second and third-density levels of consciousness, not just the
third.
Hence, these densities are not
directly similar to the concept of ‘higher dimensions’, as we shall explain
later. Ra teaches that the first density is the world of the elements –
earth, air, fire and water.
In this density there is simply
empty awareness that has no central focus of space or time. Gradually, as these
elements disrupt each other, such as by water moving over earth, awareness
eventually becomes more localized into that area of space and time.
This causes the spiraling
intelligent energy to combine into “increasingly intelligent patterns”
therein, and thus the basic elements will begin forming into amino acids and
eventually DNA molecules, which signals the bridge into second density.
SECOND DENSITY
The second density encompasses all
forms that we normally consider to be “living,” from single-celled organisms to
plants to animals, birds and fish, except human beings.
In this density, there is awareness,
but these organisms still do not have a sense of a separate self – they
have a group awareness that is shared amongst all of their species. This gives
rise to various observable phenomena, such as flocks of birds or schools of
fish that can all make sudden, simultaneous changes in their direction of
movement.
Dr. Rupert Sheldrake has written
extensively on this subject, which is not difficult to understand if we can
accept that consciousness is all around us, not just within our own
minds.
Consciousness is naturally shared
between particular species of animals, via the intelligent energy that connects
all life in the Universe, and there is also some degree of sharing between all
different species as well.
The different animals within a given
species are always consulting this “group mind” as they go throughout their
daily routines, and if enough animals have the same experience, the knowledge
gained from this experience becomes a part of the group-mind.
Hence we have the famous “hundredth
monkey” effect, where a series of monkeys were studied on separate islands, all
isolated from each other. The scientists performing the study presented the
monkeys with a challenge for gathering food that they had never encountered
before.
Either potatoes or rice were
presented to the monkeys, but they were covered in sand. Some of the monkeys
got the idea to wash the food in the stream and remove the sand. After
approximately 100 of the monkeys did this, a “critical mass” was reached.
Suddenly, every monkey on every
island was no longer perplexed by the problem; they would all immediately
wash the rice or potatoes as if they had always known how to do it, though
they had never been in contact with any of the first 100 monkeys who solved the
puzzle on their own.
Hence, a critical threshold was
reached once the “hundredth monkey” learned the skill, and the behavior became
completely automatic. This shows us how a new survival concept was written into
the group-mind of this particular species of monkey.
In Ra’s model, this would represent
an aspect of conscious evolution of that species as a group, precipitated by
the free will of its members. It is a natural system designed for lower-level
organisms to adapt to their surroundings and thereby be able to function in a
largely automatic fashion.
In time, this effect may be seen as
one of the finest scientific discoveries of the 20th century.
THIRD DENSITY
The next question would be, “If
animals can share thoughts, then why can’t most humans?”
The answer to the question is that we do still have a propensity towards
“groupthink,” though not on the directly conscious telepathic level any longer.
In order to progress to the human
level, we must shed some of what we have gained in second-density. The
third-density is the first plane where each organism has a direct
consciousness of itself as a separate being.
In order to have a consciousness of
being separate, we must lose the ability to merge with others of our own kind
into a “group-mind.” Our own individual mind actually becomes far more powerful
in this process.
We certainly hold the memory of
having a group-mind that will allow us to run on ‘autopilot,’ and thus we can
succumb to the “herd mentality” or what Dr. Caroline Myss calls the “tribal
instinct” where we want to be part of a group, and let the group do all of our
thinking for us.
The problem with having a group-mind
is that it removes the need for most individual thinking, reasoning and
learning, and we never really grow by experience.
With third-density awareness comes the advent of conscious processes that are not
directly required for survival, such as love, compassion and creativity.
This is considered to be the most
important level of existence in the Universe in the spiritual sense, as it
presents one with very unique conditions, as follows:
FREE WILL
In third density, there is no direct
“proof” that God exists. It is quite possible for a being in this realm to
conclude that they are “alone in the Universe.”
However, we can think of our entire
Universe as a big game that was set up by the One Infinite Creator, where the
idea was to separate itself into many distinct parts, each of which has total
free will.
The Law of One teachings repeatedly
emphasize that free will is the most important law in the universe, and
often the least understood or respected. It was free will that was behind the different
fragments of the One choosing to separate and form the
templates that eventually led to the rise of galaxies as conscious mega-beings.
Many people feel that they have a
right, even an obligation to force their beliefs onto others. However, “behind
the scenes” there are higher-level beings who
rigorously protect the free will of others, thus insuring that no person meets
with experiences that are above and beyond what they created for themselves
through their own free will.
Our experience in this cycle of
Earth civilization is especially potent, as we have an institutionalized system
of “science” that strongly frowns on any notion of a higher purpose behind the
events that unfold in our lives.
Thus, when a person begins thinking
that such a “behind-the-scenes” world really exists, they often have to sit
alone with that knowledge, and feel that it separates them from others.
Thus, we can again state that one of
the most important realizations to free us from the “fairytale” of modern
third-density civilization is that events in our lives do not happen
randomly. The reality is that we are living in a highly structured
system with very specific rules, with free will as the pre-eminent law.
There are relatively exact guidelines in place for how we will meet with what
we create – either on the positive or the negative path, which we will discuss
below.
The balancing adjustments that we
attract to ourselves are precisely carried out by higher beings without any
sense of judgment. We should also remember that if we do get some “bad karma,”
we are perpetually returning to a clean slate of balance – so there is usually
never a need to fear any long-term repercussions.
The processes of karma are always
giving us the opportunity to make huge inner progress in any moment, as we are
always being returned to a state of balance where we have no karmic residue
from the past.
If you did something you think was
“bad,” then fear not, for whatever balance you attracted to yourself came soon
afterwards, and there is no need to fear any residual long-term effects. This
is always the case, particularly at the end of a major cycle of evolution –
though events of particularly negative nature, such as murder, may need to be
balanced in future lifetimes.
Hence, by free will we choose to
keep repeating certain experiences that we may think of as “mistakes,” and
choose to continue to experience the natural consequences that we then attract.
We can simply make different
choices, in the direction of self-acceptance, self-forgiveness and a finer
exercising of the powers of our creative will to help others, and miraculously
discover how quickly our experiences we have labeled as “suffering” will
subside.
And if we want to spiritually
advance in the Universe, we are well advised to choose through our own free
will to increasingly lose our sense of being a separate self – and this means
that we love others as we love ourselves, and we are completely respectful of
their own free will.
Eventually, we will get to a point
where we can look in the mirror and see the face of the Creator, look into the
faces of others and equally see the face of the Creator, and look at the entire
Universe around us and see the Creator, with the awareness that our own True
Self is what we are seeing at every level, and that all is perfect. Ultimately
we will have no personality, no identity, no memory of past, present or future,
but simply consciousness as the All.
This is a state of consciousness that
you can aspire to right now, here in third density. Your thoughts are not your
enemy and nothing is to be overcome. In meditation, just allow them to flow
through you and run their course.
We certainly can aspire to having
our personalities become increasingly reflective of the Oneness, while knowing
and accepting our “distortions” along the way. This is why it is important to
cultivate a sense of humility, and to pay less attention to spiritual teachers
who do not evince it in their own behavior.
So, the goal of the Creator is for
each entity to make a conscious choice to again seek Oneness, out of our own
free will – not because anyone else forced us to. If we are told what to do and
what to believe, then we have learned nothing and will not make any progress.
Perhaps the single most basic
realization to make is that we live in a loving Universe. If we are all
One Being, then it is foolish for us to hate anyone, as we are
only hating ourselves, as the cliché goes.
In third-density, we are not
expected to have a full consciousness of the Law of One; in fact, Ra says that
we must realize that we do not understand everything about the Universe in
order to be able to make further progress.
In third density, we “grope in the
dark” for truth, while having no direct proof that God exists. What matters
most is how we use our free will in making a choice of which path we will
follow. We can either choose to love and respect others or to manipulate
and control others.
The path of love and respect is the
positive path, and the path of manipulation and control is the negative path.
Ra also explains this in terms of energy. The positive path is that which
radiates energy out of itself and the negative path is that which absorbs
energy into itself.
Neither one of these behaviors of
energy are intrinsically “good” or “bad,” as both are required for anything
“physical” to exist – we have pressure and counterpressure, radiance and
absorption or “source” and “sink.”
However, in the realms of
consciousness, the positive path is a far more expedient path back to the
Oneness, as both paths ultimately unify into a positive, loving creation.
When we act lovingly, we are
radiating joy and happiness to others, thereby enhancing the Oneness, and when
we act negatively and violate free will, we are trying to absorb others’ life
energies into ourselves, thereby enhancing the separation within the One.
Another related deep realization is
that the more that we can radiate energy out of ourselves, the more it will
naturally be attracted back to us without having to manipulate or control
anything to get it – we create a “flow.” That which flows out of us must be
replaced, by virtue of the laws of pressure and counterpressure. Higher
pressure (aether density) always flows back into a lower-pressure zone.
We don’t automatically shift into
the next density if we are not ready for it. In order to “make graduation” into
fourth-density positive, we must be slightly more than 50-percent oriented
towards service to others, as demonstrated by our thoughts and actions, which
are completely transparent to higher-level beings.
It still appears that about 95%
of all present-day human beings on Earth will be repeating their third-density
cycle on a different planet after the Earth has entered into fourth-density,
since it is so easy in this experience to focus on the material and on how
other people, animals, plants and the environment can all be manipulated to
increase the comfort and ease of existence for the self; i.e. energy
absorption.
It is for this very reason that our
economic structures are collapsing right out from under us as we rewrite this
edition; the increasing energy density level that is charging up the whole
Solar System simply does not allow these systems of consciousness to propagate
any longer – they cannot maintain an existence within the instreaming higher
energy.
However, once the cycle ends, if we
have simply gone above this basic 50-percent level of loving others in our
truest, deepest thoughts and actions, then we are ready to evolve to the next
level and proceed forward.
And even at this late stage in the
game, we do still have a narrow chance of increasing the numbers of those who
will “make it” to well above 5 percent, hence Ra tells us that “estimation is
meaningless.”
Those who are going to repeat a
third-density cycle are not going to “hell,” they are simply staying at the
level that is most appropriate for them to learn. We are told that higher-level
beings will transport them to a new planet that is suitable for their path.
The Universe allows you to choose a
path, negative or positive, in third-density. However, most modern Earth people
are stuck in what Ra calls the “morass of indifference” where their actions are
not sufficiently polarized for either path, and thereby will repeat the cycle.
This is not good or bad, it simply is.
These general metaphysical
principles are said to be constants throughout the Universe – and in this
series of books, we will learn how to remember the Creation from the
perspective of the One True Self that we once were.
Once we learn the hidden truths of
science, our minds have become conditioned to accept a greater inner knowledge
of Oneness, and we will automatically advance on our spiritual path as a
result.
Again, the more that we can step out
of our sense of being an individual self, and see others as the self, the
quicker we will progress.
So, the Law of One concepts of
“densities” are clearly different than the dimensions. We can directly see the
elemental life of first-density, the “organic” life of second-density and the
human life of third-density.
The next obvious question is “Why
can’t we see the beings in the fourth, fifth, sixth and seventh densities?” In
the Law of One series, it says that "All the densities 4, 5, 6 and 7
would remain visible, were they not freely choosing not to do so."
As a brief overview, fourth density
is that realm of unconditional love – a realm of love that is not very well
informed with wisdom and discernment. Fifth density is the realm of wisdom, and
compassion can be lacking.
In sixth density compassion and
wisdom are integrated. Seventh density is where one recognizes that all things
are perfectly sacred, and there is the dissolving of any sense of separate self
back into Oneness once more.
Finally, the Octave is the Oneness,
a return to complete timelessness. Channelers often give many different
interpretations of how many dimensions there are, but it is important to
remember that the eight-level Octave model is supported by direct
higher-dimensional physics equations, as we shall see.
We are now moving into the
fourth-density level on Earth and will begin studying the lessons of
fifth-density as well, and we have every reason to expect that life will be
seen as almost unspeakably fantastic compared to what it is like now.
The Law of One series tells us that
life in fourth-density is “one hundred times more harmonious” than life in the
third-density.
In the next chapter we will return
to our physical modelings of the behavior of this fluidlike aetheric energy,
and introduce the penultimate concept of sacred geometry.
It is very, very frequently
discussed in all ancient teachings, to the point that the main symbol of the
Masonic Order is a compass and straightedge, the two basic instruments needed
to work with sacred geometry – hence the “G” for “Geometry” in the center of
the symbol.
A working knowledge of the
importance of geometry in the flow of aetheric energy was behind the
construction of various pyramids, standing stones, earth mounds and related formations
worldwide.
CHAPTER 03: HARMONIC PYRAMIDS ON EARTH AND ABROAD
SACRED GEOMETRY
Now
that we have given an overview of the entire aether model in this series, and
covered some of the basics in terms of how life behaves in the earlier
densities, we shall explore some of the physical
properties of these densities, and their esoteric connections.
It
is important to again remember that these densities are formed by a fluidlike,
non-physical energy source. The hard proof for the existence of a fluidlike ‘aether‘ is extensive, and will be covered in greater detail
in volumes II and III.
First
of all, from sources including Ra, we know that the Universe is One. This One is unilaterally referred to as Pure White
Light. It is also referred to as the "seed sound" of the Universe, or
the AUM.
We
are then told that things got rather stale as The One, since nothing really
ever changed in this Unity. So, The One decided to create new life from itself.
In order to do this, The One vibrated itself into the "octave."
The
Pure White Light became a series of seven colors - red, orange, yellow, green,
blue, indigo, violet. The visible color spectrum
embodies the memory of this. The One Seed Sound broke up into a series of pure
tones - do, re, mi, fa, sol, la, ti.
The
immutable structure of the Octave, those notes which are the
purest mathematical ratios and also sound the best to our ears, holds
the memory of this. (They can be seen and heard with the white keys on the
piano.) Another word for vibration is “harmonics, ”
and we will frequently use that word to describe these systems.
We
need to remember that this Pure Light and Pure Sound are simply two different
ways of describing the same vibrations of the fluidlike “intelligent energy ” of the One. There is no real difference between
them, as they are both functions of vibration.
Sound
is a vibration of air molecules, and light is ultimately a vibration of the
fluidlike aether.
We
will see in Volume II how Dale Pond has demonstrated that if you multiply the
pure sound frequencies many times over, you get the visible color frequencies,
thus showing the equivalence between the two.
[Most scientists agree that light
behaves like a wave, but they also try to assert that there is no medium that the wave is
traveling through - that the wave is simply a particle-like entity known as a
“photon ” traveling through an empty ‘vacuum.‘
This is a preposterous notion, as all
natural examples of waves have something that they are ‘waving‘
through. The basic definition of a wave is “an impulse that travels
through a medium, ” and in reality light is no
different.]
The
third key “harmonic ” component that we need to have
in place after light and sound is geometry, which is the visible result of
vibration.
The
first and most important geometry that we must start with is the sphere, which
the ancient traditions see as the highest geometry in the Universe, the pure
essence of the One.
In
our physics model, the Universe is ultimately spherical in shape, as its energy
fields expanded at a uniform rate in all directions as it was formed. [All of
our visible galaxies in the Universe have coalesced into one single “flat ” super-galaxy, however, but the spherical energy
fields are still present around this super-galaxy, just not as visible. This
will be discussed in Volume III.]
A
sphere can be compressed into a single point, which has no space and no time,
and thus exist as the simplest object in the Universe, but the sphere also is
the most complex form in the Universe, containing all other things within itself.
Although
this might not seem to make sense at first, it is actually quite simple to
explain when we start out with a “flat ”
two-dimensional demonstration, as the ancient students of sacred geometry would
learn.
We
start by drawing a circle with a compass. Any spot on a circle could be defined
as a point, and you could then take a straightedge and draw a line to any other
possible spot on the circle. There are literally an infinite number of different lines,
angles and shapes that could be drawn within the circle.
Mathematically
speaking, no other geometric shape can form as many different geometries inside
of itself as a circle can, and thus it is the most complex two-dimensional shape
there is. At the same time, its pure, harmonic structure makes it the simplest
possible two-dimensional shape in the Universe.
It
is the only shape where there is only one edge, no straight lines, and a curve
that is completely unified for a full 360 degrees around a single center point.
It resolves to One, and thus it is the simplest
possible two-dimensional shape.
When
we expand this into three dimensions, we can then see that the similar
principle applies to the sphere. Confusingly, physicist Buckminster Fuller
described a sphere as "a
multiplicity of discrete events, approximately equidistant in all directions
from a nuclear center."
Events,
you say? To put this in drastically simpler language, in a sphere you can draw
an infinite number of lines that connect to an infinite number of points (i.e. “events ”) on
the surface of the sphere, with all the lines starting from one single center
point or nucleus, and all the lines will come out to be the exact same length.
This
makes the sphere the most complex three-dimensional object that there is; an
infinite number of different geometric shapes can be drawn inside of it, by
simply connecting different points on the surface of the sphere together.
Once
you stretch or flatten the sphere in any way, you have less symmetry and thus
have less flexibility in what can be geometrically created inside. (This may
seem hard to understand, but it can be proven mathematically.
This
also explains why liquid naturally forms into spheres when it is in free-fall
and/or in a soap bubble, as the air pressure on the liquid is equal on all
sides.) The sphere is also the simplest three-dimensional formation in the
Universe for the same reasons as the circle; namely, there is only one edge,
perfectly symmetrical in its curvature around a center point, and thus all
resolves to One.
For
comparison, a cube would have six sides or edges, and this is one of the
simplest three-dimensional shapes that there is. The sphere has only one
‘side‘.
Interestingly,
the work of Dr. Hans Jenny (pronounced “Yenny ”) has
shown that when a spherical area of fluid is vibrated at pure “Diatonic ” sound
frequencies, i.e. the basic vibrations of the Octave, then geometric forms
emerge inside the fluid.
Tiny
particles that Jenny put in the fluid known as ‘colloids‘ would assemble into
basic geometric forms during the experiment, leaving clear water in between -
where normally the particles would be suspended all throughout the water
equally.
If
Dr. Jenny turned up the sound frequency to a higher level, then more complex
geometric structures would appear, and when he turned it back down to the
original level, the exact same geometry that he started with would be seen once
again in the same way.
This
is quite a dramatic demonstration when seen on Dr. Jenny‘s “Cymatics
” video, which is accessible from various sources - yet such research
has been remarkably undervalued and / or ignored by the scientific community.
Thus,
geometry is a very basic characteristic of vibration - or as Pythagoras once
said, “Geometry is frozen music. ” The five most
important three-dimensional geometries are collectively known as the Platonic
solids, since the Greek philosopher Plato first wrote them about in modern
times.
Figure 3.1 - The five Platonic Solids.
As
one note, the Star Tetrahedron is more technically known as an interlaced
tetrahedron. You can also examine the tetrahedron by itself, which is simply a
four-sided pyramid with equilateral triangles on each face, but in terms of the
workings of energy as vibration, it appears that most tetrahedral structures
have two tetrahedrons stuck inside of each other as we see above.
There
is clear evidence that any scientific effort which moves towards a discovery of
the importance of these geometries in the Universe is being actively
suppressed, as those in the secret brotherhoods still have a high degree of
power and feel bound to “ever conceal and never reveal ”
the “secrets of the Order. ”
Many
of these group members have deliberately arisen to power in various scientific
institutions, and are thus positioned to deflect certain types of research,
especially those related to free energy / anti-gravity, as we shall discuss in Volume
II.
Richard
Hoagland and the Enterprise Mission, working with Lt. Col. Tom Bearden, have
shown how such suppression efforts trace back to the 19th century, at least.
The
great 19th century pioneer who analyzed the behavior of the electromagnetic (EM)
wave was Sir James Clerk Maxwell. His equations, known as “quaternions, ” were used to map out the full, hidden internal
structures of the EM wave in full 3-D view, with over 200 equations altogether.
When
you analyze all 200+ quaternions as a group, you see the geometry of a tetrahedron inside a sphere.
This
is the hidden secret of the electromagnetic wave, the underlying structure that
determines its behavior as it moves along.
Oliver
Heaviside and others, who reduced Maxwell‘s equations to four basic quaternions
and declared the hidden geometry to be “occult nonsense ”,
vigorously removed it from all academic debate. Had this not been done, we may
have “solved the puzzle ” far earlier along.
There
is no direct way to prove that those from the secret groups inspired this
political move on Maxwell‘s work, but it is exactly what we would expect based
on their own system of beliefs that they are sworn to uphold on pain of death.
An
even more obvious example was the demonizing of the “aether ”
concept through using the results of the Michelson-Morley experiment as “proof.
” 19th century mystic Madame Blavatsky predicted that the aether would be
removed from discussion, and that “the pillars of science would come down along
with it. ”
We
will discuss this more fully in volumes II and III. Even now, the anti-aether
bias is so strong that you will be almost immediately dismissed if you try to
bring it up in a scientific discussion - but we are not concerned, as time and
proof will heal this wound.
Once
we do accept the existence of a fluidlike aether at various levels of density,
where each density has a different quality of vibration, then we realize that
certain clear geometric forms will emerge at the various “pure
” frequencies.
Indeed,
geometry is the single most important aspect of the aether‘s behavior in terms
of being able to construct stable structures, such as crystals. Without the
geometry, matter would not be possible, as geometry is what allows the “field bubbles ” of the aether to clump together in precise,
organized patterns, forming specific molecules.
Otherwise,
the best we could hope for is that the spheres would line up pole-to-pole, and
otherwise be free flowing around each other - and this behavior would not be
complex enough to build matter.
The
tips of the geometries have more strength to attract each other than the other
areas on the surface of the sphere, as we shall discuss below, and this allows
the spheres to organize into non-random “matrix ”
patterns.
Though
we cannot directly see these geometries most of the time, except in crystal
structures, microclusters and quasi-crystals (volume III), they create distinct
“stresses ” or pressure zones in the aether that can
exert enormous forces on their environment.
Think
about the force that is contained in a whirlpool and you‘ll see how a fluid can
have areas of stronger and weaker force inside of it. These geometric forms
therefore possess both qualities of a fluid, as they are forming in a fluid
medium, as well as a crystal, as they are clearly geometric - hence Dr. Harold
Aspden refers to them as “fluid crystals. ”
By
the end of Volume III, we will have constructed a complete physics model to
demonstrate how these formations are hidden within all physics, whether
quantum, biological or cosmological.
If
you think the science of chemistry and quantum physics is complete as it is,
you will be very surprised to find out how many problems there are with the
current models - and that the design we present here solves every one of these
problems.
In
this book we will cover some of the basics of how this geometric patterning
works, including the “Global Grid ” of energy lines on
the Earth, which directly shape the continents.
The
most important quality of the Platonic Solids is that each shape fits perfectly
into a sphere, such that all its outer points precisely merge with the outside
surface of the sphere. Each of the straight lines that make up these objects
will be the same length, and all geometric points on the sphere‘s surface are
equidistant from their neighbors - which is exactly what we would expect with
the science of vibration.
Plato
and other Greek philosophers also pointed out that all the angle measurements
in these geometric solids are the same, and that each side of the
three-dimensional objects have to be the same shape.
Although
this may seem confusing at first, it actually works out very nicely. There are
only five major shapes to contend with when we look at this information. Those
five shapes are the octahedron, star tetrahedron, cube (hexahedron),
dodecahedron and icosahedron.
In
order to understand why such geometric objects form inside a vibrating sphere
of fluidlike energy, we have to know a little about wave movement. If we have a
simple two-dimensional wave, such as a vibrating guitar string, then there are
three basic components that will stay the same if the wave is not disturbed.
These
three basic components are the wavelength, the frequency and the amplitude. The
wavelength is how long each part of the wave is, i.e. “the observed distance
between two adjacent wave crests, ” (measured as a
length quantity in angstroms when dealing with visible light.)
The
frequency is the number of wave crests that pass by an observer each second -
measured as cycles per second or “hertz, ” and the
amplitude is how high each wave is - i.e. “the size of the wave measured from
zero to peak. ”
Any
color or sound that stays the same for a length of time will have a continuous
repetition of the same wavelength during that time. As a typical example, the
“concert-level ” frequency for the note A is 440
cycles per second.
This
means that when air vibrates 440 times in one second, our ear interprets this
as the musical sound “A ”. That‘s all there is to it.
If those 440 cycles didn‘t all have the same frequency and amplitude, then we
wouldn‘t hear a steady pitch at a steady volume.
If
we increase the frequency of the sound, such as by going up to 497 cycles per
second, then the pitch will go up as the wavelength shortens. If we increase
the amplitude, the volume of the sound will go up as the height of the wave
increases, but its pitch will stay the same.
We
should also remember that complex information can be stored in these waves. We
have two types of waves that are used for radio: frequency modulation, or FM,
and amplitude modulation, or AM. The word ‘modulation‘ simply
means ‘changing.‘
So,
as a simple explanation, the FM waves stay at the same amplitude but have
continuing changes (modulations) in their frequency, whereas the AM waves
maintain the same frequency but have continuing changes in amplitude. That‘s
basically all there is to it.
Since
these electromagnetic waves can move so fast, there is a great deal of
information that can be stored within them - and that is an important point.
The encoded information of AM/FM radio, CB, the police / fire / emergency
bands, broadcast and satellite television stations, cordless and cellular
telephone conversations are always around us in every moment.
Now
when we have a three-dimensional geometric waveform inside of a sphere, the
wavelength and frequency would be represented by the distance between the
various node points across the surface of the sphere, which could be measured
in degrees, and calculated by the sine function in trigonometry.
The
amplitude would be measured by the size of the sphere, which could be measured
in radians, and calculated by the cosine function.
Thus,
as we pump up the strength (amplitude) of a given spherical energy field, so
too will we increase its size - which explains why these structures exist from
the tiniest level of quantum mechanics all the way up to the known Universe.
It
is also important to realize that in this fluidlike aether system, increases in
frequency will also draw in more aetheric energy from the surrounding
environment, and thereby increase the size (amplitude) of the sphere as one geometry shifts to another.
We
will explore this later in the chapter, when we see how neatly the different Platonic
Solids “nest ” inside of each other, with each new
geometry larger than the one inside of it. So typically, a frequency increase
will also involve an amplitude increase.
The
only thing left to explain is why the vibrations form tips or points or vertices
at the surface of the sphere, with straight lines connecting them. Again,
returning to a the simple study of a wave in two dimensions, known as wave
mechanics, we know that every wave has certain points known as “nodes ” where
there is no movement.
This
is easiest to see with the basic sine wave, which is shaped like a slow-moving
wave on the surface of a lake - a continuing S-shaped curve. If you pluck a
guitar string, there are certain areas of the wave where there is no movement
at all, but it actually will remain perfectly still.
These
areas are the “nodes, ” and you obtain the wavelength
by measuring the distance between these nodes. A node could also be seen as the
area where a child‘s seesaw is supported by a metal pole; either side of the
seesaw can go up and down, but the middle of the board will always stay in the
same place. Again, such a point is known in wave mechanics as a “node ” or a “moment point. ”
Similarly,
the pointy tips or vertices of the Platonic Solids represent the nodes of the
wave. These points are where the least amount of vibration is occurring
throughout the entire sphere.
Consequently,
we will see that in this “stillness ” is great power,
caused by the pressure surrounding the points. These node areas (as well as the
exact center of the sphere) actually have the greatest energetic strength
across the entire surface of the sphere, because the surrounding
higher-pressure zones of vibration will naturally gather up and direct
everything “loose ” in the area back to these low-pressure
zones.
It
is for this very reason that the most number of loose “colloids
” would gather into these nodes in Dr. Jenny‘s experiments. (This is
also the same reason why high-pressure storm clouds will rush into a
low-pressure zone in our atmosphere.)
Since
these nodes exert great force on each other by the laws of vibration, then as
the old saying goes, “the shortest distance between two points is a straight
line. ” So, straight lines of force are naturally
formed between these nodes once they are created, and when you see all the
lines combined together, the geometric object emerges - just like
connect-the-dots.
The
last terms from wave mechanics that we need to introduce at this time are
“moving wave ” and “standing wave. ” (The terms “dynamic ” or “propagating ” for the moving wave and “static
” for the standing wave are also used.)
This
is quite self-explanatory - a moving wave moves through space, where a standing
wave stands still as it vibrates. So, if we have a sphere of fluid that remains
stationary and has a geometric stress pattern of vibration inside of it, that
geometry is referred to as a “standing wave. ”
Once
we think in these terms, it becomes easy to put the model together - it is
based on simple, known physical principles of vibrating fluid, and the
quasi-solid “stresses ” that can be formed inside of it by vibration.
MATCHING UP GEOMETRIC FORMS TO THE “DENSITIES
”
Now
if we think back to the idea that there is an Octave of aetheric densities in
the Universe, we can see that these densities have color, sound and geometric
components.
This
is perhaps the most frequently studied connection that was explored by the
inheritors of the ancient mysteries, long after they had lost track of the full
scope of scientific knowledge that was behind it.
So,
one early puzzle that we worked on from 1996 to 1998 was, “How do we assign a
geometric shape to each of the seven major densities, since there are only five
Platonic Solids and the sphere to work with? ”
We
do not need eight shapes, as the ancient traditions tell us that the sphere
exists both at the beginning and the end of the Octave. Similarly, in the
Octave of sound, any note that is an octave higher than another note will sound
the same, just in a different register - a higher or lower octave.
Mathematically,
any musical note that is an octave higher than another note will have exactly
twice as many cycles per second - so “A ” at 440 cycles per second will again
become “A ” when it gets to 880 cycles per second.
So
where is the seventh shape? The answer was found in the “religious myths ” of
the ancient Vedic scriptures from India, the remnants of the Rama empire, as
told in Robert Lawlor‘s invaluable book Sacred Geometry.
The
Hindus, or their contacts, supplied the answer by supplying us with one of the
Platonic Solids twice. Just as the sphere appears twice, at
the beginning and end of the octave, so does its closest harmonic partner, the
icosahedron, located at the second and seventh density levels.
For
the rich, mystical culture of the ancient Vedic texts, with the full
cooperation of extradimensional entities flying about in fabulous vimanas, the
icosahedron shape was actually turned into a god. They named him Purusha, and
in the seventh dimension, or density, he represents the masculine force in the
universe.
Figure 3.2 - The icosahedron, known as the masculine god “Purusha ” to the ancient Rama empire.
As
we just said, Purusha also shows up as the first shape for the sphere to
crystallize into when we are at the beginning of the spectrum.
Therefore,
the One, being a manifestation of all conscious entities, must crystallize down
into the world of form as Purusha, and any entity must again attain the level
of Purusha to return to the One at the end of the cycle.
The
next image from Lawlor‘s Sacred Geometry shows how you would draw an
icosahedron in two dimensions, using a compass and straightedge.
Figure 3.3 - The icosahedron, as drawn in two dimensions with a compass
and straightedge. (From Sacred Geometry)
Before
we assert that the Hindu culture was sexist and male-driven, assigning
masculinity to all the best spiritual forces in life, realize that there is a
yin to our yang. The universal feminine force is referred to as Prakriti, and
is identified as the dodecahedron, or the sixth density.
Figure 3.4 - The dodecahedron, known as the feminine goddess “Prakriti ” to the ancient Rama empire. (From Sacred
Geometry)
In
fact, it appears that each density can be considered as having either “male ” or “female ” qualities, the second being female,
third male, fourth female, fifth male, et cetera. Let us not forget that the
Oneness is a combination of both genders in Unity.
Thus,
as Purusha starts as female in the second density, we see that it is, indeed, a
father / mother god, also encompassing the feminine, or Prakriti archetype
within itself. Once we read further into the design and understand the
metaphysical and spiritual properties of the dimensions, their “genders ” will make tremendously good sense.
Other
than the sphere, we can see that Purusha and Prakriti are the two highest
shapes in the spectrum, so it makes sense, in some way, that these two shapes
themselves could have been personified as gods and goddesses. These higher
realms are clearly something we can aspire to, and these are, essentially,
conscious shapes.
Our
own home is currently in shape number 3. This, the octahedron, is the vibratory
level that provides the invisible background framework for the energy that all
of our atoms and molecules are created from.
Rod
Johnson, whose sacred geometry model of quantum physics covered in Volume III,
has asserted that the massless "neutrinos" that have been observed in
the laboratory could well be octahedrons.
However,
more often than not these vibrations would remain undetectable, as they are
only the underlying framework of reality, not the actual reality itself. When
you look at a finished skyscraper, you don't see the I-beams.
Similarly,
we don't see the "zero-point energy" that creates "virtual particles"
of protons, neutrons and electrons which constantly wink in and out of
existence, but yet we know that it must exist.
Therefore,
the ancient physics would teach us that this shape represents the fundamental
background for all matter in our "density."
This
is the forgotten ancient teaching. It is important to realize that this is only
a general rule, as within our own density we see evidence of all the Platonic
Solids, representing the different “sub-densities. ”
We need all of them in place to be able to build physical matter - but the
strongest one in third-density is the octahedron.
Figure 3.5 - The octahedron, which is the underlying geometry of our own
“third density. ”
To
look at just the top half of an octahedron, we can easily see that it is
identical to the shape of the Egyptian Great Pyramid. With the full physics
model in place, this simple fact will clearly illustrate that all pyramids were
designed in order to be able to focus this geometric energy of the aether, much
as would a funnel direct a flow of water.
As
we will see later in this volume, the “torsion fields ” on the Earth can vary
from place to place far more than the normal “push ” of gravity or of the Earth‘s
magnetic field, and in the Russian lingo, any pyramid acts as a “passive
torsion generator. ”
Matter
itself behaves like a vibrating sponge that is submerged in water, with
fluidlike energy continually flowing in and out of it with a pulsating motion.
When
you clump matter together into a single structure, the shape of that structure
will determine how the aether “currents ” flow through
it. Any cylinder or cone-shaped object will harness and focalize
torsion fields, as we have extensively documented in Volume III.
There
are always torsion fields coming out of the Earth in spirals, and the cone
shape can direct and focus these fields. Let us not forget that these fields
are composed of intelligent energy, so one major benefit of harnessing these
fields is that they will dramatically enhance your physical health as well as
your spiritual consciousness in a short time.
Hence,
the ancient Egyptians referred to the pyramids as “temples of initiation. ” And we know that the Greek word “Pyramid
” is a conjunction of the words “Pyre ” and “Amid, ” meaning “Fire in
the Middle. ” This “fire in the middle ” represents
the energy fields that are harnessed inside the Pyramid - hence the name itself
conceals part of the secret.
In
essence, with the proper science in place, we realize that the Great Pyramid of
Gizeh, the most precisely constructed pyramid on Earth, is a fantastic machine,
fashioned with a technology that is far more advanced than our present
scientific level of understanding.
The
reason why is that this is a technology of
consciousness, working off of a physics model that we are only just now
rediscovering in the public arena. And the more that we examine the Pyramid,
the more that we can see how accurate and comprehensive the ancient knowledge
that went into it must be.
It
is an established, longstanding fact that if you take the difference between
the base and height measurements of the Pyramid, the pi ratio of 3.14159 is expressed.
This
means that you could draw a circle from one corner, over the top and down to
the opposite corner, and that circle would perfectly touch all three points.
Then, all we have to do is think in three dimensions,
and we will quickly discover that the Pyramid mathematically fits perfectly
within a half-sphere.
Figure 3.6 - The Great Pyramid fits perfectly within a
half-sphere, as pictured.
So,
in a very direct fashion, the pyramid structure forms “resonance
” with the aether, causing a sphere of unseen energy to form around
itself just like this.
Remember
that the strongest geometric energy structure of our own dimension, if we could
see it, would look exactly like this. Thus, the Pyramid was not only a
geometric object, it was literally built as a giant, solidified “consciousness
unit. ”
On
one level, we could think of it as a giant statue in honor of the energy
density that we now inhabit - but it is also a very potent machine. We have
also been told by Ra that it was far more effective when it was first built
than it is now, due to the changing positions of the Earth and the
deterioration of its stone faces.
Many
Pyramidologists have pointed out that the outside of the Great Pyramid
expresses the exact length of an Earth year, 365.2422, in many different
measurements. Since scholars understand that the Pyramid perfectly fits into a
half-sphere, many have concluded that the Pyramid is designed to represent the
Earth.
But
that wouldn't explain why the pyramid builders didn‘t simply erect a globe, especially with the apparent technology that they had
at their disposal to precisely position such huge stones. It is only now that
we can see why the octahedral form was chosen in order to do this.
Though
we cannot see the Pyramid as a crystal now, it is a well-known fact in
Egyptological circles that when the Pyramid was first built, it was entirely
covered on the outside with casing stones.
These
were made of white Tura limestone that was precisely mirror-polished to a
glowing sheen (Lemesurier, 1977.) It was so bright in daylight as to be
blinding, hence the ancient Egyptians named it “Ta Khut, ”
or “The Light. ”
It
would be very easy to conclude that it was not built by primitive human beings
when seen in this original form. In the next picture below, we see the remnants
of these stones that still exist along the bottom.
Figure 3.7 - Casing stones that still exist along the
base perimeter of the Great Pyramid.
What
is not often known is that the spaces in between these casing stones were only
1/100th of an inch wide (Lemesurier, Hoagland.)
For
comparison, the best that modern technology could do to align the heat shield
tiles on the Space Shuttle was one thirtieth of an inch tolerance (Hoagland.)
This puts the fashioning of the casing stones on the level of optical
precision; something we would normally only use for extremely sensitive pieces
of equipment.
All
of this precision was used to make it that much more effective as a “machine ” that harnessed torsion fields.
Furthermore,
in these incredibly tight spaces between casing stones, so tight that a knife
blade cannot be pushed into them, there is an impossibly thin layer of “cement ” holding them together. This “cement
” is so strong that to strike the joint with a sledgehammer, the
limestone itself breaks before the “cement ” does.
Still
to this day, no one has provided a satisfactory explanation for how this could
have been done. It certainly appears that the stones themselves were fused in
place, and thus it wasn‘t cement at all, but a product of extreme heat, melting
the two stones together.
So
how did they get the heat? A laser, perhaps? Or was it
focused consciousness, transforming the matter phase of conscious limestone
molecules?
Ra's
explanations start to make more and more sense to us as we go along, as in
their model, they were able to use consciousness to visualize how they wanted
the stones to arrange themselves, and their visualizations would then become
reality.
To
summarize, then, the outside of the Pyramid was fashioned with an optical
precision that is only now matched by the type of work that we would do on a
mirror lens for a reflecting telescope (Hoagland.)
We
must then picture a giant pyramid built out of four mirrors, so
bright in the daylight as to be almost blinding. Again, it is no wonder that
ancient Egyptians referred to it as “Ta Khut, ” or The
Light.
When
it was in its true crystal state, there could be no doubt that it was not built
by the humans of the time; it would be a most totally alien-looking structure.
We
can only imagine its original appearance now, as earthquakes jarred most of the
casing stones loose in the early years of the first millennium AD, and these
perfect white stones were then hauled off to build mosques in Cairo.
Thus
we can only measure the original design of the casing stones from the few that
remain along the bottom, still intact. The top of the second pyramid also has
some casing stones still remaining.
Figure 3.8 - Top-down view of second pyramid on the
Giza plateau, showing casing stones at top.
This
almost insane degree of precision starts to make a lot more sense when we
realize what energies might be able to be harnessed by the building of such a
structure.
These
energies would not be cold and lifeless like electricity; instead, they would
represent conscious energy, and could thus be directed by a conscious human
being, once trained.
The
author‘s own sources, along with Ra and the Cayce readings, indicate that a
person well trained in directing this energy could rejuvenate dying bodies to
extreme youth and vitality, travel in time and levitate massive objects with
ease.
Furthermore,
it helped to stabilize the Earth on its axis, decrease severe weather and
earthquakes in the surrounding area, heal and normalize the mind, purify water,
create usable energy and eliminate leftover radiation from nuclear battles in
much shorter amounts of time.
The
more we learn about the science that is involved, the more obvious this will
become - and the greater of a desire we will have to rebuild a worldwide
network of pyramids once again to heal the earth of the present damages that we
are creating.
Indeed,
Ra tells us that the Pyramid was a giant gift that they produced for our
civilization, a gift whose primary purpose centered on providing a temple for
initiation while also functioning as an effective balancing agent for the
Earth‘s energy fields.
Having
a “temple of initiation ” meant that higher-level energies could be harnessed
and integrated into the physical and nonphysical bodies of the human seeker,
and the full soul evolution progress through the spectrum of seven densities
could then be made while still on Earth.
This
was a very rigorous and terrifying process, as one essentially confronts all of
the “distortions ” of the personality self at once, in
what amounts to a subjectively long-lasting nightmare.
A
trained healer, who can travel with the person out-of-body while they go on
this journey, was always present for this work to be done, since the fear alone
could cause the person to lose track of the physical body and thereby die.
If
the initiation was successful, then after such a progressive evolution is
complete, that entity would have access to all the power of the entire octave
of dimensions, becoming like a god and having Christlike abilities, if it
decided not to leave the Earth.
One
reason that the inheritors of the Atlantean Mysteries felt that they had to
keep the knowledge a secret is that they felt that if a negatively-polarized
person made sufficient progress in the Pyramid, they could become a very
powerful force of evil on Earth - even though it appears that this would not
truly be possible, since the negative path cannot sustain itself above the
fifth density.
It
should be no surprise that mystical tradition long holds that Jesus also
completed a Pyramidal initiation in such a manner, and might well have been the
only person coming in well equipped enough to actually complete the process in
full.
According
to the Edgar Cayce readings, Jesus enjoyed a former lifetime as Hermes, the
co-designer of the Pyramid with the priest Ra-Ta, who later reincarnated as
Cayce himself. Thus, it appears that Jesus later utilized the very piece of
technology that he originally helped to build, in order to complete his own
initiation.
As
we will see in the end of the book, the Pyramid actually wrote Jesus‘ arrival directly into a timeline based on a geometric
and numeric code built into the design of the chambers and passages inside.
The
prophetic statement of this Messianic arrival occurs at the moment where the
narrow Ascending Passage suddenly heightens tremendously into the Grand
Gallery. This particular event in the Pyramid symbolism is arguably one of the
single most powerful symbolic events of the entire span of time given.
Obviously
Jesus knew, even as he helped design this incredible structure, what he would
later use it for in future lifetimes.
If
the pyramid shape is a basic product of understanding a more advanced physics
than we are now using, then we would expect that the technology would be
discovered by any civilized society on any inhabited planet.
In
1981, Ra said that Mars is the only remaining planet in our Solar System that
had third-dimensional humanoid life like ourselves in any recent past. And in
the late 1980's, Richard Hoagland‘s work began to be more widely known, which
did indeed reveal the remnants of just such a civilization.
From
Hoagland and others' data regarding Mars, we see that the largest and easiest
pyramid to identify in the Viking-photographed Cydonia region of Mars is
five-sided, almost precisely duplicating the top of an icosahedron, or the
Hindu god Purusha, if we remember.
Near
this five-sided pyramid is a city complex of slightly smaller pyramids that
appear identical to those we see in Egypt.
In
addition, the Mariner-photographed Elysium pyramids on Mars are clearly in the
form of tetrahedrons, and Carl Munck, whom we will meet in later chapters,
demonstrates a North American Earth mound in the form of a tetrahedron in his
book The Code, available from the Laura Lee Online Bookstore.
Furthermore,
Hoagland and others have written of spherical glass domes on the Moon, which
might well serve the same purpose in harnessing torsion fields, holding in an
atmosphere and providing a clear view of “outer space. ”
Our
own ex-NASA astrophysicist Maurice Chatelain, whom we also shall discuss in
later chapters, came forward in 1995 with the shattering revelation that NASA
had found "geometric ruins of unknown origin" on the Moon during the
Mariner and Apollo missions.
More
recently, similar testimony was given at the Disclosure Project conferences,
starting on May 9, 2001 - and we attended the May 10 event and personally
interviewed the witness.
GEOMETRIC ENERGY TRANSITIONS
Our
next question is, “How do we naturally map out the transitions from one
geometric energy frequency to the next? ” Through a
moderately complex set of procedures, one can demonstrate how each geometric
form will naturally “grow ” out of the one before it.
To
begin with, the sphere into the icosahedron is relatively obvious - the
movement of formless Unity into geometric form - so there is no real modeling
to be done. The second-density icosahedron into the third-density octahedron
will be clearly modeled in Volume II.
In
order to turn our own octahedron into the shape of the 4th dimension,
all that is required is to expand each face into a basic four-sided
triangle, or tetrahedron. In our diagram here, we conceptualize it as if you
were going to place a tetrahedron onto each face separately.
Figure 3.8 - The transition of the octahedron (L) into
the star tetrahedron (R).
Each
face on the octahedron, which is in the form of an equilateral triangle,
(composed entirely of 60-degree internal angles, with each side the same
length,) becomes one three-sided tip of a star tetrahedron.
As
the octahedron has eight sides, you would then need to add eight tetrahedra to
its faces. To animate this progression like a cartoon, it would appear that the
octahedron was suddenly blooming like a flower; the faces suddenly sprout
upwards as the tetrahedra rise into position.
[Compare the diagram here with the
original harmonic table in order to help visualize this. The top right shape in
the diagram shows where one of the eight tetrahedra would be, in terms of
position, if it were not attached directly to the octahedron.]
In
order to then progress from the fourth dimension to the fifth, you can look at
the diagram and easily see how a simple connect-the-dots on the edge points of
the star tetrahedron forms the cube.
To
go from the fifth-dimensional cube to the sixth-dimensional dodecahedron, a
further outward expansion is required, where each face of the cube sprouts an
inward-slanting "rooftop" in order to turn into the dodecahedron.
The
"roof" shape that appears is most easily seen in the rectangular area
below, whereas the square area would be more akin to an overhead view.
Figure 3.9 - The cube‘s “nested ”
position within the dodecahedron.
Then,
if you put a dot in the center of each pentagon on the dodecahedron and connect
all of the dots together, you will have a series of lines that form
five-pointed stars that create the icosahedron shape, the last major node
before the return to the Sphere.
In
short, going back to our original harmonic table again, we can see how the
entire progression is a sphere, or a Oneness, expanding into the “seed ” or fundamental form of the icosahedron, which then by
its structure gives rise to all of the other forms contained therein (Lawlor,
1982.)
The
"seed" aspect of the icosahedron is why the Hindus associated it with
a male god - they were using the metaphor of the semen, or "seed of
life."
Figure 3.10 - The full hierarchy of geometric shapes
that represent the Octave of densities, L-R
What
we have here is an understanding of the fact that the shapes formed by these
energy vibrations can grow, much in the way that crystals grow.
ALL IS ONE
We
shall briefly cover another point that has been a major source of confusion to
those reading this book, and attempt to break it down into simpler terms in
this revised edition.
If
you still find it difficult to understand, just be reminded that it isn‘t an
essential point that is needed to understand the physics.
In
order for the Universe to truly be One, there must be
a level where there is no space and no time - where All is Here and Now.
Sources
such as “Seth ” through Jane Roberts tell us that
nothing in the Universe really ‘exists,‘ including the aether itself - that all
the Universe is expanding and contracting from a single point of Oneness in
each and every moment.
So,
the many tiny “field bubbles ” that make up the
fluidlike aether appear to flow around each other when we study their behavior.
On
one level, this is indeed true, as the experiments of Dr. Nikolai Kozyrev,
Nikola Tesla and others have demonstrated, which we
will cover in Volume III.
On
another level, we must remember that the amplitude of the spherical wave shows
us that the “zero point ” of the wave is indeed right
in the center, meaning that the wave itself is constantly expanding and
collapsing from a single point.
Think
of a balloon that is constantly inflating and deflating from a very tiny point
to a very large sphere. At the highest level of vibration, all of the energy in
the sphere is contained within the central point.
Though
this does seem confusing, various sources such as Seth and Ra tell us that all
of those single points are actually joined together in Oneness - that there is
only one single point that all is emanating from. This is another way that we
can understand that we do have a perfect “spark ” of
the One Infinite Creator within ourselves.
If
this is true, and we have every reason to believe that it is, then each of the
geometric shapes that we have discussed must be continually present, at their
own frequency, in every “consciousness unit ” or field
bubble in the entire Universe.
Roughly
speaking, every energy form is pulsating from a point, through the icosahedron,
into the octahedron, to the star tetrahedron, to the cube, to the dodecahedron,
again to the icosahedron, and again back into the sphere or point once more.
This
is the only way we can explain that Seth would tell us, loosely paraphrased,
that “your entire reality system is “off ” as much as
it is “on, ” and you simply do not vibrate quickly enough to see what is in
between the gaps. ”
Another
analogy that we have used is the idea of a filmstrip. The actual filmstrip in a
movie camera is a series of still pictures that are separated from each other,
but when we watch them fast enough, they form “moving pictures, ” or “movies. ”
So,
the spherical energy that forms the Universe itself could be seen to vibrate
through all the different shapes at mind-numbing speeds, forever expanding from
a single point out to form the boundaries of space and time as we know it and
then compressing back into that space yet again just as quickly.
Although
it seems almost impossible to conceive of our entire universe as crumpling up
into a single point over and over again at speeds too fast to measure, this is
exactly what is happening, say sources such as Ra.
Since
all of physical reality is ultimately nothing but conscious energy in
vibration, each density would then have the illusion of only existing at one
level in this energetic system.
In
fact, all of the densities are interpenetrable, and the vibrations from higher
densities will exert measurable stresses in space and time here in the third.
Among other things, this forms the basis for the Global Grid, which we will
examine in future chapters.
CHAPTER 04: THE BREATH OF THE DIVINE AND SUPERSTRING THEORY
This author‘s first understanding of this pulsating movement of aether known as
the “Breath of the Divine ” or “Breath of the Compassionate ” came from a
passage that fellow researcher Joe Mason (www.greatdreams.com) read him out of
a book on the first night that they shared information, November 9-10, 1996.
This
conversation directly led to Wilcock‘s first telepathic breakthrough to Higher
Intelligence the next morning, which started an entirely new life as the “veil ” was lifted. Mason graciously supplied us with these
next two paragraphs to illustrate the example of this geometric breath that he
uncovered.
The
late Walter Russell, who was an artist and scientist located in Waynesboro,
Virginia, had a published reading on pg. 165 in the book “Channeling
” by John Klimo.
Russell
claimed that the messages came from “God, ” and that
they gave him an understanding of how the basic universal forces of
electromagnetism, gravity, and atomic energy really operate. Let‘s hear what
God has to say, from an excerpt first published in 1947:
“In My universe there is but one form
from which all forms appear. That one form is the pulsing cube-sphere, two
halves of the heartbeat of My dual thinking.
All forms pulse, therefore, all forms are
two, one form for the inbreathing pulse, which generates, and one for the
outbreathing, radiating one.
The cube is the sphere expanded by the
outward breath to black rest in cold space, and the sphere is the cube
compressed to the incandescence of white-hot suns by the inward breath. ”
Walter
Russell was clearly way ahead of his time, as in the early 20th century he
experienced 39 days of “illumination ” where he could
see how the Universe really worked.
Many
students of Russell‘s work are delighted to see that we have continued along
similar lines, drawing upon many new findings that were not available at his
time, and we attended his surviving organization‘s “Metascience and Cosmic
Consciousness ” conference in 2000. The website for this group, the University
of Science and Philosophy, is www.philosophy.org.
The
author is also happy to have met John Klimo, the author of the book “Channeling, ” in 2002 at the US Psychotronics Association conference,
where Wilcock was a well-received speaker and workshop presenter. Klimo has
recently done a dramatic revision and updating of this classic text, still
often considered to be required reading for those who wish to learn about channeling.
If
we examine the above excerpt, we again have the psychic suggestion that the
entire Universe is continually pulsating from the spherical "incandescence
of white-hot suns" to the cubical "black rest of cold space."
Although
this particular passage does not intimate the speed with which this pulsation
is occurring, sources such as Seth and Ra fill in the gaps. And therefore, from
this little-known psychic source from the early to mid-twentieth century, we
have another contact with a Higher Intelligence that was attempting to reveal
to us the hidden harmonic code of the progression of densities.
The
quote above expresses the heart of the story, without going into all the
technical detail regarding the different shapes making up the Octave.
The
Ra contact did not name the actual shapes either, as they explained that it is
very difficult for them to use words that are not already stored within the
channel's conscious or subconscious mind.
Looking
at Russell's quote, we can see that even without the extra geometries added in,
there are very close similarities to the Hindu story of Purusha and Prakriti.
Again, we have the masculine and feminine forces dancing in an eternal
pulsating rhythm with each other, representing what Russell's source called the
“two halves of the heartbeat of My dual thinking. ”
(It
is important to point out that some of Russell‘s diagrams, such as in the book Atomic Suicide?, do
show the other Platonic Solids as well.)
An
even more direct example of this energetic behavior comes from the highly
respected book The Seth
Material, brought through by Jane Roberts in 1971.
Roberts
claimed to be in contact with an entity who called
itself Seth and said that it was from the fifth dimension. In The Seth Material
there is ample evidence given for Seth's high intelligence and capabilities, as
he could perform psychic "parlor tricks" such as reading the contents
in sealed envelopes, and at one point he also led a very high-level
philosophical discussion with a tenacious college professor who was determined
to "debunk" the contact.
The
professor repeatedly referred to ancient metaphors and abstract philosophical
concepts that only a graduate philosophy student would have known, and Seth was
consistently aware of exactly where the professor was going and provided quite
the intellectual challenge point-for-point.
Furthermore,
at various times Seth was actually capable of creating visual holographic
images of himself or other related phenomena, as well as being able to alter
the consciousness of others in the room to a trance-like state if he so chose.
In
The Seth Material, a picture of Seth is drawn as he appeared in apparition form
in front of one of Roberts' friends during a session. The large bald head and
black eyes is almost stunningly reminiscent of the Grey features that would
become so commonplace more than 15 years later, with the advent of “Communion ” by Whitley Strieber.
Figure 4.1 - The appearance of “Seth
” in 1969 as seen by an associate of Jane Roberts.
Again,
this apparition was an actual visual manifestation that occurred in the room
during one of Jane Roberts' trances, as the reading itself talked them through
the experience.
While
Robert Butts continued to transcribe Seth's words, William Cameron Macdonnel
sketched the entity. Seth later commented that the head Bill had drawn was too
tall, and lowering the height of the skull would only make the apparition look
even more like a typical Gray - though this was way before such images were
popular. Says Seth, in our quote from Jane Roberts' book:
"[This picture] represents the
appearance that these abilities of mine take on when closely connected with the
physical plane. This does not necessarily mean that in all planes I have the
same image. It is the first such representation of me, and I am quite fond of
it..."
[Note: Roberts then includes the
following information:]
...Seth explained that the apparition's
appearance was distorted by Bill's own ideas, though. The high forehead
represented Bill's interpretation of great intelligence, for example. Bill
interpreted the available data in his own way: this was the Seth that Bill saw,
regardless of Seth's own appearance.
Now,
this enigmatic image has filtered its way through the collective consciousness
of humanity, largely through the efforts of Whitley Strieber and his
groundbreaking work “Communion. ”
It
is quite stunning to realize that at the time that this apparition was first seen
in 1969, the "Summer of Love," almost no one was aware of this facial
morphology as being related to extraterrestrials.
Now,
were the event to have happened again, Seth would
probably look even more like a typical Gray than he did here, due to the effect
that a human's perception has on the actual image itself.
The
most extraordinary aspect of this body of material is that Seth dictated a
number of full-length books from 1971 to the mid-1980‘s, entirely through the
repeated sessions with Jane Roberts and her husband Robert Butts.
Even
if Jane left the Seth work for months at a time and never read the transcripts
of any of the sessions, Seth would pick up right where he left off as soon as
she went back into trance.
There
may not be a single other contact yet that has generated entire books, with
themes that build up from chapter to chapter, through psychic readings in such
a reliable and consistent fashion.
Seth
identifies himself to us as a male entity, and the material does not have the
rigid scientific and linguistic structure of the Law of One / Ra Material.
Being a full level of density lower than Ra, Seth has much more creative
license to use an entertaining dry wit in his writing.
The
Seth books are practically unparalleled, in terms of the strength and accuracy
of a fifth-dimensional contact.
Again,
contacts such as the Cayce Readings and the Ra Material do originate from even
higher levels such as 6,7 and even the Akasha, or the
Octave, but the Seth Material is definitely in a league by itself with its
crystal-clear contact to the fifth density.
Furthermore,
as you study the Law of One series from Ra and learn the characteristics of
fifth-density entities, you can clearly see where Seth's shortcomings lie.
According
to Ra, the fifth-density is focused on wisdom, and the graduation to
sixth-density does not come until pure compassion is fused back together with
that wisdom.
Ra
constantly speaks reverently of the Law of One and the importance of
compassion, whereas it is clear to see that Seth is very deeply involved with
explaining as much of the universal wisdom as he possibly can.
In
our opinion, the “thirst for God ” doesn't seem to be present in the Seth
Material to anywhere near the degree that it is in the Law of One series, and
this certainly could relate to Roberts‘ natural personality, which was
essentially non-religious and skeptical, as opposed to Carla‘s natural
personality, which is very religious and spiritually-driven.
Because
the wisdom of Seth is so vitally essential to understanding our propositions,
we will take a look at two extended sessions that will help us understand
everything we have gone into so far.
As
we read these sessions, it is very important to realize that on the conscious
level, Jane Roberts was by no means schooled enough in science to have been
able to construct such a model of physics on her own, as was the case with
Carla Rueckert.
The
first session that we will investigate is described in The Seth Material as
being the “first time Seth really ‘came through‘ as a
definite other personality, laughing and joking. ” (Pg. 38.)
Seth
used this particular session as a form of encouragement for Jane and Robert to
continue working with him, as Jane had become disillusioned with the
strangeness of what was happening to her and wanted to try to shut it down.
The
contact had originally started through a series of Ouija-board sessions, but as
time went on Jane became more and more aware that whole words and sentences
were coming into her mind very clearly before the pointer ever spelled them
out.
In
the beginning, she was so disconcerted with what was happening to her that she
would pace the room, one hand on her forehead and eyes wide open, as she spoke
for Seth.
Since
this was taking a great toll on Jane's sense of normalcy, she really wanted to
quit, but on this day, “The session so aroused our intellectual and intuitional
curiosity that all thoughts of discontinuing went out the window. ” (Pg. 38.)
Remember
now that Seth is describing how these individual spheres of consciousness are
all interconnected into a unified web, fitting together to form universes.
Let
us also remind the reader that Seth‘s readings on this subject will take on
profound implications when we compare them with the most recent discoveries of
modern physics.
As
we will see in future chapters, Seth clearly was tapping into the truth of “how
things work ” before the physicists began to
understand it. So now, relax and enjoy yourself as we journey through these
mind-bending readings. Any italics are our own:
"Consider a network of wires, a
maze of interlocking wires endlessly constructed so that looking through them
there would seem to be no beginning or end.
Your plane [or density or dimension]
could be likened to a small position between four very spindly wires, and my
plane could be likened to the small position in the neighboring wires on the
other side.
Not only are we on different sides of
the same wires, but we are at the same time above or below, according to your
viewpoint.
And if you consider the wires as forming cubes -- this is for
you, Joseph*, with your love of images -- then the cubes could also fit one
within the other, without disturbing the inhabitants of either cube one iota.
And these cubes are themselves within
cubes, and I am speaking now only of the small particle of space taken up by
your plane and mine.
[Seth's reference to "cubes"
would be accurate for his own dimension, but in ours it would obviously be the
octahedron. So, he is clearly simplifying the material in order to make his
point.
*Seth referred to Robert as
"Joseph," as apparently where Seth resided, this was Robert's
"true name." Similarly, Jane was assigned a masculine "true
self" name of Ruburt, as we shall see a few paragraphs below.]
Again think in terms of your plane,
bounded by its small spindly set of wires, and my plane on the other side.
These, as I have said, have boundless
solidarity and depth, yet to one side, the other is transparent. You cannot see
through, but the two planes move
through each other constantly.
I hope you see what I have done here. I
have initiated the idea of motion, for true
transparency is not the ability to see through, but to move through.
This is what I mean by fifth dimension.
Now, remove the structure of the wires and cubes.
Things behave as if the wires and cubes
existed, but these were only constructions necessary even to those on my
plane... We
construct images consistent with the senses we happen to have. We merely
construct imaginary lines to walk on.
[Indeed, in coming chapters we will see
this same point made through the work of Bruce Cathie, where he discovered that
the fifth-density cube shape was a Global Grid system that was being used for
navigation by a wide variety of UFOs that were sighted.
Furthermore, Seth's comments reveal to us
that these geometries are not 'real' as we would normally think -- they are
simply a different way of expressing a harmonic frequency of vibrating energy.
The only thing that is truly 'real' is
that One Energy itself, as the lines simply represent stress points in that
energy, where it is more concentrated.]
So real are the wall constructions of
your room that you would freeze in winter without them, yet [in the truest
universal sense] there is no room and there are no walls.
So, in a like manner, the wires that we
constructed are real, though there are no wires. The walls of your room are
transparent to me, though I am not sure I would perform, dear Joseph and
Ruburt, for a party demonstration.
Nevertheless, those walls are
transparent. So are the wires, but for practical purposes we must behave as if
both were there. . . .
Again if you will consider our maze of
wires, I will ask you to imagine them filling up everything that is, with your
plane and my plane like two small bird‘s nests in the nestlike fabric of some
gigantic tree.
Consider that these wires are mobile,
constantly trembling, and also alive, in that they not only carry the stuff of
the universe but are themselves projections of it, and you will see how difficult this is
to explain.
Nor can I blame you for growing tired,
when after asking you to imagine this strange structure, I then insist that you
tear it apart, for it is no more
to be actually seen or touched than is the buzzing of a million invisible bees.
Once
again we are finding consistency in the extraterrestrial reports regarding this
complex harmonic energy structure in the Universe.
So,
as Seth appears almost indistinguishable from the classic image of the Grays,
it is not hard to infer that Seth is giving us a precise description of how
some of our visitors perform their interdimensional travel.
Essentially,
Seth is telling us that they are using these energetic harmonic structures for
navigation, and that they are both formed from and carriers of intelligent
energy at the same time.
Seth
makes it quite clear that the shape he is working with here is the cube, which
corresponds perfectly to his being a fifth-density being, in light of the Vedic
model of geometry.
Obviously,
the other shapes are not mentioned, but as Jane says before the quotation, “We
had no idea that it was actually a highly simplified explanation, cleverly
geared to our own level of understanding at the time. It made a tremendous
impression on us nonetheless. ”
SUPERSTRING THEORY
Further
enhancing the validity of this contact, Seth‘s 1969 essay gives a precise
description of the “Superstring Theory ” of modern
physics, which did not fully come about until the mid-1980‘s.
Dr.
Michio Kaku‘s book Hyperspace is the simplest and most well known resource for
introducing us to this complicated new theory.
Early
along in the book, Kaku mentions that Superstring Theory first came about from
physicists who grappled with a large and fundamental problem in physics, which
we have already touched upon briefly.
That
fundamental problem was the fact that a “photon ” of
light can be clearly shown to possess the properties of a wave, even when our
contemporary models would not provide any background energy in the Universe
that such waves could travel through.
(We
remind the reader that Zero-Point Energy and "aether" theories have
filled this gap, and are becoming more and more widely accepted.)
Explaining
this point in greater detail, Dr. Kaku says,
But if light were a wave, then it would
require something to be ‘waving.‘ Sound waves require
air, water waves require water, but since there is nothing to wave in a vacuum
(though light still travels through it with ease,) we have a paradox. How can
light be a wave if there is nothing to wave?
Again,
the premise of our model is that the “waves ”
themselves are traveling through this fantastic concentration of “background ”
aether energy that exists throughout the Universe.
As
we continue in Hyperspace, Kaku then describes the shock he encountered when
discovering Kaluza-Klein theory, which directly paved the way for an
understanding of what was going on:
Since
the theory was considered to be a wild speculation, it was never taught in
graduate school; so young physicists are left to discover it quite by accident
in their casual readings.
This
alternative theory gave the simplest explanation of light; that it was really a
vibration of the fifth dimension, or what used to be called the fourth
dimension by the mystics.
If
light could travel through a vacuum, it was because the vacuum itself was
vibrating, because the “vacuum ” really existed in
four dimensions of space and one of time. By adding the fifth dimension, the
force of gravity and light could be unified in a startlingly simple way...
So,
it is clear that the Kaluza-Klein theory required there to be some form of
background energy source in the “vacuum. ” Kaku
briefly describes how the Superstring model helped iron out the conceptual
problems that the Kaluza-Klein theory introduced, and after this explanation he
continues (italics added:)
Many of the world‘s leading physicists
now believe that dimensions beyond the usual four of space and time might
exist...
Indeed, many theoretical physicists now
believe that higher dimensions
may be the decisive step in creating a comprehensive theory that unites the
laws of nature; a theory of hyperspace.
If it proves to be correct, then future
historians of science may well record that one of the great conceptual
revolutions in twentieth-century science was the realization that hyperspace may be the key to unlock the
deepest secrets of nature and Creation itself... (pg.
9.)
The
extraterrestrial information strongly favors the idea that these ‘strings‘ are in fact waves of frequency that travel through
the ‘aether,‘ which Russian scientists call “torsion fields. ”
This
is slightly different from Superstring Theory, as Kaku and others would
visualize the universe actually built up solely from these strings. The ancient
Atlantean / Ra model sees the “strings ” as simply
being waves in an aetheric medium.
Later
in the book, Dr. Kaku explains this theory further, pointing out how much it
helps to explain:
String theory answers a series of
puzzling questions about particles, such as why there are so many of them in
nature.
The deeper we probe into the nature of
subatomic particles, the more particles we find. The current “zoo ” of subatomic particles numbers several hundred and
their properties fill entire volumes....
String theory answers this question
because the string, about 100 billion billion times smaller than a proton, is
vibrating; each mode of vibration represents a distinct resonance or particle.
The string is so incredibly tiny that,
from a distance, a resonance of a string and a particle are indistinguishable.
Only when we somehow magnify the particle can we see that it is not a point at
all, but a mode of a vibrating string.
In this picture, each subatomic particle
corresponds to a distinct resonance that vibrates only at a distinct frequency.
Essentially,
in this above passage, we can clearly see that when Seth says, “Consider that
these wires are mobile, constantly trembling, and also alive, ” he was giving
an even more complete hyperdimensional model that was about fifteen years ahead
of this cutting-edge modern physics theory, which Kaku describes as “21st
century physics dropped into the hands of the 20th century. ”
Plus,
Seth was speaking through Jane Roberts, who was by no means a physicist and
obviously had not the slightest clue that the obscure foundation of
Kaluza-Klein theory ever existed.
Although
the foundations of Superstring Theory certainly aid tremendously in
legitimizing the Octave model of energy densities or dimensions, we still have
a problem, in that Kaku‘s book clearly states that the physicists have
mathematically “proven ” that there have to be at least 10, and possibly 26
dimensions in the universe.
Ra
and other sources insist that all of the dimensions are unified as an Octave of
eight densities of vibrating “intelligent energy, ” and
therefore the 10-dimensional model is just a bit too high. But before we
dismiss Ra's words as disproven, we must look carefully, as this number shows
up in quite directly Kaku‘s book as well.
Thus, in the next chapter we will uncover the
impossible -- a direct connection between the physics work of Dr. Kaku and our
metaphysical idea of the dimensions being structured in an octave form.
Many, many psychic sources including Cayce, Ra and
Scallion are unanimous in stating this, including Wilcock‘s own, before he was
even aware of what exactly he was being told.
What should impress us even more will be that
Srinivasa Ramanujan, the mathematician whose equations set the entire model for
modern “string theory, ” was apparently using quite
similar mystical techniques to those of Seth, Ra and others to gain his
findings.
Even though such techniques might seem to be
completely scientifically unacceptable, no one in mainstream science can deny
the outstanding importance of Ramanujan‘s mathematical concepts.
Although his findings were embraced, no further
research was done to determine how he came about receiving them in his trance
states. Therefore, we will refer to Ramanujan, this enigmatic figure, as the
“Edgar Cayce of Physics. ”
CHAPTER 05:
SCIENTIFIC ARGUMENTS FOR AN OCTAVE OF DIMENSIONS
In Hyperspace, Dr. Kaku
describes the life of an enterprising young mathematician from India known as
Srinivasa Ramanujan.
The equations that Ramanujan came up
with are still considered to be the most important parts of creating a model
for the higher dimensions, including how many dimensions there must be.
If the Octave model of Ra and the
ancient mystery schools is indeed accurate, then the best mathematical proof we
could ever hope to find would be if Ramanujan‘s equations also added up to
there being eight dimensions - and this is exactly what we find.
Remember, now, that Ramanujan is
from India, and this is the country where all the Vedic texts were written, as
it was the original host to the Rama Empire.
Let us also remember that the
ancient texts have already given us a solution for the puzzle of how we can
integrate five Platonic Solids and the sphere into an Octave of eight
geometries.
The mystery only deepens when we
learn how Ramanujan got his information: as Kaku writes, “Ramanujan used to say
that the goddess of Namakkal inspired him with the formulae in dreams. ”
In Hyperspace, Dr. Kaku states the
following about this exceptional man. It is not important for us to understand
every term that Kaku uses, just the overall message that he is giving us about
what Ramanujan discovered:
Srinivasa Ramanujan was the strangest man in all of
mathematics, probably in the entire history of science. He has been compared to
a bursting supernova, illuminating the darkest, most profound corners of
mathematics, before being tragically struck down by tuberculosis at the age of
33, like Riemann before him.
Working
in total isolation from the main currents of his field, he was able to rederive
100 years‘ worth of Western mathematics on his own.
The tragedy of his life is that much of his work was wasted rediscovering known
mathematics.
Scattered
throughout the obscure equations in his notebooks are these modular functions,
which are among the strangest ever found...
In
the work of Ramanujan, [i.e. the modular functions,] the number 24 (8 x 3)
appears repeatedly. This is an example of what mathematicians call magic
numbers, which continually appear where we least expect them, for reasons that
no one understands.
Miraculously,
Ramanujan‘s function also appears in string theory... In string theory, each of
the 24 modes in the Ramanujan function corresponds to a physical vibration of
the string...
When
the Ramanujan function is generalized, the number 24 is replaced by the number
8. Thus, the critical number for the superstring is 8 + 2, or 10. This is the
origin of the tenth dimension.
The
string vibrates in ten dimensions because it requires these generalized
Ramanujan functions (based on the number 8) in order to remain self-consistent.
In other words, physicists have not the slightest understanding of why ten and
26 dimensions are singled out as the dimension of the string.
[Now
read the next sentence carefully, and remember that this is being spoken by a
highly regarded mainstream scientific authority figure:]
It‘s
as though there is some kind of deep numerology being manifested in these
functions that no one understands...
In
the final analysis, the origin of the ten-dimensional theory is as mysterious
as Ramanujan himself. When asked by audiences why nature might exist in ten
dimensions, physicists are forced to answer, “We don‘t know. ” [emphasis added]
As we progress, we will explain why
modern physicists have added two more dimensions to Ramanujan‘s elegant
eight-dimensional model. But for now we will continue exploring this
front-runner of future science.
After years of seclusion, Ramanujan
was finally able to get some attention in the Western world regarding his
abilities. This came about through a letter that Ramanujan wrote, which found
its way to “the brilliant Cambridge mathematician Godfrey H. Hardy. ”
...The letter from the poor Madras clerk contained
theorems that were totally unknown to Western mathematicians. In all, it
contained 120 theorems.
Hardy
was stunned. He recalled that proving some of these theorems ‘defeated me
completely.‘ He recalled, “I had never seen
anything in the least like them before. A single look at them is enough to show
that they could only be written down by a mathematician of the highest class.
[Interestingly,
the number 120 is very fundamental to harmonic theory, as it represents a
musical frequency or vibration. It is very possible that all 120 are important
for a unified model, such was the way that Ramanujan‘s mind worked.
Since
the aether‘s behavior is entirely based on vibration, it is not surprising to
see that Ramanujan had 120 theorems in his letter - as this number has many,
many divisors, and thus there is a great deal of ‘vibration‘ within the number
- which we will explain in later chapters.]
Kaku then describes how the
Cambridge mathematician Hardy and Ramanujan began working together, and then
says,
Unfortunately, neither Hardy nor Ramanujan seemed
interested in the psychology or thinking process by which Ramanujan discovered
these incredible theorems, especially when this flood of material came pouring
out of his “dreams ” with such frequency.
Hardy
noted, “It seemed ridiculous to worry him about how he had found this or
that known theorem, when he was showing me half a dozen new ones almost every
day." [emphasis added]
Kaku then describes a scene that
took place between Hardy and Ramanujan, which to the metaphysical reader seems
to be a classic case of psychic power.
Hardy vividly recalled, “I remember going to see him
once when he was lying ill in Putney. I had ridden in taxi-cab No. 1729, and
remarked that the number seemed to be rather a dull one, and that I hoped that
it was not an unfavorable omen.
“No, ” he replied, “it is a very interesting number; it is the
smallest number expressible as a sum of two cubes in two different ways. ”
(It
is the sum of 1x1x1 and 12x12x12, and also the sum of 9x9x9 and 10x10x10.)
On
the spot, he could recite complex theorems in arithmetic that would require a
modern computer to prove.
[It
is quite interesting to note here that 9 and 12 are the fundamental numbers
that we will keep working with in the frequency cycles of our harmonic
Universe.]
INTUITIVE BURNOUT
In the next paragraph, we receive
information about Ramanujan's health. At first, our inclusion of this
information may seem tangential and unrelated to the point, but actually it is
not.
It seems that for a person to work
with these higher psychic energies, they need to be extremely well grounded.
The work can take a tremendous toll on their lives, even leading to death.
Always in poor health, the austerity of the war-torn
British economy prevented Ramanujan from maintaining his strict vegetarian
diet, and he was constantly in and out of sanitariums.
After
collaborating with Hardy for 3 years, Ramanujan fell ill and never recovered.
World War I interrupted travel between England and India, and in 1919 he
finally managed to return home, where he died a year later. (Pg.
176.)
The story of the death of Ramanujan
does closely parallel the story of many psychics. It is quite common in
abduction literature, Eastern mystical arts and psychic circles for vegetarian
diets to be a necessary component to achieving contact with higher dimensions.
The author‘s own Higher Self insists
upon this, and in the case of the “awakening ” of well-known psychic Gordon
Michael Scallion, he suddenly found that could not eat the foods outside of the
diet without getting violently, physically ill.
The extraterrestrials working with
Whitley Strieber told him in the book Transformation that he would physically
die if he didn‘t follow the diet that he was given, which centered around the need to give up refined sugar.
In fact, in We,
The Arcturians, a series of channeled works by Dr. Norma Milanovich that
closely parallels the material in the Seth and Ra books, we find this same
information:
The physical bodies need to be tuned occasionally and
we find this is the weakest of all three areas. In humans this is sometimes the
most abused body also.
We
see that your ingestion process includes many items that do not quicken the
vibration, but instead actually retard it. Such items are those of your animal
life forms, sugars, and white flours.
These
are not harmful to the body, as such. They are only harmful to the vibrational
increase.
When
you do not know that you need fuel for the increased frequency, then the foods
you consume do not bother you.
When
you are on an accelerated path, the foods that you consume can either make or
break your energy patterns.
In
fact, there are presently many Beings on your planet that can tolerate only the
consumption of the highest forms of energy.
[Incidentally,
Dr. Milanovich‘s sources repeatedly refer to an octave of dimensions, as do
Scallion‘s. The “Arcturians ” also model the Universe
on what they call “liquid light. ”]
So in essence, bad diet and
intuitive burnout killed Ramanujan. This closely parallels the story of Edgar
Cayce, the well known American psychic.
Cayce performed in-depth psychic
readings for many people, which had an unparalleled accuracy, giving him the
oft-quoted status as “America‘s Greatest Psychic. ”
Once in trance, Cayce could
medically diagnose people at a distance whom he had never met, and prescribe
accurate herbal treatments that neither he nor anyone else had previously heard
of.
The more popular that Cayce became,
the more readings he did, and his health quickly deteriorated as a result. His
sources also laid out a complex dietary set of guidelines, and Cayce
continually flaunted them, refusing to stop smoking cigarettes, drinking coffee
and eating the pork chops that he loved.
Though his sources urged him to
curtail his work, which eventually reached up to eight deep-unconscious-trance
readings a day, he never did, and he died of burnout as a result.
The same basic effects took their
toll upon Jane Roberts, as she was unable to stop drinking beer and smoking
cigarettes and passed away before her time.
The out-of-body traveler Robert
Monroe also seemed to become overly disconnected from his physical body,
according to some we have spoken with who met him in person before his death.
The Law of One contact almost
destroyed Carla Rueckert‘s health completely, and it took her years to recover.
Lastly, the story of Paul Solomon, another deep trance psychic in the Cayce
tradition, is curiously similar as well.
In the Law of One series, Ra
explains this problem by saying that the more that the spiritual body of a
human being travels into the higher realms, the more its level of aetheric
vibration increases.
If the physical body is not also
kept "up to speed" with rigorous dietetic and exercise practices,
then the normal connection between the body and Spirit becomes increasingly
strained. Ultimately, if not taken care of, this leads to the premature death
of the physical body.
As Carla, the channel for Ra, has
stated in private interviews with Wilcock, “To truly do this work, it takes
a life. ”
He agreed, as his own contacts are
extremely strict about diet, exercise and health in general, and all of his
waking and sleeping hours are dedicated to his purpose -- no time is “wasted, ” and even recreational activities must be carefully
planned out and scheduled. No television or other mind-altering substances are
to be found in his ‘physical intake‘ of the world.
With regards to the energy
transition that is occurring on the planet in general at this time, it is wise
for everyone to make a stronger effort to obey the principles of a healthy
diet.
However, it doesn't become truly
life-threatening unless a person is deeply involved with trance work in some
form or another, and even then it is really not that difficult to teach oneself
to stop craving certain unhealthy foods and to stretch and take regular walks.
THE OCTAVE-BASED REVELATIONS OF
RAMANUJAN
And so, it is easy to see that such
apparent miracles as Ramanujan's calculations of the harmonics behind the
taxicab number 1729 were not being done solely in his thinking mind, but were
actually coming through a trance state.
In this state, he had access to a
realm of pure information and knowledge, which would then provide the answers
that he desired. It also took the same toll on him as it has for other pioneers
who have not yet enjoyed mainstream acceptance.
If there were no proof to believe
that Ramanujan could get data like this, then a skeptic could just brush it off
as coincidence.
However, the author has completely,
redundantly proven to himself and to others that psychic techniques such as
those used by Ra and Seth are able to access information, such as future
prophecies and scientific data, in ways that can later be proven to be valid.
Ramanujan is really a front-runner,
in the sense that he used these abilities to make scientific advances. It is
obvious that such techniques will become much more common as public awareness
continues to expand.
Again, we now return to the problem
that we have in harmonizing our theory with the physicists, in that they have
apparently deemed it necessary to add two more dimensions, for a total of ten.
Digging into footnote number 13 on
page 346 at the back of Hyperspace, Kaku says that the two additional
dimensions are added in order to “preserve the symmetry of the string. ” He then says,
However, two of these vibratory modes can be removed
when we break the symmetry of the string, leaving us with 24 vibratory modes,
which are the ones that appear in the Ramanujan function.
If you haven‘t been paying close
attention to this discussion so far, please read this paragraph carefully: What
Kaku is telling us is that two extra dimensions were added to Ramanujan‘s
equations because the physicists feel that the strings could only vibrate if
they are symmetrical.
This is something that was “added
on ” to Ramanujan‘s data after-the-fact.
So, given the nature of Ramanujan‘s
extreme mathematical genius, coupled with an extremely legitimate psychic
contact, they obviously did not feel that such “symmetry ”
was needed, or else these numbers would have been included in the work.
Our latest research on this topic
suggests two different reasons for why this “added symmetry ”
may be a mistake: One, the missing symmetry is probably explained by the
'zero-point energy' that actually exists between the so-called ‘strings,‘ which
are actually nothing more than waves within this unified energy; and Two, the
Superstring physicists were not aware of the basic geometries that are formed
when the aether vibrates.
No extra dimensions are needed; they
simply come into being by the “magic ” of vibration.
DR. TONY SMITH: AN OCTAVE OF
DIMENSIONS, BUILT ON PLATONIC SOLIDS
More recent physics from Tony Smith,
freely available on the Internet for those who can understand them, (as they
are extremely complicated, draw extensively on the reader‘s foreknowledge of
advanced scientific jargon and are therefore almost completely unintelligible
to the non-technical reader,) do indeed reveal an elegant, Octave-based
“eight-dimensional spacetime ” model, which depends
entirely on “Platonic Solid ” geometries.
Here we will cover the extreme
basics of this model, which Smith and other specialists refer to as S3#, a
rather dull-sounding and “Godless ” name.
It is interesting to note that Smith
is open-minded enough to incorporate non-traditional sources of information
into his investigations, such as material from the ancient Mayan Calendar and
the channeling work of Krsanna Duran, who claims to be in touch with beings
from a planetary system around the star Sirius.
So, we begin with Smith telling us
what the geometry of this Octave model of “dimensions ”
actually looks like:
WHAT
DOES S3# LOOK LIKE? Here are some images from the WWW pages of Richard Hawkins,
[www.newciv.org/Synergetic_Geometry],
who calls S3# the Mayan Time Star. His pages contain many more images and
movies that help you understand how S3# looks, and also how a lot of other
things look.
What we can see here is that Smith
feels that the geometry of this Octave model can be found in the work of
Richard Hawkins, through what he calls the “Mayan Time Star.
” So, let‘s next visit some of Richard Hawkins‘
website for context.
GEOMETRY IN TIME: THE ‘MAYAN TIME STAR‘ FORMATION
In this next excerpt, Hawkins
discusses this Mayan Time Star model directly, showing
his belief that there can be energetic structures in time that
correspond to the Platonic geometries.
We will learn more about this as we
proceed into the later chapters of this first volume:
The TimeStar of the Maya is 5 interpenetrating
tetrahedra whose vertices [tips] lie on the 20 faces of an icosahedron. [See Figure 5.1 below.] According to Jose Arguelles, time is
symbolized by a tetrahedron.
[Note:
We can actually back this statement up with the work of WD Gann and Bradley Cowan,
as we will see later in this volume.]
The
260-day sacred calendar of the Maya, which consisted of five 52-day cycles, is
symbolized by five tetrahedra.
Five
tetrahedra have a total of 20 points [as
each tetrahedron has four corners - three at the base and one at the top.] One
of the basic numbers of the Mayan calendar is 20.
The
Earth's internal geometry and the solar-lunar cycles were represented by the 20
points of the TimeStar (five interpenetrated tetrahedra) and in the sacred
cycle of the Maya.
Compare
Plato's most complex solid, the icosahedron, which is comprised of 20 faces
centered on the points of the five interpenetrated tetrahedra. [emphasis added]
It is important to realize that what
we are seeing here is that you can take five tetrahedrons and stick them
together in such a way that when you play connect-the-dots between their
points, you will naturally form the icosahedron, and / or the dodecahedron, as
the two are closely related. (See Figure 5.1 below.)
This is another surprising way in
which we see the symmetry between the different shapes. Even more interesting
is the fact that these five tetrahedrons, when combined, give us all the
needed coordinates to build any of the five Platonic Solids directly.
And even more interesting yet is
that this idea first came from Krsanna Duran, who claimed to have channeled it!
The idea subsequently triggered the
interest of physicist Gerald de Jong, who then modeled her ideas on a computer
and discovered that she was right!
Again, it is very unlikely that
Duran could have figured this out on her own, or would have had any motive or
desire to do so - it took one of the few specialists in the world who actually
understands higher-dimensional geometry to verify and model what her source had
said.
We will read more about this in the
next excerpt below - and first we will give some background to explain this
curious concept.
Space and time are unified in our
model, which can be confusing at first.
When we think of time, we can think
of certain events that are created as we move through layers of aetheric energy
density. One of our premises is that the planets are held in place by spheres
of aetheric energy at a certain density level.
Since we have multiple planets in
the Solar System, we also have “spheres within spheres ” holding them in place
- spheres which are nested inside of each other like the layers of an onion or
the Russian “nested dolls ” toy called the Mastrioshka.
There will always be a series of
‘nested spheres‘ no matter where we look at these
energy fields, including the human aura.
As documented in the first Edgar
Cayce book “There is a River, ” the Edgar Cayce Readings once said that
Mercury, Venus, Earth, Mars, Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus and Neptune now correspond
to the eight dimensions or densities - we know that Pluto isn‘t in
fact a “full ” planet but rather a “planetesimal ” due to its tiny size.
So, in Ra‘s model, each planet
travels along the edge of a spherical energy field, which holds the planet in
place.
Rotating energy fields continually
emanating from the Sun, which look like ever-expanding flower petals, are what
drive the planets along.
The current models of why and how
the planets revolve around the Sun are vastly inadequate, as the Sun contains
fully 99.86 percent of the entire mass of the Solar System - so if we were only
dealing with Newtonian gravity, the planets should have crashed into the Sun a
long, long time ago, since it is much more massive than they are.
Remember that we are discussing
invisible energy structures, but they can indeed be detected with the proper
instruments - and they often do have subtle magnetic energy signatures. The
“flower petals ” we are referring to are seen in what
NASA has named the Parker Spiral, for example.
So then you ask, “OK, so if each
planet is supposedly orbiting around a sphere, then why are the orbits not
perfect circles, but rather stretched out into ellipses? ”
Good question! The planetary orbits
become elliptical as these spheres are slightly flattened as the Solar System
moves through the “local interstellar medium ” or LISM
of our Galaxy.
So, the spheres that hold the
planets in place must also have a certain underlying geometry in them, caused
by vibration of the aether. Then, as our Earth orbits the Sun, we pass through
various geometric structures created by these different ‘nested‘
spheres.
As the Earth gets closer to a line
or a node of any of these geometries, the intensity of aetheric energy that we
will feel on Earth increases - and this has a direct effect on consciousness.
If you think that this has something to do with astrology, you‘re right... but
that data will come later.
It is also important to remember
that Ra tells us that the Sun has all of the eight densities within itself.
This gives us a strong clue that there must be at least eight levels of density
inside of the Sun, which would be layered inside of each other like an onion.
Of course, each of these density
layers would also have its own geometric structure. And when we remember that
each density has seven sub-densities, and so on, we can see that the Sun would
need to have a deeply multi-layered structure inside of it for this model to
“work. ”
This is exactly what Dr. Oliver
Crane suggests in his breakthrough paper, Central Oscillator and the
Space-Time Quanta Medium, which we will discuss in Volume III.
We apologize in advance for the
complexity of the ensuing few paragraphs as we attempt to explain the mystery
of the Mayan Time Star. We can now consider this very intriguing possibility
that all of the Mayan Calendar cycles may actually be clocking out the movement
of geometric structures of energy.
(We will be covering the Mayan
Calendar in far more detail in the second half of this volume.)
Our own intuitive / rational
research on this suggests that this geometric structure of five
interpenetrating tetrahedra actually exists at one spherical level of
density... inside the Sun.
SOLAR CYCLES AND GEOMETRIC ANALOGS
TO THE MAYAN CALENDAR
So, we do know that the Sun rotates
exactly 26 days along its equator. Ten of these cycles add up to 260 days.
Harmonics theory predicts spheres
within spheres, on an energy level we cannot normally perceive. One way to
visualize this is the different layers we now see inside the Earth -- the core,
the mantle, et cetera.
It appears that one of the spheres
inside the sun is rotating exactly ten times slower than the equator
does at the surface, creating a total cycle of 260 days. (The “powers of ten ” are very important in the behavior of harmonic
numbers, as we will see as we go along.)
So, if there is a sphere of energy
inside the Sun that rotates once in 260 days, then the Mayan Time Star geometry
that Duran discovered may be the geometric pattern of frequency that exists
inside of it.
The points of the five tetrahedrons
could then be seen to divide up the sphere into five equidistant “zones ” across its surface.
Each of these 'zones' would then
take 52 days to rotate past a fixed point on the Sun‘s surface, as the
entire sphere rotates in 260 days.
So, as the Mayan Time Star structure
rotates, it changes in its orientation to the other geometric structures
nested in the Sun. (Some of the other geometries are easy to detect, such
as the octahedron, as we shall see in volumes II and III.)
As the different geometries attract
and repel each other, the Sun‘s overall energy output is affected, especially
in the sense of the torsion fields or “waves in the aether ”
that are being released.
(We could visualize this by having a
bright light, and then passing different brightly colored sheets of clear
plastic in front of the light, going in opposite directions. If a red sheet
passes in front of a blue sheet, then they will combine and we will see a
purple light.)
So, if each
geometry is radiating frequencies that directly affect human
consciousness and biological activity, then their various angle relationships
to each other could create an ever-changing balance of influences. This might
well explain the science of astrology when we are dealing with the orbits of
the planets.
The Mayans wanted to be aware of,
and graph out, these changes in the Sun‘s aetheric output, as certain times
that were more energetically charged were very useful for consciousness-raising
ceremonies, especially within their pyramid structures.
Ra tells us in the Law of One series
that high-level sixth-density beings gave the Maya the information that allowed
them to construct this Calendar.
Ultimately, it is very likely that
ALL the major cycles in the Mayan calendar -- baktuns, katuns, et cetera...
have a hyperdimensional component that can actually be observed and measured
within the Sun. As the geometries counter-rotate and interpenetrate one
another, there is a constant rise and fall of influences upon consciousness.
It is also almost certain, by this
same logic, that a grand geometric alignment occurs within the Solar geometries at the end of the Mayan Calendar. The best
way to visualize this is to see each node on each geometry
as if it were the nozzle of a hose, releasing water.
As the geometries line up, their
nodes cross over each other. The 'water' can increasingly escape the blocking
effects of each 'wall' of geometry, and make its way to the outside. The more
the holes all line up with each other, the more water gets to squirt out from
the Sun's surface.
This may well cause a much larger
"gating" of energy to come through, which in turn affects
consciousness as well as causing interplanetary climate change.
STRONG SUPPORTING EVIDENCE FROM
JUPITER
[This section added 11/26/07]
I discovered strong supporting
evidence for this "nested geometry" energetic effect occurring in
Jupiter, as I published in the "Interplanetary Day After Tomorrow?" article
I co-authored with Richard C. Hoagland.
Jupiter has a very obvious pentagon
surrounding the North Pole. NASA calls it a
"quasi-hexagon" and fails to note how obviously it fits with a
pentagon shape.
Here's the main point: the area
inside the pentagon is much colder than the area outside the pentagon.
That's how they discovered it. The orange color in the image below represents
the level of heat.
When I took the shape of a
dodecahedron and overlaid it across the sphere of Jupiter itself, fitting one
face perfectly inside the pentagonal 'hole', I was astonished to see that it
was perfect... absolutely no cheating or alteration to either image was
necessary:
Dodecahedral
energy field and its effects on Jupiter's arctic heat profile.
This makes a very convincing case
that the aetheric energy streaming into Jupiter has to flow through this
dodecahedron force-field in order to reach its destination at the core. That
one face acts as a "gate" that all the energy flows through, whereas
the walls of the pentagon form a boundary that stops the energy from spilling
over into neighboring areas.
Why would it be so much colder,
then? It could be that this smooth flow of energy into the face of the
dodecahedron stops the molecules from vibrating as violently as they normally
would, holding them in an orderly pattern like ice crystals. This would, of
course, directly lead to a decrease in heat, since heat is nothing more
than a measurement of how much a group of molecules are vibrating.
As this next image shows, Jupiter
also has a very clear tetrahedral energy pattern as well. The vortex effects of
the tetrahedron can be seen in the position and activity of the Great Red Spot
-- a single storm that has been spiraling, in the same place, for over 300
years, as recorded by astronomers ever since telescopes were invented:
Tetrahedral energy field in Jupiter.
More recently I found NASA studies
showing anomalous X-ray
activity that occurs precisely at the north pole,
shooting a gigawatt of energy through our entire Solar System every 45 minutes,
like clockwork.
This next image shows you what the source
of emissions actually looks like -- in the pink area. Not only is it at the
exact rotational North Pole of Jupiter (not the magnetic North Pole,) it even
LOOKS like the top of a tetrahedron:
Tetrahedral
energy field emerges at Jupiter's arctic pole.
Then I had to know what could be
causing these flashes. I found the rotational period of Jupiter and divided it
by 45 minutes. Lo and behold, there are precisely 15 X-ray flashes for every
time Jupiter rotates once on its axis.
There are three sides to the face of
a tetrahedron and five sides to the face of a dodecahedron. Three times five is
15. Therefore, it is certainly likely that these X-ray flashes have to do with
the nodes of two counter-rotating geometric energy fields colliding with each
other, causing big bursts of energy to be released.
In our physics model the same
behavior you see in a planet is also occurring in a star. Therefore, on Jupiter
we may well be seeing a smaller, easier-to-understand example of geometric
cycles colliding with each other, just as we have suggested is occurring in the
Sun, measured by the Mayan Calendar.
Later in this book we will analyze
some longer-term cycles in the Sun that very much suggest this is what we are
seeing.
TONY SMITH'S EXPLORATION OF THE
MAYAN TIME STAR
Now we return to Tony Smith's
article, which features an image of this Mayan Time Star formation of five
inter-penetrating tetrahedrons.
What follows is Smith‘s attempt to
geometrically explain how you could have a “particle ”
that requires two complete rotations, or “spin 2, ” in order to return to its
original position:
How did Richard Hawkins find out about the Time Star?
Krsanna Duran says:
"... I wrote an article about what the Sirians
told me about five interpenetrated tetrahedra embodying and unifying all prime
geometries [i.e. the Platonic Solids,] which was
published in January, 1995.
Richard
Hawkins read the article and sent an email to Gerald de Jong about it. Gerald
de Jong constructed a computer model of the five interpenetrated tetrahedra to
discover that it did all the things I said it did with extraordinary
elegance..."
The
Time Star is one of my favorite Archetypes.
Start
with a dodecahedron.
Five
tetrahedra fit inside the dodecahedron:
Figure
5.1 - The “Mayan Time Star ” of five tetrahedra inside
the dodecahedron. (Smith)
The
alternating permutation group of the 5 tetrahedra is the 60-element icosahedral
group.
This last sentence is simply a very
fancy way of saying that the five tetrahedrons fit inside an icosahedron, which
has 20 faces with three lines per face, or a total of 60 “elements ” if you
don‘t count the lines as ever being shared between two faces.
From here, Smith goes through a
complex model that we presented in earlier versions of this book, but we now
feel that it is unnecessary as Johnson‘s physics is a more complete model. For
now we will keep things simple.
The key point that we should take
out of this is that there are indeed mainstream physicists who are making
findings that are in complete agreement with the model that is seen in the
words of Seth and Ra, as well as the ancient Atlantean and Raman systems.
Therefore, no skeptic can easily
dismiss the idea that Platonic geometry is important in understanding the
Universe, since some of the best thinkers are working on these very problems.
Furthermore, Smith‘s model does not
have the burden of the “two extra dimensions added for symmetry
” that is in the Superstring model - the symmetry arises from the
Platonic Solids themselves. At the time of this writing, the link to the page
we have quoted from is as follows:
http://www.innerx.net/personal/tsmith/PDS3.html
HEADING INTO OUR NEXT CHAPTER
In our next chapter, we will take a
very close look at the underlying spherical units that make up the dimensions.
Once again, we will enlist the services
of another mystic who has not attained the scientific scrutiny of Ramanujan -
namely Jane Roberts, the channeler of Seth.
As these are conscious energy units,
they have a mind of their own and are quite fascinating. With this reading, we
will provide a solid backbone for many other discussions that could splinter
off of the main topic, which other writers may choose to pursue.
The point behind all of this is as
follows: as these units are the fundamental structure of all creation in all
dimensions, we can expect them to have quite extraordinary properties.
This reading from Seth also can be
used to neatly tie together the theory of a Holographic Universe, and explain
why things like psychic phenomena might work.
CHAPTER
06: THE SETH ENTITY AND CONSCIOUSNESS UNITS
This chapter is a direct excerpt from the end portions of "The Seth Material," the original
debut of Jane Roberts' channeling efforts in 1971.
What we find
is an in-depth study of the Consciousness Unit. The metaphysical properties of
the CU are explained by Seth in careful detail. The result is a guided tour
through a set of metaphysical ideas that most people have never considered
before.
We then
explore how archetypes and CUs are related.
In
the previous chapter, we discussed how “Superstring Theory” and the physics of
Tony Smith both match up with the idea of an Octave of dimensions, with the
Platonic Solids underlying them.
[In
Volume II we will show that Ramanujan’s own functions have been directly
associated with Platonic Solids in very advanced mathematics work that only
emerged in the 1990s, completely separate from what Smith is discussing.]
Let
us again remember Dr. Michio Kaku’s quote: “It’s as though there is some kind
of deep numerology being manifested in these [dimensional] functions that no
one understands.”
The
numerology Kaku was speaking of is the widespread occurrence of the number 8 in
Ramanujan’s physics equations, which are used to map out higher dimensions.
In
hindsight, it appears that this numerology is, in fact, sitting right in front
of Kaku’s face, as he mentions “the vibrations of a string.”
In
other words, a vibrating guitar string can make notes all throughout the
spectrum of an octave, but it can never go outside of an octave framework; if
the vibratory pitch was moved higher, such as by reaching double its original
value in cycles per second, then the pitch would simply enter into a higher
octave, but essentially sound the same.
Similarly,
the vibrations of the densities must conform themselves to this same octave
system that is indicated by Ramanujan’s function, since they are composed of a
fluidlike energy source.
In
the previous chapter, we indicated that Ramanujan’s function is based on 24, or
three times eight. Kaku then explained that the harmonic of three sets of eight
could be compressed down into one set of eight, which would then represent a
single octave.
Having
established that, we come up again to the geometric shapes themselves. These
shapes, as previous chapters have indicated, are a series of “perfect”
geometric solids that all fit within the sphere, and have a growth sequence
that fits into the octave pattern, according to the Vedic model of Purusha and
Prakriti.
Seth
has already told us that the universe rises out of “cubes within cubes” in a universe
made up of “a myriad of interconnecting wires, constantly trembling.” As
stated, this is literally identical to superstring theory, which also discusses
cubes within cubes as “hypercubes,” and builds the universe on a matrix of
interconnecting strings that vibrate.
Tony
Smith's model of “S3#” shows us that our top thinkers are already working the
Platonic solids into their mathematical models for these higher realms.
For
the rest of this chapter, we will present the words of Seth from the appendix section
of “The Seth Material,” which help us to understand
how the basic spherical units of energy in the Cosmos interact with each other.
It
took us several years to actually match up all of this information with
scientific data, but now as we conclude the three volumes of the series, we
have found some degree of proof for almost every point that Seth had made back
in 1969.
This
original text was invaluable in helping us to understand what was going on, as
it provided crucial data that was missing in Ra’s own Law of One series.
In
order to avoid repeating the phrase “[emphasis added],” the reader should be
advised that almost all italicized or bolded portions of text were added by
this author after-the-fact, in order to help enhance comprehension.
When
we write “Note:” followed by text in parentheses, these are our comments added
in.
_______________________________________________________________________
Now:
there are electromagnetic structures, so to speak, that are presently beyond
your (scientific) instruments, units that are the basic carriers of perception.
They have a very brief “life” in your terms. Their size varies.
Several
units may combine, for example; many units may combine. To put this as simply
as possible, it is not
so much that they move through space, as that they use space to move through.
There is a difference.
[Note: This may seem complicated at
first, but once we see that what Seth calls “space” is in fact the aetheric
energy, it makes sense. Since the units are made of aetheric energy, they must
use aetheric energy to travel. They are not self-contained “particles” that
move through an empty vacuum.]
In
a manner of speaking, thermal qualities are involved, and also laws of
attraction and repulsion. The units charge the air through which they pass, and
draw to them other units.
The
units are not stationary in the way that, say, a cell
is stationary within the body. Even a cell only appears stationary. These units
have no “home.” They are
built up in response to emotional intensity.
They
are one form that emotional energy takes. They follow their own rules of
attraction and repulsion. As a magnet, you see, will attract with its
filaments, so these units attract their own kind and form patterns, which then
appear to you as perception.
[Note: This is easy to miss. Seth is
saying that everything we perceive is some form of pattern built up from
consciousness units. Since they do form all of physical matter, this is a very
accurate statement indeed.]
Now:
the fetus utilizes these units. [Note: Seth had been discussing the fetus
earlier in the discussion.] So does any consciousness, including that of a
plant.
Cells
are not just responsive to light because this is the order of things, but
because an emotional
desire to perceive light is present.
[Note: This idea of an “emotional desire
to perceive light” conforms with cutting-edge research
cited by Gregg Braden in his various books. The work of Garaiev and Poponin
entitled the “DNA Phantom Effect” has found that a DNA molecule can be inserted
in a cylinder with light passing through it, and the DNA will actually attract the light and
cause it to spiral through the molecule!
Furthermore, when the DNA is removed,
the light continues to spiral as if the DNA were still there. (We will have a
lot more to say about this in Volume III, as it relates to evolution and how
the torsion wave forms the DNA molecule.)
This is obviously a very strange
finding, but we can see that Seth helps us to understand it; the DNA has an “emotional desire to perceive light,”
as it naturally attracts light into itself. This might not seem possible until
we realize that all life and matter has some degree of consciousness, since it
is made of “intelligent energy.”]
The
desire appears on this other level in the form of these electromagnetic units,
which then cause a light sensitivity.
These
units are freewheeling. They can be used in normal perception or what you call
extrasensory perception. I will discuss their basic nature at a later session,
and I would like to tie this in with the fetus, since the fetus is highly
involved with perceptive mechanisms.
("Next
session will be fine.")
It is not that you cannot devise instruments to perceive these units.
Your scientists are simply asking the wrong questions, and do not think in terms of such freewheeling
structures.
[Note: Seth implies that we can indeed design instruments
that would be able to perceive these units.
We will have a lot to say about this in
Volume III, as there are several Russian scientists who have designed very
effective torsion-field detectors. Also, this work has been replicated by Lt.
Col. Tom Bearden (ret.) among others in the US.
The pyramid work of Joe Parr, also
covered in Volume III, clearly shows these fields as well. So, the latest
research shows that since the time when Seth gave these readings in 1969, some
scientists are now asking the "right questions."]
SESSION 505, OCTOBER 13, 1969, 9:34 P.M. MONDAY
Good
evening.
("Good
evening, Seth.")
Now:
These units of which we spoke earlier are basically animations rising from consciousness.
I
am speaking now of the consciousness within each physical particle regardless
of its size; of molecular consciousness, cellular consciousness, as well as the
larger gestalts of consciousness with which you are usually familiar.
Because
of Ruburt's limited scientific vocabulary, this is somewhat difficult to
explain. Also some of the theories I will present to you in this discussion
will be quite unfamiliar to you.
These emanations rise as naturally as breath, and there are other comparisons that can be made, in
that there is a
coming in and a going out, and transformation within the unit,
as what is taken into the lungs, for example, is not the same thing that leaves
on the exhale stroke.
You
could compare these units, simply for an analogy, to the invisible breath of
consciousness.
This
analogy will not carry us far, but it will be enough initially to get the idea
across.
Breath
is, of course, also a pulsation, and these
units operate in a pulsating manner.
They
are emitted by the cells, for example, in plants, animals, rocks, and so forth.
They would have color if
you were able to perceive them physically.
[Note: In Volume III, we will show how
the work of Dr. Oliver Crane demonstrates the importance of a “breathing”
movement in these spherical energy fields. This became one of the most
important revelations in having a complete solution for the model, as we will
see. It is truly stunning at how accurate Seth was, while none of this material
had been formally discovered scientifically at the time.]
They
are electromagnetic, in your terms, following
their own patterns of positive and negative charge, and following also certain
laws of magnetism.
In
this instance, like definitely attracts like. The emanations are actually emotional tones.
The varieties of tones, for all intents and purposes, are infinite.
[Note: And of course, all tones must
fall somewhere into an octave structure.]
The
units are just beneath
the range of physical matter.
None
are identical. However, there is a structure to them. This structure is beyond
the range of electromagnetic qualities as your scientists think of them.
Consciousness actually produces these emanations, and they are the basis for any kind of perception,
both sensory in usual terms and extrasensory.
[Note: Russian research into torsion
fields has validated Seth’s statements here, as these fields are indeed
non-electromagnetic in nature, having qualities that are more similar to gravitational
waves. There is extensive evidence that we will cover in this series to show
how these torsion fields relate to consciousness.]
We
are only beginning this discussion. Later you will see that I am making it
simple for you, but you will not understand it unless we start in this manner.
I do intend to explain the structure of these units. Now, give us a moment.
These emanations can also appear as sounds, and you
will be able to translate them into sounds long before your scientists discover
their basic meaning.
[Note: We can now see that Seth has
covered all three of the bases as far as harmonics is concerned: light, sound
and geometry are all a factor in these vibrations.
At the US Psychotronics Association
conference in July 2002, I saw certain machines that created torsion fields by
using sound – so what Seth is saying here is indeed possible.
One large ultra-low-frequency sound
machine in particular had such a powerful effect that I felt as if the ground
was falling out from under me when I would stand in a certain spot, which
aligned me with the torsion-field emanations coming from the device.
I discovered this quite by accident, and
the spot where it worked was over 30 feet away from the machine.]
One of the reasons why they have not been discovered
is precisely because they are so cleverly camouflaged within all structures.
[Note: This, of course, would include
the planets!]
Being
just beyond the range of matter, having a structure but a nonphysical one, and
being of a pulsating nature, they
can expand or contract.
They
can completely envelop, for example, a small cell, or retreat to the nucleus
within. They combine
qualities of a unit and a field, in other words.
[Note: This is a very astute point that
fits perfectly with the model, such as with the idea of “fluid crystals.”]
There
is another reason why they remain a secret from Western scientists. Intensity
governs not only their activity and size, but the relative strength of their
magnetic nature.
They will draw other such units to them, for example, according to the intensity of the emotional tone of the particular consciousness at any given “point.”
[Note: Thus, Seth is telling us that the
amplitude of the spherical wave is actually a function of the emotional intensity that went
into its creation.]
These
units then obviously change constantly. If we must speak in terms of size, then
they change in size
constantly as they expand and contract.
Theoretically there is no limit, you see, to their rate of contraction or expansion.
[Note: We can see that the shapes could
easily expand into a size that would engulf a pyramid, based on this
information. The essential foundation shape is a sphere, and a planet, sun, and
galaxy can provide a basis for this pulsation, as can microclusters, molecules
and atoms.]
They
are also absorbent. They
do give off thermal qualities, and these are the only hint that your scientists have
received of them so far.
[Note: Here we should remember that heat
is simply a reflection of how fast the molecules in a given object are
vibrating.
Once more, Seth wins big points here, as
we will see in Volume III that these formations have been visually observed in
the infrared and microwave spectrums -- such as with the "Earth
Lights" that have been observed in Hessdalen, Norway.
In particular, the infrared spectrum is
a direct measurement of how much heat (vibration) is in a given area.]
Their
characteristics draw them toward constant interchange.
Clumps
of them (Jane gestured - her delivery was quite emphatic and animated) will be
drawn together, literally sealed, only to drop away and disperse once more.
They form – and their nature is behind – what is commonly known as air, and they use this to move through. The air, in other
words, can be said to be formed by animations of these units.
[Note: Right here we can clearly get a
hint of the importance of meditation; our breath may well be the closest
connection that we have to brining in greater amounts of this spiritual energy
into our bodies.
It seems that what Seth is truly driving
at here is that the unseen geometric stresses in the aether have a direct
impact on how the air molecules are bouncing around. This eventually gets into
discussions about weather, which will be covered in this and later volumes when
discussing the Global Grid.]
I
will try to clear this later, but the air is the result of these units’
existence, formed by the interrelationship of the units in their positions and
relative distance one from the other, and by what you could call the relative
velocity of their motion.
Air
is what happens when these units are in motion, and it is in terms of weather that
their electromagnetic effects appear most clearly to scientists, for example.
[Note: As we will see in future
chapters, the earth’s Global Grid of energy lines directs wind and water
currents in certain directions. Look back to the huge "Great Red
Spot" hurricane-style storm on Jupiter and you'll see how the tetrahedron
is driving the weather patterns.]
These
units – let us discuss them as they are related to a rock.
The
rock is composed of atoms and molecules, each with their own consciousness.
This forms a gestalt rock consciousness.
These
units are sent out indiscriminately by the various atoms and molecules, but portions
of them are also directed by the overall rock consciousness.
[Note: Here we can see a precise
correlation with statements in the Ra Material where they described how they
transformed the limestone rock into neatly carved blocks to build the Pyramid.
Ra had said that the entity doing the
building needed to “communicate to the intelligence of infinite rock-ness” and
command it to displace a portion of itself into a higher frequency of
vibration. In the same sense, certain advanced spiritual masters and / or
psychic children have been seen to manifest and demanifest objects.]
The
units are sent out by the rock, informing the rock as to the nature of its
changing environment: the angle of the sun and temperature changes, for
example, as night falls; and even in the case of a rock, they change as the
rock’s loosely called emotional tone changes.
As
the units change, they alter the air about them, which is the result of their
own activity.
They constantly emanate out from the rock and return to it in a motion
so swift it would seem simultaneous.
The units meet with, and to some extent merge with,
other units sent out, say, from foliage and all other objects.
There
is a constant blending, and also attraction and repulsion.
[Note: Again, we pay close attention to
Seth's statements: “it would seem simultaneous.” Clearly, our instruments would
not be able to slow down this motion to a measurable speed – thus we may appear
to see fixed clouds instead of the movement of “units.”]
You
may take your break, and we will continue.
(10:10.
Jane's delivery was quite emphatic and animated through- out. Her trance state
was good.)
(The
rest of the session was devoted to Seth's interpretation of one of my
dreams-Robert Butts.)
SESSION 506, OCTOBER 27, 1969, 9:40 P.M. MONDAY
(Sometime
after 9 P.M. Jane and I sat to see if Seth would come through. I told Jane she
needn't have a session, but she was willing enough, if Seth decided to. She has
been working long hours on her book and has but a couple of chapters to
rewrite.)
(Jane
has had two recent, excellent and long sessions for her ESP class, however,
featuring both Seth and Seth II, and including new material.)
Good
evening.
("Good
evening, Seth.")
Now:
Ruburt need not worry that he has missed a few regular sessions. He has been
exercising spontaneity, and paradoxically enough, it is upon spontaneity that
the regularity of our sessions depends. Do you follow me?
(“Yes.”)
Now:
the units about which I have been speaking do not have any specific, regular,
preordained “life.” They will not seem to follow many scientific principles.
Since
they are the intuitive force just beyond the range of matter, upon which matter
is formed, they will not follow the laws of matter, although at times they may mimic the laws of
matter.
It
is almost impossible to detect an individual unit, for in its dance of activity it
constantly becomes a part of other such units, expanding and
contracting, pulsating and changing in intensity, in force, and changing polarity.
This last is extremely
important.
(Pause, one of many.)
With
Ruburt's limited vocabulary, this is rather difficult to explain, but it would be as if the positions of
your north and south poles changed constantly while maintaining the same
relative distance from each other, and by their change in polarity
upsetting the stability (pause) of the planet – except that
because of the greater comparative strength at the poles of the units
(gestures, attempts to draw diagrams in the air), a newer stability is almost
immediately achieved after each shifting. Is that much clear?
("Yes.")
[Note: Again, time has proven the
efficiency of Seth’s words. A spherical torus does have the greatest amount of energy influx at
the polar regions.
Every Platonic Solid does have the
central axis of a spherical torus going through it, in a form that is most
balanced for that particular geometry.
This balance-point changes from one geometry to another, causing there to be a
necessity for the poles of the spherical torus to shift their positions. This
is the true, hidden mechanism that is responsible for magnetic pole shifts on
Earth as well.]
The shifting of polarity occurs in rhythm with
changing emotional intensities, or emotional energies, if you prefer.
[Note: This past sentence is extremely
important to our discussion -- it is the emotional intensity in a given area
that causes these polarity shifts. And that intensity is simply a function of
the ‘density’ or the degree of concentration of the aether energy itself.
Similarly, sources such as Ra tell us
that the Earth’s poles are going to have approximately a 21-degree shift at the
time that the cycle ends – and it is the overall spiritual / emotional state of
humanity that determines how quickly and how damagingly this shift will occur.]
The
“initial” originating emotional energy that sets any given unit into motion,
and forms it, then causes the unit to become a highly charged electromagnetic
field with those characteristics of changing polarities just mentioned.
The
changing polarities are also caused by attraction and repulsion from other like
units which may be attached or detached.
There
is a rhythm that underlies all of this changing polarity and changing
intensities that occur constantly. But the rhythms have to do with the nature
of emotional energy itself, and not with the laws of matter.
[Note: Again, rhythm is another way of
expressing vibration. In Volume III we will see how Seth is giving us a very
general description of what is going on in Rod Johnson’s model of quantum
physics.]
Without
an understanding of these rhythms, the activity of the units would appear
haphazard, chaotic, and there would seem to be nothing to hold the units
together.
[Note:
Remember that modern "superstring" theorists add two more dimensions
to Ramanujan’s functions because they demand symmetry. Seth shows us here that
this is not necessary, because there is an underlying rhythm of emotional
energy that holds the units together.]
Indeed,
they seem to be flying apart at tremendous speeds. The “nucleus” – now using a cell
analogy – if these units were cells, which they are not, then it would be as if
the nucleus were constantly changing position, flying off in all directions,
dragging the rest of the cell along with it. Do you follow the analogy?
(“Yes.”)
The
units obviously are within the reality of all cells.
Now:
the initiation point is the basic part of the unit, as the nucleus is the
important part of the cell. The initiation point is the originating, unique,
individual, and specific emotional energy that forms any given unit. It becomes
the entryway into physical matter.
[Note: Seth’s “initiation point” would
be the infinitesimally small sphere of the first density, which we would define
in classic one-dimensional terms as a “point.”]
It is the initial three-sided enclosure from which all matter must
spring.
The
initial point forms the three sides about it. (Gestures;
pause.)
[Note: Based on context from other
aspects of Roberts’ writings, including the cover of her book Adventures in
Consciousness, it is clear to see that Seth is referring to the structure of a
basic equilateral triangle,
which forms the sides for all the Platonic solids except the dodecahedron and
cube.
And we now know that this is a simplified
explanation, and the Hindus are more accurate in saying that the sphere
crystallizes into the icosahedron. The triangle analogy makes this
two-dimensional and thus easier to see.]
There
is an explosive nature as the emotional energy is born.
The
three-sided effect, instantly formed, leads to an effect that is something like
friction, but the effect causes (more gestures) the three sides to change
position, so that you end up with a triangular effect, closed, with the initial
point inside the triangle.
Now,
you understand this is not a physical form.
(“Yes.”)
[Note:
As we will see in future chapters, this formation frequently appears in
"Crop Circles," another way that the visitors are trying to teach us
about this system of vibratory physics.]
The
energy point, from here on, constantly changes the form of the unit, but the
procedure I have just mentioned must first occur. The unit may become circular,
for example.
[Note: The circle appears to have been
one of the only shapes that Seth could cite using Jane’s current vocabulary,
but this doesn’t eliminate other possibilities.]
Now
these intensities of emotional energy, forming the units, end up by
transforming all available space into what they are. Certain intensities and
certain positions of polarity between and among the units and great groupings
of the units compress energy into solid form (resulting in matter).
The
emotional energy within the units is obviously the motivating factor, and you
can see, then, why emotional energy can indeed shatter a physical object. You may take your break.
[Note: At first, in this paragraph Seth
is describing how matter is simply a more compressed form of these energy
units, coming about by “great groupings” that are organized together into
“certain intensities and certain positions of polarity between and among the
units.”
Again, this is a perfect description of
Johnson’s quantum physics model. Then, Seth suggests an understanding of the
phenomenon of telekinesis, or mind over matter. It might be nothing more than
the ability to control the “consciousness units” making up the object, then putting them “out of phase” with the pulsations of
gravity in order to cause them to rise.
This falls quite well in line with the
stories given by master yogis regarding their Siddhi powers, as well as the
cases of poltergeist activity being traced back to disgruntled teenagers with
enormous emotional stress causing the events by telekinetic force.
Indeed, in all telekinetic experiments,
the author of this book has discovered that the only thing that will get an
object to move is the firm mental visualization of it actually moving; that
firmness of belief is what forms the emotional energy.]
(10:10.
Jane came out of trance quickly enough, though it had been a good one. At times
her delivery had been quite fast. She said she could feel Seth pushing at her
to get her to let the material through as clearly as possible without
distortion.)
(She
also had some images while giving the material, though she could not remember
them by break. Usually, she said, she forgets any images, or even whether or
not she has had any, unless I specifically ask at once when a session is over
or at break. Sometimes, she said, the same images will return to her when she
reads a particular session; she then recognizes them.)
(Jane
made it a point to mention that in regard to the switch in polarities of the
units: "This isn't only with the north and south switching, but opposites
anywhere on the rim of the circle [that was used as an analogy], with east and
west reversed, for instance.")
[Note:
Let us not forget that Seth appears to have used the analogy of a circle
instead of a sphere to keep things simpler.]
(Resume
10:26.)
Now:
the intensity of the original emotional energy controls the activity, strength,
stability, and relative size of the unit; the rate of its pulsation, and its
power to attract and repel other units, as well as its ability to combine with
other units.
The
behavior of these units changes in the following manner. When a unit is in the
act of combining with another, it aligns its components in a characteristic
way. When it is separating itself from other units, it will align its
components in a different way.
The
polarities change in each case, within the units. The unit will alter its polarities
within itself, adapting the polarity-design of the unit to which it is being
attracted; and it will change its polarity away from that design on breaking
contact.
[Note: All of this relates to the
geometries inside of the spheres themselves, and how they interact with each
other.]
Take,
for example, five thousand such units aligned together, formed together. They
would, of course, be invisible. But if you could view them, each individual
unit would have its poles lined up in the same manner.
It
would look like one single unit -- say, it is of circular form -- so it would
appear like a small globe with the poles lined up as in your earth.
[Note:
Here is where Seth steps out of “flat” two-dimensional metaphors and brings in
the idea of a sphere – specifically a spherical torus, since he is focusing on
the poles of the sphere.]
If
this large unit were then attracted to another larger one, circular, with the
poles running east and west, in your terms, then the first unit would change
its own polarity, and all of the units within it would do the same.
The
energy point would be halfway between these poles, regardless of their
position, and it (the energy point) forms the poles. They revolve, therefore,
about the energy point. The energy point is indestructible basically.
Its
intensity, however, can vary to amazing degrees, so that it could, relatively
speaking, be too weak or fall back, not strong enough to form the basis for
matter, but to project into another system, perhaps, where less intensity is
required for “materialization.”
[Note: This is made possible by the fact
that there are many “densities within densities,” as Ra has illustrated.]
These
units may also gain so in intensity and strength that they form relatively
permanent structures within your system because of the astonishing energy
behind them. Your Stockridge-
(Seth
paused; Jane frowned as though groping for a word.)
(“Oak
Ridge?”)
No.
(Gesture.) The remains of temples.
(“Oh.
Baalbek?”)
These
were places for studies concerning the stars. Observatories.
(“Yes?”
I thought I probably knew the word Seth/Jane was looking for, but I didn't have
time to think and write notes.)
The
units so charged with intensive emotional energy formed patterns for matter
that retained their strength. Now these units, while appearing within your
system, may also have a reality outside it, propelling the emotional energy
units through the world of matter entirely.
These
units, as I told you, are indestructible. They can, however, lose or gain
power, fall back into intensities beneath matter, or go through matter,
appearing as matter as they do so and projecting through your system.
[Note: There are examples of
“consciousness units” that do appear as matter, and this is well covered in
both the second and third volumes. Most of the time, they will appear to be
glowing balls of light when this occurs.]
We
will deal with that portion of their activity separately. In such cases,
however, they are in a point of transition obviously and in a state of
becoming. You may take a break or end the session as you prefer.
("I
guess we'd better end it.")
I
wanted to give you this material.
("It's
very interesting.")
It
is only a beginning. I would disregard the analogies if you did not need them. A fond good evening.
("Good
evening, Seth.")
(10:45.
After we talked a bit, I deduced that Seth/Jane had
been trying for the word “Stonehenge,” meaning the ancient Druidic stone
monoliths arranged in a circle in England, etc. Jane then said this was the
word Seth had been trying to get her to say. She didn't know why it didn't come
out while in trance, since she knows the word and what it stands for.)
[Note: The author has had similar things
happen, wherein the force behind the words was trying to express a word that,
for whatever reason, it could not find in the mind of the individual.
In these cases, the word must get pushed
out syllable by syllable, and there may well be distortions. The author was
able to get accurate Japanese sentences at one point, with almost no knowledge
of the language, but certain syllables in the words were slightly incorrect.]
SESSION 509, NOVEMBER 24, 1969, 9:10 P.M. MONDAY
(Today
Jane had been reading Experimental Psychology by C. G. Jung, first American edition,
published by Jung's heirs in 1968. We hadn't asked Seth to comment.)
Good
evening.
("Good
evening, Seth.")
[Note: Here Seth goes into a discussion
about Jung’s definitions of the different levels of consciousness, compared to
his own definitions. Jung did not ascribe the degree of significance to the
subconscious that Seth does here. We cut to the following paragraph to preserve
the flow, as it summarizes Seth's point and segues into our discussion:]
The
conscious ego rises, indeed, out of the “unconscious,” but the unconscious,
being the creator of the ego, is necessarily far more conscious than its
offspring.
The
ego is simply not conscious enough to be able to contain the vast knowledge
that belongs to the inner conscious self from which it springs.
[Note: Thus, we have an explanation for
where Ramanujan’s information was coming from. Apparently, his ego was
conscious enough to contain some of it, and within three years of full-blown
academic research in Europe, he died.]
It
is this inner self, out of massive knowledge and the unlimited scope of its consciousness, that forms the physical world and provides
stimuli to keep the outer ego constantly at the job of awareness.
It
is the inner self, here termed the inner ego, that
organizes, initiates, projects, and controls the EE (electromagnetic energy)
units of which we have been speaking, transforming energy into objects, into
matter.
The
energy of this inner self is used by it to form from itself – from inner
experience – a material counterpart in which the outer ego then can act out its
role. The outer ego then acts out a play that the inner self has written.
This
is not to say that the outer ego is a puppet. It is to say that the outer ego
is far less conscious than the inner ego, that its perception is less, that it
is far less stable though it makes great pretense of stability, that it springs
from the inner self and is therefore less, rather than more, aware.
The
outer ego is spoon-fed, being given only those feelings and emotions, only that
data, that it can handle. This data is presented to it in a highly specialized
manner, usually in terms of information picked up by the physical senses.
The
inner self or ego is not only conscious, but conscious of itself, both as an individuality apart from others and as an individuality
that is a part of all other consciousness. In your terms, it is continually
aware, both of this apartness and unity-with.
The
outer ego is not continuously aware of anything. It frequently forgets itself.
When it becomes swept up in a strong emotion it seems to lose itself; there is
unity, then, but no sense of apartness. When it most vigorously maintains its
sense of individuality, it is no longer aware of unity-with.
The
inner ego is always aware of both aspects and is organized about its primary
aspect, which is creativity. It constantly translates the components of its
gestalt into reality – either physical reality through the EE units I have
mentioned, or into other realities equally as valid.
Now
you may take your break and we shall continue.
(During
our break I wondered aloud if Jung had changed his ideas since his physical
death.)
(Resume
10:05.)
Now:
the EE (electromagnetic energy) units are the forms that basic experience takes
when directed by this inner self. These, then, form physical
objects, physical matter.
Matter,
in other words, is the shape that basic experience takes when it intrudes into
three-dimensional systems.
Matter
is the shape of your dreams. Your
dreams, thoughts, and emotions are literally transformed into physical matter
purposefully by this inner self.
The
individual inner self, then, through constant massive effort of great creative
intensity, cooperates with all other inner selves to form and maintain the
physical reality that you know, so that physical reality is an offshoot or
by-product of the highly conscious inner self.
[Note: It is very obvious here that this
is the “holographic universe” theory in action, well before it emerged in books
such as Michael Talbot’s, of the same name. We really are living in a
collective visualization, or a three-dimensional hologram of thought. The
reason why we can’t walk through walls is that we are by far not the only ones
creating them.]
Buildings
appear to be made of rock or stone or steel. They appear fairly permanent to
the physical senses.
They
are actually oscillating, ever-moving, highly charged gestalts of EE units
("beneath," say, any atomic particles), organized and maintained by
the collective efforts on the part of inner selves.
They
(the buildings) are solidified emotions, solidified subjective states, given
physical materialization.
[Note: It is also easy to see here that
the more densely populated an area is, the greater amount of torsion-field
charge there can be on the physical objects built there. This is one reason why
cities can be extremely damaging to the psychic work process.
They will often have a great deal of
stored energy, which can be predominantly chaotic and negative due to the
hardships and crowding faced by many people. These chaotic emotions translate
directly into energy that enters into the structures.]
The
powers of consciousness are clearly not understood, then. Each individual has
his part to play in projecting these EE units into physical actuality.
Therefore, physical matter can be legitimately described as an extension of the
self, as much as the physical body is a projection of the inner self.
It
is obvious that the body grows up about the inner self, and that trees grow out
of the ground, whereas buildings do not spring up like flowers of their own
accord; so the inner self has various methods of creation and uses the EE units
in different ways, as you shall see as we continue with the discussion.
Having
determined upon physical reality as a dimension in which it will express
itself, the inner self, first of all, takes care to form and maintain the
physical basis upon which all else must depend; the properties of earth that
can be called natural ones.
The
inner self has a vast and infinite reservoir from which to draw knowledge and
experience. All kinds of choices are available, and the diversity of physical
matter is a reflection of this deep source of variety.
With
the natural structures formed and maintained, other secondary physical
properties – secondary constructions – are projected.
The
deepest, most basic and abiding subjective experience is translated, however,
into those natural elements: the ample landscape that sustains physical life.
We will continue with this discussion at our next session.
Jung
enlarged on some of his concepts shortly before he died. (Leaning forward,
humorously emphatic.) He has changed a good many of them since then. Now you
may take a break or end the session as you prefer.
("We'll
take the break.")
(10:30
P.M. Jane said she thought the delivery had taken perhaps ten minutes instead
of the twenty-five it had actually taken. Resume at 10:43.)
We
will shortly end the session. Suffice it to say, however, that in the future
what I am telling you will be more generally known. Men will become familiar to
some extent with their own inner identity, with other forms of their own
consciousness.
[Note: Thankfully, that future is
already starting to happen now – increasingly so each year.]
Throughout
the ages, some have recognized the fact that there is self-consciousness and
purpose in certain dream and sleep states, and have maintained, even in waking
life, the sense of continuity of this inner self.
To
such people it is no longer possible to identify completely with the ego
consciousness. They are too obviously aware of themselves as more. When such
knowledge is gained, the ego can accept it, for it finds to its surprise that
it is not less conscious, but more, that its limitations are dissipated.
Now:
it is not true – and I emphasize this strongly – that so-called unconscious
material, given any freedom, will draw energy away from the egotistically
organized self in a normal personality. Quite the contrary, the ego is
replenished and rather directly.
It
is the fear that the “unconscious” is chaotic that causes psychologists to make
such statements. There is also something in the nature of those who practice
psychology: a fascination, in many cases, already predisposed to fear the
“unconscious” in direct proportion to its attraction for them.
The
ego maintains its stability, its seeming stability, and its health, from the
constant subconscious and unconscious nourishment which it receives. Too much nourishment
will not kill it. Do you follow me here?
("Yes.")
Only
when such nourishment is for some reason cut off to a considerable degree is
the ego threatened by starvation. We will have more to say concerning the ego's
relationship with the “unconscious.”
In
a healthy personality, the inner self easily projects all experience into EE
units, where they are translated into actuality. Physical matter, therefore,
acts as a feedback. Now we will end our session, unless you have questions.
("I
guess not. It's been very interesting.")
My heartiest regards and a fond good evening to you
both.
_______________________________________________________________________
So
with this segment, we can easily begin to pick up how familiar our Higher
Selves must be with these units of consciousness.
Seth
essentially says that each sphere, pulsating its way through the different
geometric shapes, is an EE unit, and that these EE units make up our entire
physical reality.
With
these words, we can well begin to get a glimpse of the far-reaching
metaphysical realities that underlie these units. Since they are formed by
consciousness, we create them constantly, whether we are aware of it or not,
through our own thoughts.
They
can hold certain specific emotional energy charges, and emotional energies are
often rooted in the archetypal systems, which we will briefly discuss.
The
rest of this chapter may seem to be off-topic from the direct physics
discussions, but it is partly designed to give the less technically inclined
reader some breathing room; it is also designed to explore the more esoteric
ramifications of the perspective that Seth has given us on the physics under
discussion.
ARCHETYPES AND THE HARMONIC DIMENSIONS
Archetypes
are often mentioned, such as in the Law of One series, but few people really
understand them, so we will explore them for a moment.
Essentially,
the theory behind the archetypes is that all life experiences that anyone could
have may be refined and organized into a common series of events.
Each
archetypal event would then be a necessary part of learning our lessons in
Spiritual Growth in order to advance further.
According
to Ra, there are certain lessons that each density teaches us, which we must
pass through in order to achieve the vibratory level necessary for the next
level.
Each
vibratory level, then, could be likened to an archetype for a specific lesson
that needs to be learned, for each of the three parts of our being; spiritual,
mental, and physical.
Here
we enter the major arcana of the Tarot cards, which was
based on what are known as the “sephiroth” from the Jewish mystical system
known as the Cabala.
It
is a longstanding tradition among mystics that both Tarot and Cabalistic
systems, each having 22 archetypes, contain the full spectrum of learning
experiences necessary for self-perfection, which would be returning to the One,
or the Octave, a full reunion with God.
It
is then fascinating to see that these 22 can be likened to three “scales” of
seven, (7 x 3 = 21,) with the 22nd archetype, the Fool, existing outside of the
others as a separate card.
This
peculiar character of the Fool is constantly referred to in books on the Tarot;
the Fool in and of itself stands separate from the rest of the deck.
We
can then take The Fool as representing an archetype of the starting point for
all three levels given, as the One will always be the same, never divided.
Thus,
if we apply the Fool, as the One, to the beginning of each set of seven, we get
8 x 3, or Ramanujan’s mystical number of 24. (However, Ra did say that there
isn’t an exact one-to-one relationship between the archetypes and the
densities.)
The
definition of the Fool is interesting, in that it depicts a man walking forward
at the edge of a cliff, with a stick that has a small purse at the end of it,
which is balanced over his shoulder.
He
looks to the sky and holds a flower in his other hand, apparently walking
totally unaware of the cliff he stands in front of, while a white dog barks
incessantly at him, trying to warn him of the danger.
The
purse is supposed to represent the stored up knowledge of universal memory,
which he carries with him. A quote from Sidney and Bennett’s book on the Tarot
reads, “It is said that the Fool “possesses the foolishness of God, which is
greater than the wisdom of men.””
What
exactly is the Fool telling us? Why would a full consciousness of God lead us
to being so haphazard in the care for our own lives? This is only the outer
meaning of the archetype. The deeper meaning is that the Fool knows that he can
trust God completely, and thus he does not perceive any obstacles as actually
existing in reality.
The
dog would represent our lower, more animal natures, which bark out in anger at
the slightest thought of our having this blind trust, fully seeing the pitfalls
and dangers lying ahead. But the Fool, in his or her love for the One, simply
has complete faith.
It
could well be stated, then, that for anyone to fully attain this wisdom in the
material plane, they would be so obviously out of place as to appear a fool,
moron or idiot. Yet, time and time again, this unwavering faith proves itself
to be of the highest caliber.
We
are reminded of the Biblical story about how Jesus and his disciples are out on
a boat in the sea, and a horrible storm comes up, which scares the men so badly
that they beg Jesus to wake up and deal with it.
Jesus,
rising from his slumber and probably grumbling to himself, walks out to the
edge of the boat, sleepily raises his hands and releases powerful torsion
fields that promptly dissipate the storm. He then chastises his apostles,
saying that they have no faith.
Indeed,
as we continue to explore the true multidimensional nature behind the Great
Cycle that is now ending, and explore how some of the “Earth Change” events
surrounding it are fraught with catastrophe and disaster, it is helpful to be
able to trust in the fact that the positive aspect known as “Ascension” will
really occur as the end product of all of this.
If
we do not have the faith, then we will never know if our opinions of “doom”
were right until the event has already passed. Apparently, there will be more
than one opportunity to Ascend over the course of a
relatively brief period of time, but it is important to prepare ourselves for
the first “wave”, as it is often called.
This
is exactly what was promised to us by the highest spiritual forces ever to
appear on Earth, and the promise will not go unfulfilled.
On
the physics level, it is a simple question of expanding our vibration to
accommodate our movement into a higher density, which we already do every night
in dreams. The only difference this time is that we will be going there to
stay, because we have earned it, through our diligent personal growth process.
Getting
back to our discussion, it appears that each frequency in the octave is related
to certain specific archetypes, which one must go through to fulfill our
curriculum for returning to God, or the One, as perfected beings.
Therefore,
there would be certain emotional phases associated with the units that Seth is
referring to, which would remain as constants throughout the universe. This
helps us understand how aetheric energy can affect the personality, as in the
science of astrology.
The
three cycles of seven archetypes correspond to the initiation of the mind, body
and spirit, emphasizing our need to address all three areas equally in our
spiritual growth process.
Each
area of our being represents a unique and separate challenge for integration,
but these challenges do relate to each other as well.
Thus,
choosing to eat a purified diet initiates the body, by making it more vital and
healthy, and resisting its addictive, genetically based cravings. However, the
diet also initiates the mind, through the discipline of respectfully denying
the Self the gratification that it constantly is begging for.
The
initiation of the Spirit comes through knowing that by performing this
discipline, you are acting on behalf of God’s will, and in so doing, raising
your vibratory level. You can probably tell that this is a simplified example,
but it will do for now.
Interestingly,
the author has learned that the actual act of drawing the Tarot cards and
having the reading be accurate will often involve the subconscious storage of
“consciousness units” that correspond to the emotional energy of that
particular archetype inside the card.
Your
subconscious mind, which can exert influence over the body, can tell you what
card to pick just by getting a feeling as you pass your hand over it.
Each
card could then be likened to a little magnet, programmed with its own
emotional charge, waiting to be renewed. The act of concentration while
shuffling the cards puts the power of consciousness back into them, which
reinvigorates the stored blueprints of energy patterns inside them.
Then,
after tuning into the cards in nothing more than a light to moderate trance,
the reader can instinctively grab the card their Total Self is looking for –
and thus the cycle is completed.
Each
Tarot reading spread has several cards, and invariably there are certain
positions that are for the future. Thus, the Total Self, influencing the subtle
act of drawing cards, can tell the reader what the strongest future
probabilities are in the present term.
This
ingenuous system is actually behind the vast majority of self-declared “psychics”
who do these readings for people, and in the hands of an attuned person who
already understands and practices the spiritual growth curriculum indicated in
the cards, much great work can be done.
The
only time required to be in trance is when the cards themselves are drawn, and
sheer analysis will easily produce the answers after that point.
One
time, someone told Wilcock that the Tarot cards were evil. He responded by
saying that if a person uses the English language to speak evil things, does that
then mean that the English language is evil?
Certainly not. Knowing what we now do about the structure of the
densities, and that it is a growth curriculum that we can actually complete on
Earth, we can easily see the Tarot cards as a sort of alphabet of the
collective consciousness that gives rise to our universe.
The
discussion of “consciousness units” also gives credence to the claims of
psychometrists, those people who can pick up a personal item of an unknown
person and uncover what types of emotions that person is feeling.
Wilcock
himself did this after reading about it in high school, and obtained some very
interesting results. This ability can also be used to find lost objects,
calling out to the energy that is already stored in the object to bring about
its return.
At
one point, Wilcock had lost his high school ring for many months, and after
strongly visualizing its return, it was promptly found under the heat by his
mother within two days. His mother had no idea that he had lost the ring or
wished for its return.
It
could well be that he magnetized the energy stored inside the ring, turning it
into a signal beacon which then influenced his mother’s subconscious to clean
in that particular spot.
This
is, essentially, the process of creative visualization, or the idea, originally
coined by Seth and by far his most famous quote, which has now become a New Age
cliché but nevertheless is still very accurate: “You create your own reality.”
All objects are essentially nothing more than thought forms.
In
other works, Seth repeatedly indicates that the body, and in fact all matter,
is constantly turning on and off, or pulsating through the different
dimensions. Each consciousness unit must cycle through all of the densities in
the octave constantly, at tremendous speed, even though it remains “focused” in
one density most strongly.
What
this proves is that there really is no such thing as a separate density: in one
sense, they are all blending directly into each other constantly. What is so
fascinating about this is the idea that it is our perceptions, our thoughts,
which hold together the level of reality that we are on.
Thus,
our current bodies and minds are creating our world each moment, by allowing us
to only focus on third-density. Yet, were we able to alter our focus to
perceive fourth-density, then we would only perceive that realm.
Our
physical bodies would still exist in third-density, as that part of ourselves
is focused there and belongs there, for now. In order to fully enter into a
higher plane, we have to do it in a body that is essentially less physical, and
more of a direct form of conscious energy.
In
fact, the Hindu cosmology associates the seven chakras with seven different
energy bodies, and thus in a sense we have seven different bodies, of which we
could use those above the third density for travel in higher realms.
This
is essentially what happens when we have a dream or an out of body experience.
We leave our physical bodies where they belong in the third density, and use a
higher form of body that is only conscious of those times when the geometric
energy is focused in the realm of the cube, for example.
In
the series of books by Carlos Castenada about his workings as an anthropology
graduate student with a Yaqui Indian from the Sonora Desert in Mexico, named
Don Juan, we see this same point emerge.
Don
Juan was a shaman, a man who had free access to these higher dimensions. His
method for entering into these higher realms is, interestingly, very close to
what we are saying here.
What
Don Juan said you must do to enter these worlds is to stop your mind from all
conscious thought. At first this seems only able to be done by the most intense
Eastern gurus, after years of practice and meditation.
This
practice was referred to by the shamans as “Stopping the World.” Don Juan
explained that we have different “rings of power” that we use to create the
world that is around us, and that if we can stop thinking about physical
reality, we will no longer be conscious within it, and our consciousness will
move to higher levels.
This
process would basically be akin to stopping yourself from having any thoughts. Most importantly, in doing so you quite naturally get very close to
falling asleep. Indeed, the whole key is not to fall asleep while doing
this.
In
order to short-circuit the process, Carlos Castenada went through a brutal
initiation using hardcore psychedelic compounds discovered by the shamans, such
as peyote, psilocybin mushrooms and Jimson weed.
Don
Juan would use these compounds to guide Carlos through an initiation into these
higher worlds, with the idea that eventually the compounds would no longer be
necessary for the access. Carlos was especially resilient to his training and
thus he “tripped out” many times before he got the message.
The
author would like to state at this point that in Nature of Personal Reality,
Seth makes it very clear that the ingestion of LSD can be of significant and
long-lasting harm to the individual.
Seth
states that the whole personality structure is essentially shattered into many
different scattered pieces in such an experience, pieces that must then be
identified and reconstructed anew.
Thus,
despite the fact that Castenada’s initiation took on such a form, the use of
any chemical substances of any kind for opening up “the doors of perception” is
strongly contra-indicated by the author.
You
can indeed get the doors open with drugs, but it is dangerous and damaging, and
does not represent “spiritual growth.”
On
the other hand, the rising frequency of aetheric energy surrounding us is now
strong enough that these states may be accessed with ease in a good, solid
meditation.
Doing
“the real work” is by far the preferred method – and the “binaural
synchronization” techniques of the Monroe Institute represent a drugless way to
induce out-of-body and mystical experiences using the properties of sound.
In
the next chapter, we will shed further light on our discussion of these
“consciousness units” and their forces, by investigating another means by which
these truths were being demonstrated to us – through the metaphor of the crop
circle formations.
CHAPTER
07: THE EMERGENCE OF THE MOTHER OF ALL CROP CIRCLES
In this chapter, we zero in specifically on the efforts of Higher Intelligence to show us, in
modern times, a precise image and description of exactly what a Consciousness
Unit is, as well as the phase of the CU that we are now heading into.
All of this
comes about through the Barbury Castle 1991 formation, an image of incredible
size and complexity that appeared literally overnight in a field of wheat.
The entire story
and background of the crop circles is explored in some detail, along with
Gerald Hawkins' "Crop Circle Theorems" that show a clear connection
between geometry and "diatonic" musical ratios, and other formations
that reveal more secrets.
In
opening up this chapter, let us again state that we have been investigating how
the seen and unseen energies in the universe are all interwoven with a system
of conscious energy that expresses itself in octaves.
We
can see these formations emerging in the sound spectrum as the basic structure
of the Octave, in the light spectrum as Red Orange Yellow Green Blue Indigo
Violet, and in the geometric form as the hierarchy of shapes that crystallize
within the sphere.
The
reader will remember that earlier in the book we have cited physical evidence
from Dale Pond‘s Physics of Love that showed us that the harmonic ratios
between the vibrations of sound can be expanded many times over to get the
equivalent frequencies of the color spectrum of visible light.
Later
in this volume we will see that these same numbers underlie the cycles in the
Sun and planets, and we
will show their presence within atoms and molecules as well.
And
here in this chapter, we will give further evidence to show a connection
between the frequencies of sound and color with geometry, again showing how
they are literally crystallized vibrations.
In
the book Sacred Geometry by Robert Lawlor, he refers to the Platonic Solids as
the “regular polyhedra ” in the quote that we are
about to cite. The image that Lawlor will be drawing off of is seen in Figure
7.1, as Kepler‘s famous geometric model of the Solar System.
In
this model, Kepler erected a large half-sphere and placed a cube inside of it.
Each of the nested Platonic solids is represented in a smaller half-sphere.
Lawlor refers to the bowls, or half-spheres, as circles in this quote:
“In this demonstration the regular
polyhedra are determined by nine concentric circles whose pattern gives all the
necessary information for the construction of these forms.
Each volume is in a simple harmonic
relationship to the others, and it is the same transcendental functions,
[square root of 2, square root of phi and phi] that make up these patterns of
relationships.... all volumes emerge simultaneously....
This is an image of the great Buddhist
idea of the co-dependent origination of the archetypal principles of creation.
”
The
very first thing that we can tell here is that Kepler would have obviously
spent a lot of time working on such a massive sculpture. It is highly unlikely
that he would have done so if he did not believe it to be very important.
What
we suggest here is that Kepler was heir to the ancient Atlantean repository of
knowledge, similar to that handed down to the Hindus. With his secret knowledge
in place, he was trying to show us the geometric structures within the
different ‘nested‘ spheres of aetheric energy density
in the Solar System.
Ostensibly,
since Kepler was an initiate of the Mysteries, he knew that it somehow had to
be right, but he didn't know why it was right - and thus later scholars
considered this model to be a complete failure.
Kepler
believed that the spacing between the shapes would map out the spacings between
the planets, but he could never truly get it to work. We will show the harmonic
functions that are responsible for the planetary positions in Volume III.
Figure 7.1 - Kepler‘s geometric model of the Solar
System.
For one who is more familiar with sacred geometry, it
isn‘t hard to see that Kepler only had a rough knowledge of how the Platonic
Solids actually nested inside of each other. The most obvious problem is that all the Solids are
“sitting up, ” with the same north-south axis, when in
fact they should have discrete angular rotations in comparison to each other.
As
one example, the tetrahedron should nest inside of the cube so that its edge
‘elements‘ run exactly along the faces of the cube, the tips of the tetrahedron
lining up directly with the tips of the cube. Then, the shape immediately
inside of the tetrahedron should be the octahedron, then the cuboctahedron
inside the octahedron.
So,
Kepler definitely gets an “A ” for effort, but with
more modern techniques for analysis we can see that there are mistakes in this
model - and ultimately he gave up on it out of frustration.
Again,
knowing what we now know about Atlantis, it is very, very unlikely that he
would have simply come up with this burning passion for such an idea on his own
- especially if he didn‘t fully understand why he was doing it.
If
we look back to Lawlor‘s quotation that we cited above, he mentions the
mathematical progressions of phi, square root of phi and square root of 2 as
the basic harmonic building block ratios that make up geometry, color and
music. (We will go into detail about this aspect of the Platonic Solids in
Chapter 13.)
Lawlor‘s
book gives a wealth of information to show how these basic vibratory ratios
emerge in all forms of life throughout nature, governing such things as the
growth of shells, plants and even the proportions of the human body. (In Volume
III we will go into much more detail about the connection between biology and
aetheric energy.)
In
Sacred Geometry, Lawlor also shows repeated examples of Renaissance artwork
that explored these sacred ratios, so it is clear that sacred geometry was a
topic of great interest within the intelligentsia of the day.
Again,
there is ample evidence that those painters who incorporated these ratios into
their artwork were inheritors of the Atlantean Mysteries; surprise, surprise.
Up
until this point, we have tackled the Platonic Solids in two basic ways:
1. They emerge within a sphere of
vibrating fluid, or aether.
2. They are geometric forms created in
the stresses between “node points ” on the sphere‘s
surface.
Things
get a little trickier once we realize that spirals such as phi, the square root
of 2, 3 and 5 are also emanating from the center of the sphere. As Lawlor said,
these basic spirals determine the relationships between the different Platonic
Solids. In order to explain this, we have to arrange it in a logical sequence.
1. Earlier, we showed how the Platonic
Solids fit inside of each other. We can indeed build up the Hindu model in such
a way as to have the entire Octave nested together into one giant series of
nested spheres. So, we start by arranging all of these shapes inside of each
other in their Octave order, like a jigsaw puzzle.
2. Then, we plot out where the vertices,
tips or points of each shape are. With computer modeling, we could actually
remove the shapes and just look at the points.
3. When we see just the points without
being confused by the surrounding geometry, we discover that they give us
perfect coordinates to show spirals that are emanating out from the center of
the entire onionlike “nest ” of spheres. These spirals
are based on phi and the square roots of 2, 3 and
4. Since we can clearly plot out these
spirals, they obviously are “real ” energetic
structures, which precisely determine how the Platonic Solids “grow ” from one
into another. Just as a train will naturally follow wherever the train tracks
curve, so too will the geometries naturally grow into the positions that the
spirals create for them. Everything works together in perfect harmony.
5. The Russian research tells us that
“torsion waves, ” or waves in the aether, are always
spiraling in their form. Therefore, we can state with confidence that these
spirals are indeed one form of torsion waves.
6. In the Law of One series, Ra says
that the evolution of consciousness through the Octave of densities proceeds
along “the upward spiraling line of light. ” They also
introduce the concept of nested spheres of energy density, pulsating movements
and Platonic geometry.
7. Therefore, it is clear that Ra
expressed deep knowledge of how this geometry actually works, which Carla
Rueckert herself was still not aware of when we co-presented with her on the
same stage in Louisville, KY in May of 2002. She confessed that they had hit a
“total brick wall ” in trying to understand what Ra
was talking about when they mentioned the “spiraling line of light ” - a
conceptual block that had persisted for literally 20 years before she heard
Wilcock‘s solution to the puzzle - which he gained by his own follow-up work
with Ra, primarily through dreams and visions.
It
has long been our contention that straight lines essentially represent the
masculine polarity of energy in the Universe, and that the spiraling lines
represent the feminine polarity. Both are equally important for Creation to
exist, and they are indeed unified by the sphere, or the Oneness.
Without
the spiraling feminine lines in place for support, the masculine geometry could
not build and grow. There are some very deep philosophical ideas about the
relationship between the universal masculine and feminine principles that can
be found by meditating on this arrangement, such as how the love of a woman can
nurture and support a man.
This
may well be another layer of why the Vedic scholars had the god Purusha and the
goddess Prakriti as the central figures of their system of sacred geometry.
Perhaps
the reader is still having trouble visualizing how these straight and curving
lines interact with each other. In Figure 7.2, the diagram on the left shows us
the nautilus shell, which is one of the best ways that Nature naturally
demonstrates the “phi ” spiral to us.
The
diagram on the right shows the mathematical progression of the same spiral, and
how it forms a framework for the geometry of six triangles. These triangles
could be seen either as expanding outward or as coagulating inward, depending
on your perception.
Each
triangle is related to its immediate neighbor by the phi ratio, meaning that if
you compare the surface area of one triangle into the next larger triangle, you
will get a proportion of roughly 1:1.618 between them. This is a relatively
basic and well-known mathematical principle.
|
|
Figure 7.2 - The Nautilus shell (L) and phi spiral as
it relates to the growth of triangles (R).
Now
when we look at the triangle diagram on the right, we can imagine that the
tight center of the spiral would represent the center of the sphere. Then, we
would see the spiral as coming out from the center.
The
smallest triangle would be the geometry in the center, and then with each
larger triangle we are moving closer to the outside surface of the sphere.
Since
most of the Platonic Solids have triangular faces, the next step would be to
visualize how there could be multiple spirals emanating in different directions
from the center of the sphere at once, all forming a collective matrix for the
geometries to expand through.
This
is somewhat like how an inflating soap bubble is held in place by a plastic
ring and expands as greater and greater air is blown into it.
Next,
we will bring in another quote from Lawlor‘s Sacred Geometry, which deals with
the work of Dr. Hans Jenny, showing the important effect that he has had on the
field. Thankfully, for the lay reader we have already explained Jenny‘s
experiments in far simpler language than what Lawlor uses here:
It is in the work of Hans Jenny [Ph.D.]
that we can begin to see the relationship of form and sound in the physical
world. Jenny‘s experiments have shown that sound frequencies have the propensity to call into arrangement
random, suspended particles, or to organize emulsions in
hydro-dynamic dispersion [i.e. particles floating in a fluid] into orderly, formal, periodic patterns.
In other words, sound is an instrument
through which temporal frequency patterns [i.e. patterns in time, such as the
number of cycles per second] can become formal spatial and geometric patterns. [emphasis added]
That
paragraph is a mouthful, with very technical wording, but it has all that we
need. Again, Dr. Jenny‘s research, known as Cymatics, discusses what happens to
particles floating in a solution when they are vibrated by sound waves; the
particles mysteriously assemble themselves into geometric shapes.
Figure
7.3 shows us this “Cymatic ” force in action, and the
Platonic geometry inside is easily seen. In this case, it is the harmonic of
the fourth density, namely the two interpenetrating tetrahedra in a spherical
field.
With
Jenny's work we can clearly see the spiraling lines that underlie the
geometries, as well as the “spheres within spheres ”
effect, as there are at least three major boundary areas that you could draw a
circle around in this image.
In
a private conversation with sacred geometry researcher Gregg Braden in April
2002, we were informed that all of the Platonic Solids could be modeled from
this formation, which is why so much attention has been given to it.
It
is easy to see the five-sided faces of the dodecahedron inside the central
star, as one example. The image is still slightly “off ”
because the fluid was not a true sphere, but rather a droplet of water on a
vibrating wave-plate.
Figure 7.3 - One of many geometric structures formed
by Dr. Hans Jenny‘s “Cymatics ” research, using a
vibrating drop of fluid with particles suspended inside.
So,
Dr. Jenny‘s research puts the final word in on the importance of the geometric
shapes in the sphere, in case we doubted their relation to the Octaves of color
(i.e. visible light) and sound.
The
ratios of phi and the square root of 2 are also responsible for the difference
between the various tones in the Octave, when measured as values of vibration
in cycles per second. You can take one note in the Octave and compare it to the
note next to it, and the two notes will always relate by one of these simple “spiraling ” ratios.
Therefore,
we can now see that even though it seems strange at first, every sound truly
has a three-dimensional, geometric component. The same would be true for every
color. Some people, including this author, have been able to perceive this
connection automatically in mystical states of consciousness, without
necessarily understanding the vision.
Many
people who have had these visions send us email with great relief that they
have finally understood why they were seeing such formations in their mind‘s
eye.
As
reported by Drs. William Becker and Bethe Hagens in their article “The
Planetary Grid: A New Synthesis, ” Dr. Hans Jenny‘s
crucial research was originally inspired by students of physicist Buckminster
Fuller, who demonstrated the geometric structure of vibration within a fluid
system.
Fuller‘s
students created an experiment where a transparent spherical balloon was
submerged in a bath of dye. They found that by simply vibrating the balloon at
an even tone, the dye would well up in the areas where there was the least
amount of movement on the skin of the balloon - i.e. the node points.
We
remember that all of the vibrations will “cancel out ”
in these areas, thus forming points of force that connect to form the Platonic
Solids. Although most of what Fuller‘s students perceived were the nodes or the
tips of these geometries, in certain cases faint lines could be seen connecting
the nodes together, literally forming these same shapes right in front of their
eyes.
Dr.
Jenny wanted to find an even more direct and effective way to show this force
at work, and he certainly succeeded quite admirably.
It
is quite apparent that outside forces are diligently trying to help us
understand and acknowledge the existence of this universal harmonic system,
because of its significance to our civilization. Crop circles appear to be one
of the most fundamental means by which the geometries involved in these
harmonic systems are being conveyed to us.
It
is marvelous to have such a directly scientific form of communication from
beings of higher intelligence available to us in the public domain. What we see
is an image of very large size that is created in a popular and accessible
area, which obviously attracts a great deal of attention.
Many
of these formations clearly show that they could not have been “hoaxed, ” though there are many good-quality hoaxes out there as
well - and we will explain the difference.
Though
most researchers and observers do not really understand what these bizarre
images are showing us, there are a few who have done quite well. Indeed, it is
the work of mathematician Gerald Hawkins that inadvertently set out an entire
theoretical framework for our discussion.
Hawkins
discovered an enormous repetition of mathematical diagrams of “consciousness units ” without even realizing that this is what he had
found. Hawkins knew that most of the geometric formations seen in crop
formations were somehow incorporated into a circle.
Though
the circle was occasionally hidden with other images, he discovered that nearly
all of the early 1990‘s crop formations would take simple forms such as the
triangle, square and hexagon and put them inside circles. As we shall see,
these could certainly represent simplified “sketches ”
of three-dimensional shapes in many cases.
Hawkins
discovered something extraordinary when he took the surface area of the circles
in the formations and divided it against the area of the square, triangle or
hexagon that would be located inside.
The
relationships between these numbers are the diatonic ratios, or the actual
vibrational frequencies that make up the tones in the octave. In other words,
these simple flat crop circles eloquently display musical frequencies.
Since
the musical octave is interchangeable with the light spectrum, the Circlemakers
appear to be giving us the exact same clues we have already been exploring - a
common link between sound, music and geometry.
The
importance of this find cannot be underestimated. Hawkins surprised everyone in
the crop circle community by showing a completely new set of “geometric theorems ” -- namely that the basic square, triangle and
hexagon produced musical ratios when placed within circles.
This
mathematical work even attracted the attention of mainstream academics. But the
implications behind this fundamental discovery never seemed to appear in Hawkins‘ work; he thought that the main purpose behind the
Circlemakers‘ designs was that they were trying to illustrate these geometric
theorems simply to draw interest and get us to "solve" the puzzles.
On
the surface this looks good, as by showing us a simple mathematical system of
geometry and music that we did not yet understand, "their" higher
intelligence is displayed. But why would they waste so much energy just making
theorems for a few obscure mathematicians to decode?
Indeed,
the idea that they are simply theorems doesn‘t quite seem to be enough; the
theorems must be there to show us something that is much more fundamental, a
form of universal law.
These
Circlemakers would obviously want to create information that would have a very
practical use, given the universal emphasis that Hawkins demonstrates that they
have received in the mysterious crop circle portfolio.
To
anyone who doubts that repeated examples of "consciousness units" in
the crops exist, please visit www.cropcircleconnector.com,
and check the photo archives therein. Or, any other source that shows pictures
of crop circles will do equally well, as literally almost every formation
attempts to convey the same basic information.
So,
what the Circlemakers actually were doing was showing us a simple sketch of the
architecture of the universe, as we have now been exploring it. The 2D
geometries of circles and triangles quite naturally can be expanded into 3D spheres
and tetrahedra.
As
Fuller demonstrated with his vibrating ink-filled balloon and Jenny
demonstrated with a simple solution in water, the musical and geometric ratios
of the octave are still preserved when we blow out our diagrams to 3D.
Thus,
most of the flat crop circle diagrams that show these basic shapes are simply
blueprints for designs that are obviously much more complicated to render;
designs that are drawn to indicate three dimensions.
And
since we visualize these crystalline geometric energies as three-dimensional
shapes, there should be an example where the Circlemakers did in fact try to
render an accurate picture of a “consciousness unit ”
such as a tetrahedron within a sphere.
Miraculously,
there is such a rendering, and this formation still stands as one of the most
fantastic ever to be impressed into the English countryside. This image has
stirred up massive amounts of interest and research, including that of Joe
Mason, the researcher who first introduced the author of this book to the “Breath
of the Divine ” and Consciousness Units.
From
all of the evidence, we will show that although the American media and
metaphysical / UFO community has largely turned a blind eye to the entire phenomenon, there is much, much more to it than a series of
successive hoaxes.
THE REAL STORY OF THE CROP CIRCLES
In
the movie Contact, which many of us have seen,
satellite engineers who were looking for messages from the Beyond tuned in to a
radio frequency that was being beamed out from the star Vega. Once decoding the
signal, it first provided personal information about us; namely our first
televised broadcast, which happened to be from Nazi Germany.
The
alien signal then proceeded to give a complex series of blueprints. The
scientists puzzled and pored over this information for a long time, and could
not figure out what it meant.
It
was only when the cigar-chomping billionaire in the movie realized that the
flat blueprints needed to be expanded into three dimensions that the meaning
suddenly popped into place -- in this case a cubical matrix of specific images.
Ultimately,
humanity was given a tool that would allow our civilization to have access to
these unseen realms where the Vegans lived. The three-dimensional cube of
images provided blueprints for a concretely physical piece of technology - a
giant set of spinning rings that created a spherical ball of light in their
center, which then opened up a wormhole through space and time.
Carl
Sagan was obviously tapping into the collective unconscious when he first wrote
his book about this fictional SETI discovery, which the movie was based on.
However, we don't need SETI at all; the Extraterrestrials are already here on
Earth, and we have already been given the blueprints that the movie refers to.
Furthermore,
there are uncanny parallels between Sagan‘s machine that the Vegans designed
and the way in which we might expect a giant “consciousness unit
” to look; a giant, wildly pulsating sphere where lines can be made out
inside.
The
pod itself in the movie was a sphere with a dodecahedron superimposed over it
-- the actual geometry of the sixth dimension. Perhaps Sagan and the makers of
the movie were aware of more than they outwardly alluded to, and there is
evidence from Dr. Richard Boylan that Sagan was on a "black-ops"
scientific team and payroll.
The
more we think about it, the more it all fits together. In Contact, this giant
machine was the entryway into something that was surprisingly similar to what
we might expect Ascension to be like; a dramatic shift to a different frequency
of energy, and a heavenlike new world emerging.
So,
Sagan's work falls perfectly in line with the idea of obtaining information
from the Collective Unconscious; many science fiction writers such as Arthur C.
Clarke have inadvertently predicted future events and technologies.
So,
just as Contact postulated a set of diagrams and blueprints from
extraterrestrials, the crop circle phenomenon gives us the same thing in true
reality. Indeed, it has been going on continuously in Europe since at least
1976.
What
we now have is a huge library of cryptic visual images that do not appear to
have been solely generated by humans. The case is similar to the rediscovery of
Egyptian hieroglyphics; scientists knew they had to mean something, but they were
at a loss to crack the code until the discovery of the infamous Rosetta Stone.
This
clay document showed a set of identical writings in Greek, Aramaic and in
hieroglyphics, and since the researchers understood the Greek, they were able
to decode the hieroglyphs. The Rosetta stone for crop circles is geometry,
mathematics, symbol and metaphor.
The
American and European corporate media very carefully indoctrinated us with the
belief that these magnificent designs were the work of Doug and Dave: “two
portly English gentlemen, a few pints of beer, a funny cap, and a string and board ”.
According
to the legend, these delightfully mischievous old chaps took great pleasure in
taking time off from work, getting trashed all night and sneaking out to farms
all across the English countryside.
In
their mirthful stupor, with the ingenuous tactic of wooden planks for shoes and
long strings for a giant compass of sorts, they joyfully stumbled about,
stamping down fantastic geometric shapes overnight, occasionally doubling over
in laughter at their cleverness.
Their
portfolio includes perfectly executed depictions of fractal mathematical
equations such as the Mandlebrot Set, the Julia Set and the Koch Snowflake.
They would plan the next fractal over the stench of thick brown beer, as
toothless mouths excitedly spouted new ways to display advanced theoretical
mathematics graphically.
How,
then, does the debunking media explain that this also has happened literally
all over the planet? India alone recently announced the appearance and
cataloging of some 10,000 crop formations since the 1970‘s, and circles have
appeared in almost every major country on the globe, whether in rice paddies,
grain crops, mud, dry lake beds or even ice.
In
the "Awakening to Zero Point" videotape, Gregg Braden shows an image
of a spiral formation that actually emerged in an underwater sandbar. Despite
all of these appearances, there are literally only a handful of American
websites that are fully authorized to display these images, and all we have from
India as of Feb. 98 are line drawings of three formations.
The
astounding complexity of the most recent batch of formations from summer 1997,
98 and 99 defies even the most hardened scientific minds from explaining them
away. The old-fashioned explanations of “localized plasma vortices
” or “an army of hedgehogs running round and round ” simply do not hold
weight.
In
most true crop circles, the stems are usually bent at the growth nodes, not broken,
and they exhibit measurable radiation and signs of being heated. This has led
most serious crop circle researchers to conclude that they were formed by some
sort of microwave radiation that cooked the joints.
This
cooking turns the water in the crop into steam, which causes the growth nodes
to become pliable and bend. (Hessemann, 1996 and others.)
Indeed,
seeds and plant fragments are often found that look as though they have been
burned in a microwave oven. But how could you possibly use heat on something
like dry grass and expect it not to torch up on you? I
nterestingly enough, large amounts of nearby underground water
have been known to spontaneously disappear after a circle is formed. This fact
has been confirmed through the use of infrared photography by the crop circle
researchers.
It
certainly appears that the water was being drawn out of the land to keep the
fragile crops from burning. No known microwave technology exists that could be
beamed and executed with such precision, forming beautiful patterns, while
simultaneously drawing upon underground water as a coolant (CCC website.)
Desperately
grasping for a more comfortable solution to these radiation mysteries than the
notion of extraterrestrials or some similar outside intelligence, we could
propose a top-secret government project.
This
would mean that someone is obviously making a tremendously secret effort to get
us to decode these shapes; yet all documented covert government involvement
seems geared towards discrediting and / or hoaxing the phenomenon.
This
can be seen in the total denial in American media that this is happening at
all, even in the many X-Files-type television programs and documentaries, as we
previously mentioned. I
t
is as though one of the most fantastic communications from the realm of the
spiritual forces has completely left Americans in the dust, through their
apathy and simple belief in what they are told by the authority figures in the
media.
It
goes without saying that numerous crop circle formations have been directly
correlated with phenomena such as UFO sightings and dogs going crazy the night
before. Thus, they do not simply “show up; ” the
evidence points to the fact that outside forces are involved.
It
would appear that the natural tendency would be for the UFO cover-up to
continue, and it is amazing how well of a job "they" are doing. Even
legitimate UFO researchers with great interest in the field have often turned
deaf ears to the discoveries from the crop circle camp.
Furthermore,
since the crop circle researchers have strict copyrights and controls on any
outside display of their pictures, very few people have actually seen what is
going on out there with any serious level of redundancy.
Furthermore,
there are clear indications that someone is handsomely paying people such as
our drunk and friendly English gentlemen Doug and Dave to lie. Every year there
are a greater number of sophomoric, manmade crop circles in an attempt to make
the entire phenomenon appear to be fabricated.
Even
some well-versed metaphysical friends of this author have hissed, "Ah,
it's a bunch of college kids" when presented with the topic. Doug and Dave
were cut to pieces in interviews where they were asked how they duplicated
various forms, openly admitting that they were not responsible.
The
fake crop circles can usually be spotted almost immediately upon first glance,
as they generally lack the sharp edges and incredible mathematical perfection
of the true formations.
There
are other, more scientific ways to spot a "real" formation as well,
which we shall discuss in a moment. We therefore should not run from an
unsolved puzzle that appears to be coming from an outside intelligence.
Historically
speaking, the crop circle phenomena have just gotten better and better every
year. They started in the late 70‘s and early 80‘s as nothing more than
gigantic, perfectly round circle shapes.
Then,
in the mid-1980‘s, “agriglyphs ” began appearing,
which were straight-line formations that connected two or three circles
together in various designs. The formation we will be discussing, Barbury
Castle 1991, was one of the first major departures from these agriglyphs; it
ushered in an entirely new era of complexity in the formations.
This
was the Mother of All Crop Circles: a formation that appeared literally
overnight, and was of fantastic size -- 31,680 square feet.
The
impeccable quality of this image clearly illustrated that it was really meant
to catch our attention. One of the first things noticed was that the square
footage of the object, 31680, was the number given in the Bible for the size
dimensions of the New Jerusalem.
John
Michell writes about this in great detail in his books. The New Jerusalem was
written of as being the city that represented the “Golden Age
” to come after the return of the Messiah; and the number 31680 was
intended to be profoundly symbolic, indicating a dimensional shift, if you
will, into a whole new kingdom that was much closer to Divine Light.
The
number 31680 appears in another form directly related to the New Jerusalem, and
that is in the harmonic, vibrational science of gematria that we had mentioned.
If
you vibrate air at 3168 times per second, you will create a musical tone, and
therefore the number can be directly transposed into a dimensional "energy
density" in our harmonic aether system as well.
Early
Church fathers working with these sacred numbers declared the number 3168 to be
the number of Jesus Christ. Thus, by removing the zero from 31680 to get its
harmonic equivalent in 3168, which can be done in the base-ten counting system,
we have another allusion to a Messianic message of some sort, plus a flagging
of the same "harmonic numbers" we have mentioned here before.
And
so, with the exact footage corresponding to the number for Jesus Christ, the
coded message in the formation might very well be “The messianic revival of the
Christ, ushering in the New Jerusalem, the age of heaven on earth. ”
This
starts to make even more sense when we discover that the combined area of the
three circles on the outside of the diagram have the exact same area as the
inner circle. This gives us a further meaning, which could be seen as “Three in
One. ”
According
to Joe Mason among others, this appears to be an allusion to the view of
Creation held in Christianity as the Trinity, in Egypt as Osiris / Isis / Seth,
and in many other similar world mythologies including Buddhism.
The
Gnostic Christian diagram shown here clearly indicates that the concept of the
Trinity was directly associated with a tetrahedral "frequency object"
that Jesus was pictured as holding in his hands.
The
metaphor was further strengthened by the fact that he was given three faces.
These three faces hold remarkable similarity to Hindu and Buddhist designs. S
o
what exactly is this trinity, anyway, and why did the Gnostics want to
associate it with the hyperdimensional geometry that we have been
investigating?
This
‘three in One‘ concept quite literally means that from the One springs the Two,
duality, such as male and female, yin and yang, light and dark, et cetera,
which then generates the Three, expressed as the beginning of life and matter.
More
simply, according to mythology historian Joseph Campbell, this triple design
would represent the archetypal idea of the Father, the Mother, and the
androgynous son.
These
three principles are the fundamental archetypes that make up all of our
personalities, the Father being the active principle, the Mother being the
intuitive principle, and the Son being the fusion of these elements into the
life experience.
[The
Holy Sprit is not generally referred to as a mother “god ”
in Christianity, but great evidence supports the fact that this is the
archetype.]
These
could also be seen as the three syllables in the Hindu AUM, the word intended
to convey the total nature of Creation as a sound vibration; the A being the
Father, U being the Mother, and M being the Mahem, man, or Son.
It
is outside of the present scope of this book to delve further into this
particular discussion at this point, but Joe Mason has written numerous
articles on these topics, and his knowledge on the subject certainly piqued and
expanded the author‘s interest. Mason's writings are on his and Dolores
Finney's website, www.greatdreams.com.
So
far, we have a message that could be taken to be very Christian in origin, with
the Messianic revival, the New Jerusalem and the Trinity or Three-in-One; but
we also have the harmonic geometry of the next dimension above our own, which
it appears that we are now moving into.
From
Joe Mason, we get another point regarding this symbol that is not usually
discussed. It now appears that the exact day when it was formed was intended to
convey powerful symbolic meaning as well.
Genesis
8:4 describes the Ark of the Covenant as appearing on the seventeenth day of
the seventh month. Interestingly, it
was on July 17th that this all-important formation appeared!
Therefore, through careful timing it seems that someone wants us to view this
all-important symbol as the Ark.
So
what exactly is the Ark of the Covenant, you ask? In the Bible it is referred
to as a coffin-shaped golden object that possessed tremendous power for those
who knew how to harness it. Many authors have speculated that it was a
technological device from an extraterrestrial civilization, possibly using
radiation as a source of power.
This
device could produce fabulous power to those who knew how to use it, but it
also could cause great harm.
According
to Bible legends, no one was able to touch the Ark without suffering a fate
that reads very much like electrocution. Therefore, the symbolism of the Ark in
this formation could refer to the fact that the diagram has some sort of
universal secrets contained within it.
The
Ark therefore has vast symbolic importance in Christian myth, representing the
mysterious forces of God being harnessed into manifestation.
Our
original point of entry into the discussion of the tetrahedral shape in Jesus'
hands is how it pertains to our EE units as given by Seth in previous chapters
here. These EE or consciousness units are also the same as the basic geometric
shapes being placed within the sphere.
Our
discussion gets much more interesting as we begin looking at the Barbury shape
itself, and start to notice what it is only slightly hiding from view.
|
|
|
|
Here
we can see that by gradually clipping out different sections, this image
clearly outlines the shape of a four-sided pyramid, or a tetrahedron.
Mathematically, this is the simplest three-dimensional shape that can be made.
As
we have shown, the tetrahedron is the organizing energy that forms the fourth
dimension, which we now appear to be heading into. We can then begin to
understand why Jesus was shown with a tetrahedron in his hands; Jesus could see
the fourth-density energy that forms the Kingdom of the Father.
The
other, even more obvious form of this geometric knowledge expressed in the
Hebrew tradition is the Star of David. This religious symbol is rendered just like
a crop circle, where we have a two-dimensional image that perfectly details the
appearance of the interlocked, or star tetrahedron,
within a sphere.
The
interlocked tetrahedron is an even more accurate depiction of the actual “appearance ” of Fourth Density energy. Remember that in
order for these dimensions to be navigable by entities such as ourselves, there
has to be a simple and perfect order to everything.
This
explains why in Seth‘s readings it said, “We created these cubes to be used as
guides. ” In short, through this geometric ordering,
you can actually see the energy that you are working with. It appears that this
was part of the plan that the One Mind of God originally had for us.
Thus,
the tetrahedron, with all of its symbolic trimmings, illustrates the fourth
dimension as being the “Kingdom of the Father ” that
was promised in the Bible as coming to replace the current "heaven and
earth" that we have right now.
Though
we may never actually “see ” this form in the physical
plane, the foundation structure of all physical matter has already been
“upgrading ” to this frequency in the 20th century.
As
Ra often indicated, it is only the diehard three-dimensionality of so many
humans on Earth that stops our physical environment from already being transformed.
As
one final note for this chapter, we can point out that the design itself was
showing us a dimensional cosmology. If you look back to the photograph, you
will see three circles at the corners of the tetrahedron.
The
first circle has nothing within it but a line extending out to its center
point. This would symbolically illustrate the first dimension, or the point, or
the Oneness. The second circle has a series of spiraling lines, indicating the
"fanning-out" of the point into two dimensions.
This
is the point where motion is introduced, and the basic framework of vibration
for physical existence is first created, as we have already indicated in
previous chapters. Then, our glyph for the third dimension is quadrilateral in
nature.
What
it depicts is the top half of an octahedron, shown in the spiraling, spherical
form of its energies, and we have already seen that the octahedron should
represent the third density or dimension in the Hindu geometric cosmology.
If
we were to make a paper cutout of this form and pull it up from the circle in
the center, we could certainly see the three-dimensionality of this shape. And
here, we have an image that shows exactly how this would work- the
"hidden" shape pops out as though it was always meant to have been there.
So,
what we have in the outer circles is a geometric progression of the first,
second and third dimensions, illustrated for us in a field of wheat. The fourth
dimension is the focal point of the entire formation, represented by the
tetrahedron within the sphere in the center.
The
fact that the three outer circles all add up to the inner circle must also
indicate that this fourth dimension is the summation of all that had occurred
before it. It is also interesting to point out that the crop was extremely
green when this formation was made, indicating the passage to the green-ray
vibrational level of the fourth dimension.
More
recent formations have dramatically indicated even higher-dimensional
geometries such as the cube within a sphere, such as in this immensely
satisfying photograph from Steve Alexander.
This
is the naked truth of our physics model displayed to the world, spheres within
spheres and Platonic Solid geometry, including the depiction of a central axis
for the spherical torus, for “those who have eyes to see. ”
In
the next image, also from 1999, we can see that we were given the idea of the
third-density octahedron being "unwrapped." Some have told us not to
use this image, as there were signs that it was a hoax, but nevertheless we
include it for your consideration:
The
next image is of the "Triple Julia Set" formation from 1996,
represented by the circles, supplemented with a series of straight lines and a
spherical globe around the outside. By adding in these extra lines, we can
perceive the intended hidden message very easily -- a pulsating tetrahedron,
emerging from a center point and ratcheting outward.
We
also see how the curving lines of the formation itself correspond to the lines
seen in the previous image from Dr. Hans Jenny's research with sound frequencies
in water. These curving lines should be visualized as though they were
outward-curling flower petals originating in the center of the diagram:
Crop circle
diagram by Ed and Kris Sherwood, with permission, with added outer sphere.
So with formations such as Barbury Castle and others,
we have seen different hyperdimensional geometries emerging, including
tetrahedra within spheres.
Richard Hoagland and his team, then known as the Mars
Mission, turned their attention towards these formations for that very reason,
as they had found the tetrahedron in their own way -- namely, encoded into
geometric ruins that they found in Viking photographs from Mars.
CHAPTER
08: RICHARD HOAGLAND AND THE MESSAGE OF CYDONIA
In this chapter we go in very specifically to look at the life and research of controversial
frontier scientist Richard Hoagland.
We take a
brief look at the case for there having been a lost civilization on the planet
Mars, building pyramidal structures as well as a gigantic edifice carved into
the shape of a human face.
Most
significantly, we explore how Hoagland's team showed that this entire
"City" complex of formations reveal all of the basic mathematical
principles of the fourth-dimensional phase of the CU -- namely, a tetrahedron
within a sphere.
We can then
see how this knowledge of the physics of the CU is not confined to Earth
civilizations.
As
any reader can discern from Wilcock's personal data, a profound and
life-changing event occurred when he was a sophomore in college, during the
year 1993. David had a friend who was told by his physics professor, in no
uncertain terms, that UFOs were real, and that we had reverse-engineered their
technology.
Some
of the data and details were similar to the material that was later released by
Colonel Phillip Corso in 1997, in the book The
Day After Roswell. Corso's book, which
also discusses reverse-engineered ET technology, provided an excellent
validation of the facts that David had initially received.
David
was deeply and permanently transformed by receiving this information. He
decided that the only possible choice he had was to devote his entire life to
understanding and explaining this phenomena, as nothing else could possibly be
more important.
This
personal transformation took place over a few weeks, as he walked around and
interacted in daily college life. With the new knowledge of the reality of the
UFO phenomenon, everything was changed forever, in an irreversible manner.
There
was no going back to the way he had looked at the world before; it was a
complete "paradigm shift." The weight of evidence threatened to burst
forth from him wherever he went.
The
people around him now seemed like puppets in a gigantic, cosmic shell game,
manipulated by an invisible hand they would never see, much less even imagine.
The world governments were jealously guarding the greatest revelation in the
history of humanity as college students sucked on "cancer sticks" in
the Food Court.
When
he tried to tell them what was going on, their emotions ranged everywhere from
terror to ecstasy to rage. One person even asked him with deadpan seriousness
if he was a member of a cult. Obviously, he tended to favor those whose
reactions were ecstatic.
A
few months after the initial discovery, the same friend again visited David,
only this time the information added fantastic new dimensions to what had
already been said.
David's
beliefs had already stretched quite a bit in order to allow the reality of
extraterrestrial life to sink in, so he was very eager to learn more. This new
era of revelation came when his friend was given a copy of the Richard Hoagland
/ Mars Mission Briefing to the United Nations in 1992 as a gift from his
grandmother.
This
videotape was a complete summary of the research being done by Hoagland's team,
then known as the Mars Mission, regarding "The
Monuments of Mars" or "The Martian Enigmas." It was a videotape
of a live presentation given directly to the United Nations on their own turf -- so obviously, this information was
attracting some attention.
By
now, most people are aware that an enigma of sorts exists. The Mariner 1 probe
photographed unmistakable tetrahedral pyramidlike forms back in 1971, referred
to as the Elysium Pyramids. This in turn spurred research at SRI International
with remote viewing, involving JJ Hurtak, Ingo Swann and others.
This
was the very first phase of consciousness-related work that suggested that a
civilization had been there. This work was later included and enhanced in
Hurtak's epic work Keys of Enoch, which pre-empted Robert Bauval's discovery of
the Orion-Giza connection by more than fifteen years.
Then,
in 1976, the Viking Orbiter 1 satellite was photographing of the Martian
surface, and on the thirty-fifth pass over the lunar surface, frame 35A76, the
apparent visage of a human face stares up blankly from the surrounding desert.
From
what little can be made out in the unenhanced original, it appears to be a
giant formation of rock, hardened lava or sand in some form or another.
The
NASA scientists at the time dismissed it out of hand, and did not prioritize
any further time with the Viking probe to photograph it before the probe
"died", running out of its limited fuel supply. They simply could not
accept that it was anything other than a curious and unimportant Martian
feature.
The
"face" image would lie uninvestigated for years as situations
developed that would eventually bring the reality of its existence to the
masses. True, NASA did release fuzzy photographs of it early along, and David
remembered seeing it in copies of Odyssey Magazine, an astronomy journal for
young people, when he was in second grade.
He
remembers being completely shocked the first time he saw it, and felt that there
was some fantastic truth out there waiting to be discovered. Richard Hoagland
fulfilled this task, and may well be the single most important historical
figure in alerting the public to these enigmas.
In
1965, at the age of only nineteen, when most young people were still chasing
after the opposite sex and enjoying their newfound freedom to drink beer
legally, Hoagland became curator of the Springfield, Massachusetts Museum of
Science.
Obviously
Hoagland was a "boy genius" of astronomy to have secured a job like
this at his age. His creativity and desire to "think big" led him to
design and produce a giant commemorative event for Mariner 4's flyby of Mars --
the first time that our species had sent a probe to another planet in the Solar
System. He had an audience of 2000 people at the museum, and 5000 more press
and scientists watching at JPL in Pasadena, California.
Clearly
this was no small feat for a man at an age where most people are lacking in
self-confidence or knowledge of what they really plan on doing with their
lives. Then, when Hoagland was only 20, he served as a consultant to NBC
regarding the first soft-landing of a human-built probe on the lunar surface.
Subsequent
opportunities emerged, leading to a spot on The Tonight Show among other things.
This is the obvious reason for why Hoagland did not pursue "higher
education;" he was already at the cutting edge.
Then,
in 1968, after another "good move" in Hoagland's career by becoming
Assistant Director of Gengras Science Center and Planetarium in West Hartford,
CT, Walter Cronkite took him in as a consultant to CBS News. This gave him the
unique position of explaining the science behind the Apollo missions to the
American public at age 22.
By
1971, he had been involved in several other prestigious efforts, and with Eric
Burgess, he designed the famous engraved plaque designed to tell other species
of intelligent life what we look like and where we live. Carl Sagan was able to
make it happen and get it mounted on Voyager, and acknowledged their effort in
the academic journal Science.
Then,
according to his introduction in Monuments of Mars, "Since 1971 Hoagland
has held a number of editorial, managerial, and consulting positions in the
space-science world." In the January 1980 issue of Star & Sky, Hoagland
set forth his "Europa Proposal," where he cited evidence of water ice
on Europa as leading towards what editor Terry
Dickinson called "The first new plausible location for life in the Solar
System in ten years."
Then,
in 1981, Hoagland went to a conference in Boulder, Colorado, and there he met
Vincent DiPietro and Greg Molenaar. DiPietro is the one who needs to take the
claim of being the first to actually devote serious attention and intellectual
study to the Face on Mars.
His
career is as an electrical engineer, focused in digital electronics and image
processing. He had first seen the Face in a magazine of "extraterrestrial
archeology" and promptly dismissed it as a hoax. It would take two and a
half more years before he would again come across the photograph while he was
searching through the NASA archives of the Viking images.
Soon
Greg Molenaar was also brought in on the game, equally fascinated by this
enigmatic object staring up from the picture frame. Molenaar is a computer
scientist with a similar background as DiPietro, and they were both good
friends and colleagues by this point.
Together,
they strove to improve the resolution of the Martian face image, and this
eventually led them to design a pixel-by-pixel image enhancing process called
"Starburst Pixel Interleaving Technique" or SPIT. This technique
paved the way for their realization that the Face was indeed symmetrical; the
SPIT processing brought out details on the shadowed side of the photograph that
would otherwise be impossible to see.
Later
they would discover an additional frame of interest, 70A13. This provided them
with more detail that was vital to their investigation. Among other things,
70A13 directly paved the way to the discovery of a gigantic five-sided
pyramidal object that was situated in very close proximity to the Face, a mere
ten miles to the southwest.
This
object was later dubbed the "D&M Pyramid" in their honor. The
SPIT processing showed that this object was of fantastic interest, almost certainly
artificial due to its amazing geometric structure.
Furthermore,
they became aware of a large Egyptian-style pyramidal object that was also
approximately ten miles due west of the Face. This sharp-edged, symmetrical
pyramid also was surrounded by a host of other roughly pyramidal mounds
gathered closely together, and hence the whole area was named "The
City."
The
appearance of this one particular enigmatic object on the Martian sands is
literally identical to aerial photographs of the Great Pyramid. In the
following image, Hoagland's team included the arrow on the original to indicate
how the Face would have been viewed from a series of four mounds in the center
of the city itself.
The
gigantic pyramid cannot be missed, directly above the arrow, flanked by what
appear to be two significantly smaller pyramids, one to its western corner and
one to its northwestern corner. Other enigmatic formations including "The
Fort," to the east of the giant pyramid, can be seen as well, and it is
possible that the entire area is a series of pyramids, most obscured by sand
buildup.
The
most recent NASA photographs have only increased the resolution of this area,
but this was never even discussed in the mainstream media with any seriousness
until 2000, with the release of the Mission to Mars film from the Disney corporation.
Although
Hoagland was presented with this material in 1981, he took no further action
upon it until 1983. (Keep in mind that by this point, the Ra contact had
already ended and questioner Don Elkins would soon die.
Nevertheless,
we will see how Ra spoke of this ancient Martian civilization later in our
discussion.) This polite refusal to pay attention was the typical reaction from
the scientific community, which stymied any effort made to get this material
out to the public.
Hoagland
eventually got back in touch with DiPietro and Molenaar as a direct result of
his own work on "The Thing in Saturn's Rings," a large object that
emitted very high levels of radio frequency for no apparent reason.
As
he refined his search, Hoagland was attracted to the edge of the rings, where
he could barely make out a series of small satellites, or objects, which might
provide a further clue to the mystery.
(It
is good to note here that after Hoagland dropped the ball on the "Thing in
the Rings," Richard Boylan, Ph.D., [who strongly suggests that it is an
extraterrestrial spacecraft of some sort, due to its erratic maneuvers and
enigmatic properties,] picked it back up.)
Hoagland
was interested in DiPietro and Molenaar for their knowledge of image enhancement.
He wanted them to process the images of the enigmas in Saturn's rings, but his
agenda would soon change.
The
researchers mailed him much more recent, updated versions of the photographs
and their analyses, and while he studied them at home, it finally hit him with
the arresting force of a planetary collision. Says Hoagland in Monuments:
I realized that I was looking at
something that was either a complete waste of time, or
the most important discovery of the twentieth century if not of our entire existence
on Earth.
Hoagland
quickly took DiPietro and Molenaar on board and formed "The Mars
Mission." This was not to say that it was easy for Hoagland to acclimate
to the possible reality of this data; in his own words, he was "dragged
kicking and screaming" to the truth of such an incredible postulate. But
slowly and gradually, the pieces started fitting together.
Hoagland
himself made important contributions to the data, including the discovery of
the "Fort," situated directly northeast of the Egyptian-styled
pyramid and "City" as we have just shown. It is quite clear to see
that the "Fort" is a highly geometric object in the image.
It
looks exactly like two adjoining sides of a square building with a center
courtyard, connected together at a near-perfect 90-degree angle. More recent
photographs have indicated that what appeared to be a courtyard is actually an
upward-slanting mound that cast a shadow, but even in the new images the clear
geometry of this formation can be seen.
Furthermore,
the placement and positioning of the "Fort" makes it a prime piece of
real estate to directly observe the Face from one edge and the five-sided
D&M Pyramid from the other.
Hoagland
continued to make discoveries, including the fact that the Face was positioned
with a great deal of ritual significance. The sunrise on the Equinox would
occur directly behind the Face, and a mound of earth many miles to the east of
the Face seemed to serve as a means to deflect glare and make this Sunrise even
more sudden and powerful to behold.
In
short, all the pieces were fitting together that suggested that this was a lot
more than just a bunch of "stuff." It was, for all intents and
purposes, a stunning looking glass into a mysterious and unknown past, on a
planet in our Solar System that was not "supposed" to have life on
it.
Another
"multidimensional shift" in progress would come in 1988 with the
addition of Erol Torun to the Mars Mission. Torun was an expert cartographer
from the United States' own Defense Mapping Agency. Torun's job was to insure
that he could tell the difference between a sand dune and a camouflaged enemy
bunker.
The
best way to determine if an object was artificial was by applying fractal
mathematics to the image, and Torun was an expert in just that. Using fractals,
Torun could measure the degree of irregularity and change present within any
object in a landscape.
An
artificial object would receive a much higher "score" than a natural
one, due to the degree of sudden changes present within it. Torun soon
discerned that the Face and City areas were by far the most highly fractalized,
or random, areas of the entire vicinity.
Torun's
work proved of inestimable value to the mission. He was the first to
"orthographically rectify" the Viking images. What this means to the
lay person is that Torun applied his exacting scientific protocols to turn the
frames in question into maps, with precision coordinates properly aligned North to South.
This
presented everyone involved in the investigation with an opportunity to make
exacting measurements of the placement of different objects in the Cydonia
region. But nothing could prepare them for the discoveries they would soon
make.
Within
a very short time, the evidence mounted to indicate that one of the main
functions of this City was to give an encoded, geometric "message" to
its future discoverers.
As
is explained in great detail in Monuments of Mars, as well as Hoagland's site, www.enterprisemission.com, the
brunt of this message centered around the ratio of two fundamental mathematical
constants; namely "e" and "pi."
The
constant "e" comes from the study of exponents in trigonometry; it is
a value that preserves symmetry in calculations where using exponents to a
power of 10 would disturb it. We already know that "pi" represents
the circumference of a circle when its diameter is a unit of 1.
In
the Martian city, there is a repeated suggestion to mathematically divide these
two values together. The "e/pi ratio," when expressed as a numerical
value, comes out to approximately 0.865.
With
almost ceaseless repetition, pairs of adjoining measurements in Cydonia would
have this same exact ratio between them. The most common of all was the angle
relationship of 22.5 degrees to 19.5 degrees.
Without
much delay, the Mars Mission team realized that these angles and ratios were
demonstrating something much larger than they could have ever imagined. They
seemed to illustrate, in Hoagland's words,
..."the fabric of Reality" -
how Matter, Time and Energy are woven into the tapestry of Everything...
from stars... to planets... to atoms... to living systems... to Intelligence
itself....
"Cydonia" turns out to be
""nothing less than an architectural affirmation of the fundamental
physics of the Universe - the ultimate embodiment of a grand, "universal
Architecture"... at the most archetypal level.
The reason behind Hoagland's sweeping
statements is the following:
the Cydonia Investigation has now found
multiple examples of The Message of Cydonia - identically "coded"
elsewhere in the Solar System... including, here on Earth!
What
the "Message of Cydonia" reveals, which Hoagland discusses above, is
the fundamental, multidimensional nature of -- you guessed it -- the
consciousness unit. We had said that the consciousness unit's fundamental
existence is expressed as a sphere that pulsates through the differing Platonic
Solids as it "breathes."
The
next dimension above our own is home to the simplest shape of all, which Plato
associated with the element of fire -- namely, the tetrahedron. And, it is a
statement of fact that Hoagland's team discovered the unmistakable mathematical
signatures of a circumscribed tetrahedron -- a tetrahedron placed within a
sphere.
As
we will show in later chapters, they found striking evidence of this energetic
configuration in many of the bodies in our Solar System.
Then,
the plot really thickened when the same mathematical figure was seen as being
expressed in an enigmatic formation in a modern-day crop of wheat.
Hoagland‘s
team took the Barbury Castle crop formation discussed in the last chapter and
discovered literally identical mathematics as those of the circumscribed
tetrahedron.
For
example, the three rings in the center gave all the proper angle measurements
to indicate that they represent a sphere. This was done by comparing the angle
of each ring against the vertical circular line that would define the sphere
[see diagram.]
When
coupled with the plainly visible tetrahedron, it becomes immediately apparent
that we are seeing a precise mathematical depiction of one of our
“consciousness units. ” [Note: The lines that gave
Hoagland the 19.5 and 49.6-degree values in the picture were from where the
tetrahedron shape itself crossed through the rings.]
So what we see is an outside force drawing us a
geometrically precise map of an energy field that covers everything from
protons to planets. At this point, the truth behind this law of the Universe is
becoming more and more crystal clear.
There are many different sources coming together, and
they are all trying to give us the same information.
In Hoagland's book The Monuments of Mars, great detail is given to the precise analysis of
these geometric relationships in the city, and it is strongly recommended for
anyone pursuing further studies on this issue.
In the next chapter we will explore another
researcher's completely different and remarkable mapping of these energies on
the physical sphere.
CHAPTER
09: THE CATHIE GRID
This chapter explores the work of Bruce Cathie, which illustrates how the observed flight paths of
UFOs reveal that they are following a "Grid" over the earth, shaped
in the form of a cube and octahedron- two of the seven fundamental geometric
phases of the CU, representing the third and fifth dimension.
We go into
great depth to explore the significant harmonic mathematical discoveries that
Cathie has made from the study of this grid, including his most stellar
achievement of all: Cathie solves the Unified Field paradox of modern physics,
revealing that all of the Creation is simply a function of Light.
We also take
excerpts from the Ra Material to help develop these ideas concerning the
expanding and contracting CU in their "cosmic context."
The
modern scientific history of the Global Grid starts with the work of a
researcher named Bruce Cathie. Though he is not commonly known in UFOlogical
circles, his work is of paramount importance.
Cathie
writes about very complicated mathematical ideas as though they were as simple
as grade-school arithmetic, then humbly insisting that he "isn't a
scientist or mathematician."
In
the midst of this complexity, his work is utterly brilliant, but it leaves all
but the most fastidious readers in the dust.
So,
in this chapter we will look at how this man and his theories fit in to our
overall discussion, which is the Great Cycle and how it relates to the
dimensions and consciousness units as we know them.
Cathie
grew up in New Zealand, which is situated “Down Under, ”
near Australia. He was working in the military when he had the first of a
series of UFO sightings.
For
obvious reasons, he became very highly interested in the fact that he was
seeing these craft in clear sight, and wanted to know more about them. Being on
a large ship at sea, he was able to quite clearly see for a long distance
around him, and it was over time that he began to notice that there was a
seeming regularity to the flight path of the UFOs.
This
regularity fascinated him, so Cathie decided to pursue as much knowledge of it
as he could uncover. He carefully investigated different people‘s sightings and
tried to figure out which way the UFOs had been going. Over time, he realized
that there was, indeed, a pattern present; it appeared that the UFOs were
following certain specific straight-line paths that were always the same.
The
pursuit of this data later led him to the work of French researcher Aime
Michel, who had been studying UFOs for many years and had determined some of
the standard flight paths that they would follow in various parts of Europe.
UFO
sightings would occur time and time again along these "tracklines,"
and Michel determined that the average distance between these lines was 54.46
kilometers. When converting this over to nautical miles, Cathie discovered to
his own surprise that the tracklines were exactly 30 nautical miles apart.
Again, 30 is a fundamental "harmonic" or frequency number.
If
this doesn't seem important, or appears nothing more than a coincidence, it is
important to remember that a "nautical mile" is exactly one minute of
arc on the Earth's surface. Sixty minutes of arc, or sixty nautical miles,
would then equal one degree of arc, and as everyone knows there are a total of
360 degrees in any circular or spherical body.
Since
the Earth itself once may have had a 360-day year, and Hoagland's team
demonstrated this same degree measurement system used on Mars, it is safe to at
least assume the ubiquity of the use of 360 degrees for a circle.
We
know that 360 is one of the most fundamental "frequency numbers" in
the Universe, and its derivation may have been a direct result of the
observations that could be made surrounding its natural existence on the Global
Energy Grid.
Again,
this is speculation, however let's look at a few
facts. First of all, in future chapters we will take a look at Carl Munck's
work, known as "archeocryptology." This work unquestionably
demonstrates that the Ancients were using a 360-degree system when building
their monuments on Earth.
Hoagland's
team discovered that the distance between the "Face" and the
"D&M Pyramid" amounts to precisely 1/360th of the pole-to-pole
diameter of Mars. This discovery led to many other stunning breakthroughs that
would only come about in a 360-degree based system.
In
Part Three of this book, we will point out the fact that the Earth year seems
to be a key timekeeper in the Solar System, locking in and describing many
other cycles.
In
the case of Cathie's discoveries, we find that the lines of magnetic force that
made up the Global Grid are always 30 arc-minutes apart. Based on this, we
might wonder if it is not simply a system of maps that the UFOs are using to
travel, but rather a visible system of energy lines.
If
this is true, the adaptation of 360 degrees to a planetary sphere may simply be
an observation of the organization of its lines of force. This might also help
to better explain why we have seen this number in so many other places as well.
So,
from Cathie's discoveries, we know that every half-degree of arc on the Earth's
surface was a potential UFO trackline, for a total of 720 latitude lines and
720 longitude lines. Says Cathie:
I
found that by using units of 30 minutes of arc latitude north-south, and 30
minutes of arc longitude east-west, on my Mercator's map, a grid pattern was
formed into which a great number of UFO reports could be fitted.
I
eventually had a map with sixteen stationary and seventeen moving UFOs plotted
on grid intersections and tracklines.
Having
satisfied myself that my reasoning and plotting were not false, I considered
that I had good proof that New Zealand, possibly other countries, and probably
the whole world, were being systematically covered by some type of grid system.
Thus,
when one looks into the history and origin of Cathie‘s work, that person
invariably sees a map of New Zealand with a series of straight lines on it.
That might prove as a stumbling block to Americans, simply because it has not
been done over a map of New York State, for example.
However,
it is a suitable and definite system that Cathie was observing, made more
interesting by its identical connection to the work of Aime Michel, the French
UFO researcher who also discovered "tracklines" in Europe.
The
next major item of interest in Cathie‘s work was an object that was
photographed clear at the bottom of the sea, at a depth of 2,500 fathoms, or
13,500 feet, by the naval survey ship Eltanin. The object was located in an
area 1,000 miles west of Cape Horn.
What
this ship photographed is what appears to be a large metal staff coming
straight up out of the sea bed, with an ascending spiral of small bars coming
off of it at right angles to the original. The image could be thought of as a
series of crosses spiraling upwards.
The
entire shape has a very obvious artificial, geometric design; the distance
between each set of bars is the same, and the width of each set is the same.
The seven bars strongly suggest a relation to Octave-based harmonics, with the
smaller bars at the top completing the idea.
Furthermore,
the end of each bar ends in a small sphere, as though it was intentionally
polished into that shape. The officers of the Eltanin tried to insinuate that
it was nothing more than a marine organism, but when Cathie pressed one of them
on the topic, he admitted that it looked like a genuine artifact.
Obviously,
no one desired this knowledge to get out to the public, as it crossed into the
lunatic fringe with such things as UFOs and pyramids. But Cathie was determined
not to let this one slip by; instead, he saw it as an object of great
importance. It would later become a crucial piece of evidence in discovering
the map of the Global Grid.
Obviously,
in Cathie‘s time there was no submarine that could possibly have gone clearly
to the bottom of the entire ocean, below the point where the continental shelf
drops off. This object was obviously fashioned by some sort of intelligence,
and Cathie himself had seen and heard reports of UFOs that would fly directly
into the water.
He
also had a sighting of a UFO that fired a glowing, rodlike "object"
into the ocean. This object did not glide forward on its descending path in an
arc as you would expect, but rather followed a precise straight-line path,
apparently violating the natural laws of acceleration that should affect a body
in free-fall when it has an initial velocity at the time that it was released.
This
led Cathie to believe that the UFO had precisely aimed the object to land on
the sea floor at a distinct point, and that the object could very well be the
same as the one that he had seen a photograph of. Thus, he concluded that the
photograph from the Eltanin showed an object with all the hallmarks of
intelligent design of one form or another, and most likely not of humankind.
The
next thing that caught Cathie‘s attention was that the object itself appeared
to be fashioned like an antenna, as though energy of some sort was going
through it. This was further supported by the idea that the direction of each
bar could correspond to a direction of energy; each bar seemed to be
approximately 20 degrees offset from the one beneath it.
So,
Cathie thought all of this through, and realized that there had to be some kind
of a connection to the UFOs he was seeing that seemed to effortlessly travel
under the sea as well as in the air. But what could it be?
The
answer came when he realized that this object could well be an antenna or a
focuser for the same global energy formation that he was now beginning to chart
out through the flight paths of UFOs. He was able to obtain the coordinates
that the Eltanin was on when it made the photograph, and thus was able to
deduce the exact position of the object, which he then started referring to as
an “aerial. ”
Cathie‘s
work only gets more and more intriguing as it progresses. From this aerial
along with his other coordinates that he developed, he was able to figure out a
simple, planet-wide form for the shape that the energy lines the UFOs were
traveling on.
In
a true Eureka-style frenzy of insight, he grabbed his child‘s toy ball and
graphed out the formation with a felt tip pen; a picture of the ball is given
on the back of his first book entitled Harmonic 33. The ball illustrates a
series of circles that surround the planet, and those circles intersect at
certain distinct points.
Perhaps
at this point it should not surprise us that these points perfectly illustrate
a cube and octahedron within a sphere, where its points are defined by the
intersections of a series of perfect circles.
Point
A represents the true magnetic north pole, whereas point B represents the more
ideal “grid pole. ” Once again, we are seeing two of
the geometries in our “consciousness unit ” forms
emerging on the Earth, entirely through the graphing of the flight paths of
UFOs and an apparently artificial object located on the sea floor.
Since
this time, Cathie has produced several books, and the degree of precision that
his grid has to such things as the siting of nuclear power plants, UFO
sightings, ancient sites and other paranormal phenomena is highly significant.
This is covered in much better detail in Cathie's books, such as The Energy
Grid.
In
the early stages of his work, Cathie believed that this Grid energy was
essentially being created and upheld by the “aerials ”
themselves. (He would later rescind this point.) He believed at the time that
the entire Global Grid was built by the extraterrestrials, and that it was
somehow responsible for balancing the energy on Planet Earth.
He
theorized that the extraterrestrials were frantically going around and
repairing their grid whenever they could get the chance, desperately trying to
balance our electromagnetic and magnetic disturbances from things like
underground nuclear testing. Cathie believed the energy we created in these
cases could tear the Earth to pieces if we were not given outside assistance.
Thus,
Cathie believed, it was a very valiant service that the visitors were
providing. And, even though we can see that they did not "build" the
Grid per se, these "aerials" certainly could represent their
technological efforts to balance it.
Over
time, as we just briefly went over, Cathie began to make some serious
connections between this grid and the energy that it produces. Without
question, his single greatest contribution to the future technology of human
civilization is his "cracking" of the code behind the Unified Field
Theory of Physics.
This
theory, as we have stated in the past, would unite gravity and electromagnetism
among other things, giving us the opportunity to create gravity with
electricity, producing propulsion systems similar to those found in UFOs.
Einstein's
own equation of relativity gets very close to this Unified Field in and of
itself. Almost everyone knows that the equation reads as follows: Energy equals
Mass times The Speed of Light (C) squared, or E=MC2.
What
Einstein hoped to do was to solve this equation for the Speed of Light alone.
He believed that the value for mass could eventually be substituted as a
measurement of light. If this was done, then all of Creation could be expressed
as being made up of Pure Light -- mass and energy entirely a function of Light.
This is the true "unified field" that Einstein was searching for.
As
amazing as it must sound, Cathie solved this problem. In the Grid, he
discovered an expression of Mass that was phrased in terms of the Speed of Light.
(At the end of this chapter, we will print his solution. Further information
can be found in his publications.)
However,
even though Cathie "cracked the code" of the Unified Field Theory,
what is actually more interesting and important to us is the discoveries that
he made along the way.
As
Cathie approached the solution to the puzzle, he unearthed many fundamental
discoveries that forever change our understanding of "sympathetic
vibrational physics," and the precise numbers involved in studying these
universal vibrations that determine the behavior of "zero-point
energy" or aether.
The
Speed of Light as we now know it is measured in seconds. One of Cathie's
initial discoveries involved coming up with a different way to measure time, in
order to equate it more precisely with the harmonics of the Earth's Grid
itself. Right now, our system of seconds works quite well for us, counting in a
60-based system.
We
have a day of 24 hours. Cathie discovered that the harmonics of the math for
the Grid become much simpler if we have a day of 27 "grid hours"
instead of our usual 24. This is simply done by factoring in an 8 to 9 ratio-
in other words, for every eight hours in our current system, there are nine
hours in the "harmonic" system.
Since
this is a very simple adjustment, it certainly is possible that this is a
natural aspect of the Universe- in other words, both
the 8-based system and the 9-based system will show different types of
harmonics. Eight is the basis of the Octave, and nine is the basis of the Diatonic musical scale.
So,
to arrive at this new time value, all you would do is increase the number of
hours in the day. You would leave the same values of 60 minutes per hour, and
60 seconds per minute. Obviously, this would change the values for hours and minutes,
making them shorter, since you now have to squeeze 27 hours into our regular
day of 24.
So,
if we solve for the number of "grid seconds" in one "grid
day," we come up with 97,200 grid seconds total. (27h x
60m x 60s.)
If
any reader decides to start dividing 97,200 by fundamental "harmonic
numbers" such as 9, interesting things will happen. 97,200 divided by 9
equals 10800, a harmonic of 1080, which is the fundamental Gematrian number for
the Moon.
(666
is the number for the Sun, 1080 for the Moon and 1746 the "fusion
number" between the two. 666 is the number you get if you count 1-36 and
add all those numbers together, and 36 is also a key harmonic number in the
Diatonic musical scale as we have shown.)
1080,
the Moon number, is also precisely half of the Moon's diameter in regular
English miles, and that is an important point. The 2160-mile diameter of the
Moon is quantitatively identical to the 2,160-year age of the Zodiac.
In
future chapters we will discuss the fact that 12 of these zodiacal "ages"
add up to 25,920, the same number as our Great Solar Cycle and the long-term
wobbling cycle of the Earth known as precession.
So
this is our first "hint" that the ancient measurement of the inch,
foot and mile may be directly connected to this universal harmonic system. In
chapter 17, Carl Munck will make this point much more visible for us.
If
we divide 97,200 by 9 again, we get 1200, another fundamental number as the
harmonic of 12. Anyone who wishes to "play" with this and knows a
little about harmonic numbers will quickly be satisfied.
You
can try a series of divisions by 6, by 5 and by 3 to see the interesting
results -- repeating numbers and other "harmonic" values. We can
definitely see why Cathie favored the 9-based number 97,200 as the harmonic ideal
for the number of "grid seconds" in one Earth day -- an absolute
number for how much distance in harmonic time that the Earth has traveled.
Although
this does not correspond with our current measurement of time rooted in the
number 8, it appears to be the best way to rectify the Earth's orbit with the
harmonic system. We will show as we go along that 97,200 "grid
seconds" is a very important number for charting the pulsating frequencies
of a CU.
Furthermore,
the harmonics of Cathie's number for the Earth grid in seconds, our 97,200,
also reduces down to 972. This is another multiple of 36, again showing us its
harmonic nature as a musical frequency, fundamentally connected to the Diatonic
scale. 972 divided by 36 is 27, the number of hours in a Grid day.
So,
we can clearly see that planetary harmonies emerging, expressed in elegant
harmonic numbers for their orbits. Richard Hoagland revealed at a MUFON
conference in 1997 that the orbit of Mars had been exactly 666 Martian days
long in the past, due to the changing gravitational interactions of the planet
with its two moons, so this is yet another way for us to see this in effect.
Cathie
then ties these "grid seconds" together with the speed of light, and
recalculates this value based on harmonic mathematics. When we think of our
current value for the speed of light, this value is based on the mathematics
and time that we now use.
When
we change those seconds into harmonic or grid seconds, introducing the transcendental
properties of the ratio of 9, (which again is the building block of the Diatonic series as well as the master frequency number of
the Maya,) the value of the speed of light will also change.
What
we never could have expected is the amazing, fundamental harmonic number that
the speed of light changes into!
In
order to "set up" our final point that will tie into the Solar Cycle
in later chapters and our study of the consciousness units, we need to explore
Cathie's discussion of light waveforms and how they would work in the atom.
Cathie informs us of the fact that the true atom would not look like a Solar
System as we think of it, but rather as a spherical mass.
Light
travels in a circular, three-dimensional wave, a wave that spirals to a certain
height and a certain depth. You could graph this in two dimensions as a regular
"sine wave," with a horizontal line for its midsection.
If
you picture this light wave moving forward at a set speed, you can visualize
how a sphere would be formed. The light spiral would begin at the midpoint of
the wave, which would be the North Pole of the sphere.
The
wave spirals out to maximum height and "lowers" to the median again
as it reaches the sphere's equator, forming the first hemisphere. Then, the
second hemisphere is formed the same way, as the wave "lowers" to its
lowest point and again rises to the median. See the diagram for support in
visualizing this.
The
numbers at the bottom represent the harmonics that Cathie discovered as being
associated with this movement.
Naturally,
you could measure it as a "particle," namely the sphere, or a
"wave," namely the waveform making up the sphere. So, with this
conceptual invention, Cathie provided a solution for what is known in Physics
as the "wave-particle duality," where light can appear as either a
particle or a wave depending on how you observe it. He also indicates how
antimatter is formed as a result of the spiraling motions involved.
We
remind the reader that this system bears remarkable similarity to our own
theory regarding the inner workings of "consciousness units." Cathie
displays this as a rather two-dimensional system, essentially moving left to
right and right to left in a spiral.
Cathie
uses a "wave" for the diagram, and we now know from studies such as
those of Dr. Michio Kaku that the "waves" are actually superstrings,
which we assert to be lines of energetic force in a unified "sea" of
aether energy.
We
also have reason to believe, from various psychic and physical sources that we
have listed, that these "waves" must originate from a center point or
Oneness and move outwards as the energy expands, then collapse back inwards yet
again as it contracts.
So,
with only a very slight tweaking, we can see how Cathie has discovered
"consciousness units" in his own right, as atoms. All we have to do
is see them as being formed of superstrings that travel in spirals, expanding
outward in a spherical form from a central point or nucleus.
Cathie's
atom is formed almost exactly the same as he thought it was; only the vector or
direction of the spirals needs to be changed. Since we know the Earth to be a
gigantic consciousness unit as well, providing a spherical "field" to
hold these energies, this explains why Cathie's grid shows us two of the
Platonic Solids -- the octahedron and cube.
We
have already said that the tips or corners of each of the Platonic Solids
represent the points where the spirals all converge, giving them greater
gravitational / energetic strength.
This
interplay of forces at the "nodes" shows up as straight-lined
magnetic fields within the expanding sphere, all harmonically spaced. This
harmonic spacing is the fundamental definition of all the Platonic Solids we
have been discussing.
THE HARMONIC SPEED OF LIGHT
We
have now determined that Cathie set up a basis for measuring time using a
system of "grid seconds," where the normal 86,400 seconds in a day
based on a harmonic of 8 are expanded into 97,200 seconds, based on a harmonic
of 9.
In
so doing, one day of Earth's rotation was split up into 27, or 9 x 3 "grid
hours." The number of "grid seconds" per day comes out to be the
extremely harmonic number of 97,200. This is how Cathie achieved the first step
towards putting the Speed of Light in grid terms; getting a time measurement
based on grid seconds.
The
Speed of Light as we now express it is measured in miles per second. We have
already seen how Cathie converted the value of a second into its harmonic
ideal, the Grid Second. We now also need to convert our regular system of miles
into a grid-based measuring system.
As
we remember from the discussion of the work of Aime Michel and the UFO
tracklines that were symmetrically spaced apart from each other, Cathie used
the system of "nautical miles" to determine where the "grid
lines" were placed.
We
also know that one nautical mile is equal to one minute of arc on the Earth's
surface, and that there is a "grid line" every 30 minutes. So, what
we need to do is change the miles in the speed of light equation into nautical
miles, or minutes of arc, as the two are interchangeable.
Therefore,
the "grid speed" of Light would be expressed as (x) minutes of arc
per grid second.
The
incontrovertible truth of Cathie's findings is that the "Grid Speed of
Light" is EXACTLY 144,000 minutes of arc per grid second in free space.
As
we are about to see, this becomes one of the most important points in the book,
as it shows us that there is a direct connection between light frequencies and
sound frequencies - the mathematics of the numbers are literally identical.
Twice the value of 144 is 288, which is the first value in the Diatonic scale
that we have been investigating.
As
we look into this even further, we can see that the fundamental, harmonic value
of 144,000 for the speed of light is precisely the same as the fundamental
harmonic values for many different things, including:
- the Mayan
Calendar's baktun, at 144,000 Earth days;
- the Bible
number of the 144,000 souls who will Ascend;
- the
fundamental "building block" of all sound vibration frequencies, 144;
- the
fundamental Gematrian "frequency number" for light, 144;
- And, of course, the harmonic of 12
times 12.
So,
the Gematrian meaning for the number 144 is 'light.' Obviously, we must
question if these archaic designers of this Biblical numerological system were
aware of the same information as Cathie; we now see that they were right: 144
really is light!
As
another interesting harmonic point, physicist John Nordberg reveals that
current physics still uses a time unit based on a traditional second, and this
unit is a direct statement of how fast the second hand moves through a
360-degree circle on a clock face as opposed to how fast the Sun moves in one
360-degree circle through the sky.
There
are 86,400 seconds in the Sun's 360-degree arc, representing one day of time.
So, to get the amount of relative movement between one second in the 360-degree
clock face and one second in the Sun's apparent 360-degree movement, we divide
86,400 by the number of seconds in one 360-degree circle, or one minute, which
is 60 seconds.
The
ratio that we are left with is 1440, which represents our current perception of
time: in other words, one second of our time is 1440 times faster in its movement
through its arc than the movement of the Sun through the arc it traces in our
sky.
When
we combine this with Cathie's true harmonic value of 144,000 arc-minutes for
the Speed of Light in one "grid second," we can see that there are
quite interesting harmonic parallels there.
More
importantly, the speed of light is harmonically the same as the speed of the
baktun measuring units in the Great Cycle, as we will see in later chapters. It
also is a function of the harmonics making up the consciousness units [CUs.]
So,
there is a fundamental relationship between Light itself, Sound, and the Solar
Cycle. (The Solar Cycle is a pulsation of Light, expressed through planets and
star rotations. This Light pulsation works in octaves, giving us the
dimensions.) Cathie had just told us above that light forms spheres as it
travels, and a CU is a spherical energy that pulsates.
We
have also suggested that the sphere of a planet can provide a large-scale
harmonic for the pulsation of the CU, and now Cathie has resolved our basic
"planetary measurement values" such as the mile into fundamental Grid
harmonic terms that help us calculate the true harmonic passage of time.
One
of Cathie's most impressive "harmonic" renderings of the Earth as a
CU is the distance from the center of the earth to the average height of the
atmosphere. This value is given as 4320 arc-minutes, which reduces down to 432,
the number of "Consecration" and the fundamental vibration for the
sixth node in the octave.
So,
it would appear that the arc-minutes are indeed vital in demonstrating the
Earth's harmonic proportions. Now that we have solved for the speed of Light in
harmonic time and arc-minutes, we can see why; it comes out to an exact
harmonic of 144.
So
essentially, by using this system of Grid mathematics, Cathie has determined
how a consciousness unit is mapped out at the most minute, fundamental levels -
using 360-degree-based "grid seconds" and minutes of arc.
Not
only do we see the mapping of a CU, we also see its fundamental relationship to
Light, and the harmonics of Light. Since the harmonic principles of the CU are
literally identical between the Earth and the atoms, we will also see that the
cycles of the Solar System are also a harmonic function.
The
planets move through space not in two-dimensional circles as we usually see
them, but in spirals, since the Galaxy is also rotating and moving the Solar
System forward as a unit. If you looked at a planetary orbit in non-moving,
empty space, it would travel in a spiral.
So,
the planets spiral in a harmonically identical fashion as the superstrings
within a consciousness unit, only much slower. The planets originated from the
center, the Sun, as super-hot gas and dust, and are now spiraling outward from
the Sun at a slow, predictable and harmonic rate of speed as planets.
Similarly,
the CU starts at its center and spirals outward in superstrings. So, the Solar
System is indeed a giant, harmonic consciousness unit.
Let's
take a quote from Ra here to illustrate the point. We will start with an
excerpt from Ra that clearly illustrates the connection between their
definition of the Solar Cycle that we will be discussing in future chapters and
their definition of a consciousness unit. Here is that quote to get us started:
Q: The way that I understand the process
of evolution is that our planetary population has a certain amount of time to
progress. This is generally divided into three 25,000-year cycles. At the end
of 75,000 years the planet progresses itself. What caused this situation to
come about with the preciseness of the years in each cycle?
RA: I am Ra. Visualize, if you will, the
particular energy which, outward flowing and inward coagulating, formed the
tiny realm of the creation governed by your Council of Saturn. Continue seeing
the rhythm of this process.
The living flow creates a rhythm which
is as inevitable as one of your timepieces.
Each of your planetary entities began
the first cycle when the energy nexus was able in that environment to support
such mind/body experiences. Thus, each of your planetary entities is on a
different cyclical schedule as you might call it. The timing of these cycles is
a measurement equal to a portion of intelligent energy.
This intelligent energy offers a type of
clock. The cycles move as precisely as a clock strikes your hour. Thus, the gateway from intelligent energy to
intelligent infinity opens regardless of circumstance on the striking of the
hour.
This
quote will be drawn upon much more in future chapters. What we can see here is
that they refer to the "outward flowing and inward coagulating"
nature of intelligent energy that is on a particular cycle.
This
cycle can be measured very precisely, and it determines when a "frequency
shift" will occur on any planetary body. Now, since we are knee-deep in a
discussion of consciousness units, it is more appropriate for us to bring out
the rest of Ra's quotes.
The
next quote, from pg. 6 of Law of One Book II, continues the concept we have
just seen above.
Intelligent infinity has a rhythm or
flow as of a giant heart beginning with the central sun as you would think or
conceive of this, the presence of the flow inevitable as a tide of beingness
without polarity, without finity; the vast and silent all beating outward,
outward, focusing outward and inward until the focuses are complete.
The intelligence or consciousness of
foci have reached a state where their, shall we say, spiritual nature or mass
calls them inward, inward, inward until all is coalesced. This is the rhythm of
reality as you spoke.
This
quote does sound quite familiar to the one from Walter Russell, which we
reprinted at the beginning of this book:
In My universe there is but one form
from which all forms appear. That one form is the pulsing cube-sphere, two
halves of the heartbeat of My dual thinking.
All forms pulse, therefore, all forms
are two, one form for the inbreathing pulse, which generates, and one for the
outbreathing, radiating one. The cube is the sphere expanded by the outward
breath to black rest in cold space, and the sphere is the cube compressed to
the incandescence of white-hot suns by the inward breath.
Then,
on page 10, Elkins asks Ra a question based on their previous statements and his
own understanding of the physics of Dewey Larson. (We are told in the
introduction to Law of One: Book II that "For those who may wish to study
Larsonian physics, The Structure of the Physical Universe is a good book with
which to begin.")
Dr.
Elkins' question does indeed set out the fundamental basis for
"consciousness units" as we have discussed them so far. What is
important for us right now is that Ra affirmed the correctness of this
statement, for our own galaxy.
Q: ...I think that possibly we are at
the most important part of what we are doing in trying to make it apparent how
everything is One, how it comes from one intelligent infinity. This is
difficult, so please bear with my errors in questioning.
The concept that I have right now of the
process, using both what you have told me and some of Dewey Larson's material
having to do with the physics of the process, is that intelligent infinity
expands outward from all locations everywhere.
It expands outward uniformly like the
surface of a bubble or a balloon expanding outward from every point everywhere.
It expands outward at what is called unit velocity or the velocity of light.
This is Larson's idea of the progression of what he calls space / time. Is this
correct?
(It is very important to remember that
Ra refers to this expanding movement of Light as "upward spiraling
Light;" in other words, it travels in a spiraling motion within a
spherical field, thus forming the spherical geometries of the CUs as we have
said.)
RA: I am Ra. This concept is incorrect
as is any concept of the one intelligent infinity. This concept is correct in the context of one particular
Logos, (galaxy,) or Love, or focus of this Creator which has chosen
Its, shall we say, natural laws and ways of expressing
them mathematically and otherwise."
So
what we can see from Ra in this quote is that these "sacred
mathematics" are all a function of the laws that are present within our
own galaxy. That raises up the unique question of how
and why they might be different in another galaxy!
We
won't tackle those questions in this book, as they are not central to the
discussion. Elkins' question on page 12 gives us the answer that we were
looking for, showing us that the Solar System is a crystallized consciousness
unit.
Q: When does the individualization or
the individualized portion of consciousness come into play? At what point does
individualized consciousness take over working on the basic light?"
What
Elkins is really asking is how we, as human entities, end up working with these
expansive energies in our own consciousness. We need to note that Ra's answer
to this question starts out by telling Elkins that there is no
"point" of time when this actually starts, since all time is
ultimately simultaneous.
We
have edited out that brief section, since there are terms in it that haven't
been defined in this book, and we then move forward to the pertinent part of
the answer.
RA: I am Ra... The experience or
existence of space / time comes into being after the individuation process of
Logos or Love has been completed and the physical universe, as you would call
it, has coalesced or begun to draw inward while moving outward to the extent
that that which you call your sun bodies have in their turn created timeless
chaos coalescing into what you call planets, these vortices of intelligent
energy spending a large amount of what you would call first density in a
timeless state, the space/time realization being one of the learn/teachings of
this density of being-ness.
Thus we have difficulty answering your
questions with regard to time and space and their relationship to the, what you
would call, original creation which is not a part of space/time as you can
understand it.
So,
if we look closely at Ra's above quote, it would appear that our existence as a
Solar System of planets is carefully perched on the platform of physical
manifestation. In order for space/time to exist, the coalescing, compression
force has to "begin to draw inward," and this is what we call gravity.
Remember
that Einstein showed us that space/time assembles itself into a fabric, and
that gravity is a function of the curvature of the fabric. Ra resolves this
"gravity paradox" with the notion of the CU on pg. 19 and 20 of these
same sessions, by telling us that gravity "may be seen as the pressing
towards the inner light / love, the seeking towards the spiral line of light
which progresses towards the Creator. This is a manifestation of a spiritual
event or condition of living-ness."
In
other words, gravity is simply the reverse motion of the expansion of the CU.
Gravity is the compression of the CU showing itself in the physical. Also be
aware that this excerpt refers to the spiraling nature of these lines, or
superstrings of light.
Ra
indicated that their answer to Elkins' question was designed to incorporate the
metaphysical principles behind gravity as well as the physical. Gravity, as a
metaphysical concept, is the motion towards the center, or Unity. A bit later
in the book, we get the following interesting exchange between Ra and Elkins
about gravity, which explains this even better.
RA: I am Ra...When all of creation in
its infinity has reached a spiritual gravitational mass of sufficient nature,
the entire creation infinitely coalesces; the light seeking and finding its
source and thusly ending the creation and beginning a new creation much as you
consider the black hole, as you call it, with its conditions of infinitely
great mass at the zero point from which no light may be seen as it has been
absorbed.
Q: Then the black hole would be a point
at which the environmental material has succeeded in uniting with unity or with
the Creator? Is this correct?
RA: I am Ra. The black hole which
manifests third density is the physical complex manifestation of this spiritual
or metaphysical state. This is correct.
So,
what we can see here is the metaphysics of gravity. Each geometric layer of the
CU above our own is a higher level of spiritual density, and that means that it
is moving closer and closer to the One.
Remember
that by the time the consciousness units have reached the point of the sphere,
or the Octave, they have compressed back down into a single "point."
With this quote from Ra, we can indeed see that this is true, and that the
black hole is the best physical example that we can see of this process at
work.
So,
as we Ascend, even as we expand in frequency, we are
in a sense compressing the CUs in our bodies into a form that is closer to God.
(We are informed by these forces that this is not at all a painful process...
we might not even know that it has happened at first.)
Since
Ra tells us that gravity is a function of the spiraling expansion and
contraction of a CU, we can see why these shapes have an effect on Earth's
gravity, forming the grids such as the ones that Cathie's UFOs were flying
upon.
As
we go forward in this book, we will see many more examples of the geometry of
the CU showing up as physical gravitational stresses on the Earth. This point
will be most clearly expressed in the chapter on the Becker / Hagens grid.
When
we look at all of the material we have just quoted from Ra together, we can see
that consciousness units change their frequencies, or dimensional levels, at
predictable, cyclical rates. As we move into Part Three, we will tie this all
together so that we can see that our own Solar System is a consciousness unit
on a specific cycle that is about to rise in frequency.
And
so, to summarize, we started this chapter by looking at the work of Bruce
Cathie, and most recently at his discovery that light waves create spheres as
they travel.
According
to Cathie, what we perceive as our three-dimensional universe is a phase of
matter and anti-matter, with no gaps in between. (Obviously there are gaps,
representing the other dimensions; but it appears to us in 3D that there are
not.)
We
now remind ourselves that Cathie made an incredible discovery. The harmonic
speed of light, phrased in minutes of arc per grid second, is a function of 144
-- the Gematrian number for light.
Cathie
tells us that since our Creation is made up of a matter / antimatter cycle, we
need to double this harmonic -- each pulsation actually must spend half of its
time traveling in the antimatter plane. (See the earlier diagram of the
spherical light wave to help visualize this.)
According
to Ra, this plane would be the reverse of spacetime, known as
"timespace," where the basic properties of space and time are
reversed -- supposedly space is much more inflexible whereas time is much more
flexible, unlike our own spacetime where we can move through space easily but
not through time.
So,
when we double the harmonic of the speed of light we get the harmonic number
288, which as we said is the beginning of the fundamental Diatonic scale of
vibrations.
Time
after time, we are referred to in metaphysical literature as a dimension that
is painfully slow. This slowness is measured by our measurement of the
fundamental speed of light as being "only" a harmonic of 288, or the
first-dimension vibration.
Einstein's
paradox of "light speed" is that as you approach it, mass becomes
larger and larger, to a point of infinity. But as Cathie has solved the
relativity equation for light alone, we can then see that the only threshold we
would ever reach would be a function of C, the speed of light itself.
Therefore,
there really is no mass, only Light. Or, as Ra says,
we gain "spiritual mass" which compresses us back to the Light of the
One. Obviously, this "spiritual mass" is Light, not physical matter.
The
point here is that Light speed is NOT an infinite boundary that cannot be crossed, it just requires your FREQUENCY to change. Think of
the atom with its eight positions for electrons. Were a ninth electron to be
released from the nucleus, it would have no choice but to transition into the
next octave of frequency, since the octave structure cannot be superceded.
So,
when the speed of Light reaches its "critical mass" in our third
dimension, it "jumps" to the next level, or frequency, in the octave.
So,
we will postulate here that as this boundary is breached into the next higher
dimensional frequency, the speed of light would fundamentally increase into its
new notch. We remember that with Cathie's opposing antimatter / matter cycle,
the actual light harmonic is 288.
We
can see this dimensional shifting action of the Speed of Light within the
progressions of sound, as we can raise the pitch of a D at 288 cycles per
second to an E at 324. Cathie tells us that these light-waves form spheres, and
thus if the speed of Light increases, the sphere formed by that light-wave
would be at a "faster" frequency -- and this would be a faster
geometric frequency as well.
Thus,
one could perceive the different Platonic solids as forming in different
dimensions, even though they are only a visual representation of rising
frequencies.
As
we have already indicated, Cathie was able to completely transform Einstein‘s
theory of relativity with a "grid function" that expressed that mass
in terms of the speed of light only. By solving the Relativity theory for
"c", Cathie essentially "cracked the code" of the Unified
Field theory by removing the mass variable and resolving Einstein's entire
equation into light; hence Energy Equals Light.
Thus,
all seen and unseen material in the Universe is a Unified Field of what is
ultimately Pure Light. This is a scientific "discovery" of exactly
what Ra and other spiritual sources have told us all throughout time.
Again,
these unified field equations suggested ways in which the energy could be
utilized for such things as anti-gravity and free energy. Indeed, as a result
of this ongoing research, Cathie drew some very serious interest from the
highest levels of the Secret Government.
After
all, he had solved the Problem of All Problems, the answer to Unified Field
Physics. With this knowledge properly applied, all ET-related sciences were
wide open to explore, including dimensional warping and teleportation.
According
to his literature, government agents would come and ask him many different
questions, wanting to know how he was able to figure all of his information
out. He was hounded and followed, phone lines most likely tapped, et cetera.
Many
tempting and profitable offers have been made for him to work solely for
governmental entities and not release the information to the public, apparently
extending right through to the recent past. Yet, Cathie was undeterred, and
unlike many other researchers of similar caliber, he was never killed.
Instead,
they continued to cooperate with him, and as time went on he could tell that
they knew a great deal about what he was studying, and were using his research
to further their own experiments.
It
seemed that he was discovering crucial details for a system that was being put
into much more practical use than he could have ever imagined. In the next
chapter we will discuss how such a system may have been implemented.
Endnote:
Cathie's primary harmonic equation for
the Unified Field Theory is as follows:
Einstein E = MC2
Cathie M = C + 1 / sq rt
C
Therefore E = (C + 1 / sq rt C) C2